Telecommunications Equipment Installation Guidelines

CenturyLink Corporation Technical Publication

Telecommunications

Equipment Installation Guidelines

Copyright 1993, 1996, 1997, 1998, 1999, 2000, 2001, 2003, 2007, 2016

77350

CenturyLink Corporation Issue O All Rights Reserved July 2016

CenturyLink Tech Pub 77350 Issue N, July 2016

Notice

NOTICE

This document describes CenturyLink’s requirements for Suppliers of Central Office Equipment (Inside Plant – ISP) Installation Services (herein referred to as the “Service Supplier). The information provided in this document includes workmanship guidelines, technical requirements, and Supplier competency requirements.

CenturyLink Corporation reserves the right to revise this document for any reason, including but not limited to, conformity with standards promulgated by various governmental or regulatory agencies; utilization of advances in the state of the technical arts; or to reflect changes in the design of equipment, techniques, or procedures described or referred to herein.

Liability to anyone arising out of use or reliance upon any information set forth herein is expressly disclaimed, and no representation or warranties, expressed or implied, are made with respect to the accuracy or utility of any information set forth herein.

This document is not to be construed as a suggestion to any manufacturer to modify or change any of its products, nor does this publication represent any commitment by CenturyLink Corporation to purchase any specific products. Further, conformance to this publication does not constitute a guarantee of a given supplier's equipment and/or its associated documentation.

Future issues of Technical Publication 77350 will be announced to the industry at least 30 days prior to the issuance date. This notice, which will come through our standard customer notification channels via the Wholesale Markets Change Management Process (CMP), will allow the customer time to comment on the proposed revisions.

Ordering information for CenturyLink Publications can be obtained from the Reference Section of this document.

If further information is required, please contact:

Jeff Bostow Lead Process Analyst

100 CenturyLink Drive Monroe, LA 71203-2041

E-mail: [email protected] Throughout this publication, the term CenturyLink signifies CenturyLink Corporation.

Notice CenturyLink Tech Pub 77350 Issue O, July 2016

COMMENTS on TP 77350

PLEASE SEND YOUR COMMENTS/SUGGESTIONS TO:

CenturyLink Corporation Jeff Bostow

Lead Process Analyst 100 CenturyLink Drive Monroe, LA 71203-2041

E-mail: [email protected]

Information from you helps us to improve our Publications. Please take a few moments to answer the following questions and return to the above address.

Was this Publication valuable to you in understanding the technical parameters of our service? YES NO

Was the information accurate and up-to-date? YES NO

Was the information easily understood? YES NO

Were the contents logically sequenced? YES NO

Were the tables and figures understandable YES NO

and helpful?

Were the pages legible? YES NO If you answered NO to any of the questions and/or if you have any other comments or suggestions, please explain:

(Attach additional sheet, if necessary)

Name Date

Company

Address

Telephone Number E-Mail

CenturyLink Tech Pub 77350 Table of Contents Issue O, July 2016

CONTENTS

Chapter and Section Page 1. Introduction ................................................................................................................. 1-1

1.1 General (Scope of Document) ........................................................................ 1-1 1.2 CenturyLink Quality Audits .......................................................................... 1-1 1.3 Quality Policy Statement ............................................................................... 1-1 1.4 Reason For Reissue .......................................................................................... 1-1 1.5 Document Organization ................................................................................. 1-2

2. General Requirements

2.1 General .............................................................................................................. 2-1 2.2 Facility Access and Security ........................................................................... 2-5 2.3 Facility Environmental Conditions, Upkeep, Storage, and Handling ................................................................................................... 2-8 2.4 Environmental, Safety, and Health ............................................................. 2-10 2.5 Electrostatic Discharge .................................................................................. 2-18 2.6 Fire Protection Policy .................................................................................... 2-18 2.7 Network Alarms ............................................................................................ 2-21 2.8 Equipment Performance Tests ..................................................................... 2-24 2.9 Maintenance Window ................................................................................... 2-24 2.10 Wood Products and Wood for Use in Equipment Locations .................. 2-25 2.11 Letter of Deviation ........................................................................................ 2-26

3. Assembly and Ironwork ............................................................................................. 3-1

3.1 General Requirements .................................................................................... 3-1 3.2 Apparatus ......................................................................................................... 3-2 3.3 Appliance/Base and Utility Outlets and Permanently Mounted Power Strips ..................................................................................................... 3-2 3.4 Auxiliary Framing ........................................................................................... 3-2 3.5 Bolts, Nuts, Screws, and Threaded Rods ..................................................... 3-3 3.6 Cable Racks ...................................................................................................... 3-4 3.7 AC Conduit ...................................................................................................... 3-6 3.8 Cotter Pins ........................................................................................................ 3-6 3.9 Earthquake Considerations ............................................................................ 3-6 3.10 Equipment Removal For Reuse or Retirement ............................................ 3-8


Chapter and Section - continued Page 3.11 Fiber Optic Protective/Distribution Systems ............................................ 3-98 3.12 Frames, Bays, Cabinets, and Stands ............................................................ 3-11 3.13 Framework and Ironwork Components .................................................... 3-16 3.14 Lighting Fixtures ........................................................................................... 3-16 3.15 Rolling Ladders and Tracks ......................................................................... 3-16 3.16 Units of Equipment ....................................................................................... 3-17 3.17 Antenna and associated Transmission Lines ............................................. 3-21 3.18 Earthquake Zone Map .................................................................................. 3-22 3.19 Alignment Tables .......................................................................................... 3-22 3.20 Building Envelope Drilling Procedures ...................................................... 3-23 3.21 Floor Anchors and Installation Instructions .............................................. 3-24 3.22 Floor Anchor Bolt Modification Procedures .............................................. 3-26 3.23 Floor Tile Punch Procedure .......................................................................... 3-27 3.24 Floor Tile Drilling With HEPA Vacuum Attachment ........................... 3-28 3.25 Floor Tile Drilling With Separate HEPA Vacuum That Is Not Attached To Tile Drill.................................................................................... 3-29 3.26 Raised Floors .................................................................................................. 3-29 3.27 Waterproof Floor ........................................................................................... 3-29 3.28 Battery Containment ..................................................................................... 3-30

4. Cable Holes, Penetrations, and Fire/Smoke Protection ........................................ 4-1 4.1 General Requirements .................................................................................... 4-1 4.2 Closure Labels .................................................................................................. 4-2 4.3 Horizontal, Miscellaneous, and Vertical Penetrations ............................... 4-3 4.4 Intumescent Fire Stop Examples ................................................................... 4-3 4.5 Cable Hole/Penetration Designations ......................................................... 4-4 4.6 Approved Materials ........................................................................................ 4-4 4.7 Embargoing Blocked/Exhausted Cable Hole Penetrations ...................... 4-4

5. Cabling, Forming, Running, and Securing ............................................................. 5-1 5.1 General Requirements .................................................................................... 5-1 5.2 Cable Mining ................................................................................................... 5-3 5.3 Bending and Forming ..................................................................................... 5-5 5.4 Protection and Storage .................................................................................... 5-7 5.5 Securing and Supporting................................................................................ 5-8 5.6 Power cables ................................................................................................... 5-10 5.7 Grounding Conductors ................................................................................ 5-11


Chapter and Section - continued Page 5.8 Cable Pile-up .................................................................................................. 5-12 5.9 Coaxial Cables ............................................................................................... 5-13 5.10 Fiber Optic Cable ........................................................................................... 5-13 5.11 Ribbon Cable .................................................................................................. 5-18 5.12 Repair of Damaged Cables ........................................................................... 5-18 5.13 Spliced Cables, Splicing Systems, and Mated Connectable Cables ........ 5-18 5.14 Use of Nylon and Plastic Cable Ties ........................................................... 5-19 5.15 Securing Tables .............................................................................................. 5-20 5.16 Securing Figures ............................................................................................ 5-22

6. Wiring ............................................................................................................................ 6-1 6.1 General Requirements .................................................................................... 6-1 6.2 Fanned and Unsewn Forms ........................................................................... 6-1 6.3 Sewn Forms ...................................................................................................... 6-2 6.4 Protection .......................................................................................................... 6-2 6.5 Cable Tags ........................................................................................................ 6-2

7. Connecting .................................................................................................................... 7-1

7.1 General Requirements .................................................................................... 7-1 7.2 Coaxial Connections and Test/Turn-up Parameters .................................. 7-1 7.3 Connectable Cables ......................................................................................... 7-3 7.4 Crimp Compression Connectors, Splices, and Taps ................................... 7-3 7.5 Quick Clip/Slotted Beam Connections ....................................................... 7-5 7.6 Soldered Connections ..................................................................................... 7-5 7.7 Solderless Wire Wrapped Connections ........................................................ 7-5 7.8 Solderless Wire Wrapped Exhibits ............................................................... 7-7 7.9 Fiber Optic Cable Connections .................................................................... 7-11

8. Equipment Designations ............................................................................................ 8-1

8.1 General Requirements .................................................................................... 8-2 8.2 Color of Characters for Stamping and Labels ............................................. 8-3 8.3 Designation Conventions ............................................................................... 8-3 8.4 Connectors, Connectable Cables, and Fiber Optics (Singles, Duals, and

Quads) ................................................................................................................ 8-4 8.5 Distributing and Protector Frames ................................................................. 8-5


Chapter and Section - continued Page

8.6 Drawings and Assignment Records ............................................................... 8-6 8.7 AC Circuits ......................................................................................................... 8-6 8.8 Batteries and Battery Stands ............................................................................ 8-6 8.9 DC Breakers, Fuses, Switches, and Shunts .................................................... 8-7 8.10 DC Distribution Elements ................................................................................ 8-9 8.11 Conductors, Leads, Bonding/Grounding Points .......................................... 8-9 8.12 Mechanical Equipment and Rooms .............................................................. 8-11 8.13 High Temperature Surfaces ........................................................................... 8-11 8.14 High Voltage Surfaces .................................................................................... 8-11 8.15 Rectifiers, Converters, Inverters, Power Supplies ...................................... 8-11 8.16 Bus bars and Ground Bars ............................................................................. 8-12 8.17 Rolling Ladders ............................................................................................... 8-12 8.18 Cable Rack Systems ........................................................................................ 8-13 8.19 Marking Records / Drawings ....................................................................... 8-13 8.20 Miscellaneous stenciling and Font Size Tables ........................................... 8-13 8.21 Distributing Frame Exhibits .......................................................................... 8-16 8.22 Bay Equipment Labels .................................................................................... 8-17 8.23 Temporary Removal and Installation Tag ................................................... 8-19 8.24 Labels ................................................................................................................ 8-19 8.25 Collocation Decommission Cable Tag .......................................................... 8-21 8.26 Fire Code Power Room Door Placard .......................................................... 8-25 8.27 Alarm / OSS Testing Incompletion Tag ....................................................... 8-26 8.28 Lock out/Tag out Tag .................................................................................... 8-27 8.29 Equipment “Removal from Service” Tag..................................................... 8-28 8.30 Building Columns ........................................................................................... 8-29 8.31 Equipment “Hot Surface” Tag ...................................................................... 8-30 8.32 NFPA “Very Early Warning Fire Detection Alarm System” .................... 8-30 8.33 CenturyLink Pair Gain Site “WARNING” Tag..................................................8.31

9. Power ............................................................................................................................ 9-1

9.1 AC Circuits ......................................................................................................... 9-1 9.2 Primary & Secondary Distribution ................................................................ 9-7 9.3 Battery Primary Conductors ............................................................................ 9-9 9.4 Bus Bars ............................................................................................................ 9-11 9.5 Cabinets ............................................................................................................ 9-12 9.6 Connecting ....................................................................................................... 9-12



9.7 Fuse Bays, BDFBs, BDCBB POWER BOARDs, etc.................................. 9-15 79.8 Fuse Contact Preparation and Protection .................................................................... 9-17 9.9 Knife Switches, Fuses and Fuse Mountings ....................................................................... 9-17 9.10 Standby Engines .............................................................................................. 9-17 9.11 Voltage Distribution Requirements .............................................................. 9-18 9.12 Wire Information Table ...................................................................................9.19

10. Storage Batteries......................................................................................................... 10-1 10.1 Cautions ............................................................................................................ 10-1 10.2 General Requirements and Procedures ........................................................ 10-2 10.3 Initial Battery Charge Procedures for Flooded Cells ................................. 10-4 10.4 Flooded Lead Acid Type Battery Charging ................................................ 10-5 10.5 Initial Charge and Turnover Requirements for Flooded Cells ................. 10-6 10.6 Initial Charge Procedures for Valve Regulated Lead Acid Cells ............. 10-8 10.7 Charge Procedures for Valve Regulated Lead Acid Cells Stored for

Reuse Applications ......................................................................................... 10-8 10.8 Electrolyte Spills .............................................................................................. 10-8 10.9 Installation/Removal Requirements for Lithium-based Batteries ........... 10-9 10.10 Installation Requirements for Nickel-based Batteries ................................ 10-9

11. Bonding and Grounding ........................................................................................... 11-1 11.1 General Requirements ................................................................................... 11-1 11.2 Central Office and Facility Main Ground Systems .................................... 11-2 11.3 Grounding Frames, Bays and Cabinets ........................................................ 11-3 11.4 Equipment Chassis Shield and Quiet Grounding

Connections ..................................................................................................... 11-3 11.5 Isolated and Integrated (Non-Isolated) Grounding Systems ....................... 11-4 11.6 Circuit Pack Storage Cabinets ....................................................................... 11-4 11.7 Foreign Object Grounding ............................................................................ 11-4 11.8 Raised Floor Environments ........................................................................... 11-5 11.9 Radio Site Ground System ............................................................................. 11-6 11.10 Standby Engines and Engine Room Equipment ........................................ 11-7

12. Central Office Equipment Removals, Installs and the Proper Handling of Hazardous Materials .................................................................................................. 12-1 12.1 Introduction ..................................................................................................... 12-1 12.2 The independent contractor is responsible for ....................................... 12-1 12.3 Equipment Bays And Mercury- Containing Equipment .......................... 12-1


Chapter and Section - continued Page 12.4 Batteries- Flooded Lead Acid ........................................................................ 12-2 12.5 PCB-containing Capacitors And Ballasts ..................................................... 12-3 12.6 Radioactive Tubes .......................................................................................... 12-3 12.7 Fluorescent Light Tubes ................................................................................. 12-4 12.8 Asbestos Floor Tile .......................................................................................... 12-4 12.9 Spills and Emergencies .................................................................................. 12-5 12.10 Radiography/x-ray ........................................................................................ 12-5

13. Documentation ........................................................................................................... 13-1 13.1 General .............................................................................................................. 13-1 13.2 Forms List ....................................................................................... 13-1 13.3 Electronic Job Packet....................................................................................... 13-2 13.4 Contents of Job Packet .................................................................................... 13-3 13.5 Job Log .............................................................................................................. 13-4 13.6 Job Completion or Extension Reporting RG 47-0002 ................................. 13-4 13.7 Job Information Memorandum (JIM) RG 47-0004 ................................... 13-5 13.8 Service Interruption/Degradation Report RG 47-0013 ............................. 13-6 13.9 Request For Disposition of CenturyLink Communications Material RG47-0010 ........................................................................................................ 13-6 13.10 Test Records .................................................................................................... 13-7

14. Forms ............................................................................................................................. 14-i 14.1 RG33-0017- Straight Bill of Lading (BOL) .................................................... 14-1 14.2 RG33-0043 - Document and Material Disposition ...................................... 14-2 14.3 RG41-0046 - Installation Job Log ................................................................... 14-3 14.4 RG41-0170 - Installation Alarm Assignment and Capacity Sheet ............ 14-4 14.5 RG47-0001 - Storage Battery Report ............................................................. 14-5 14.6 RG47-0002 - Installation Revised/Completion Notice .............................. 14-8 14.7 RG47-0004 - Job Information Memorandum(JIM) .................................... 14-11 14.8 RG47-0005 - General Method of Procedure (MOP) and CLEC MOP .... 14-12 14.9 RG47-0009 - Report of Equipment Disconnected from Existing Plant .. 14-16 14.10 RG47-0010 - Request for Disposition of CenturyLink

Communication Material ............................................................................ 14-17 14.11 RG47-0013 - Service Interruption/Degradation Report .......................... 14-19 14.12 RG47-0157 - Cable Test Record ................................................................... 14-20 14.13 RG47-0160 - CLEC Provisioning Form ....................................................... 14-22 14.14 RG47-0161 – Quality Checklist .....................................................................14.29


Chapter and Section - continued Page 14.15 RG47-0162 - Detailed Method of Procedure (Switching and Switching-related Power) ........................................................................... 14-30 14.16 RG47-0165 - Central Office Common Systems Order Form ................... 14-33 14.17 RG47-01660 - Job Site Material Inventory for Missing Items .................. 14-34 14.18 RG47-0168 - Application for Letter of Deviation ...................................... 14-35 14.19 RG47-0169 - Letter of Deviation .................................................................. 14-36 14.20 CenturyLink Policy on Photography in Central Offices ......................... 14-36 14.21 820/840 Series Forms for Power Equipment Turn-Up .......................... 14-37 14.22 REGN-154-004-001RG Environmental Equipment Notification – Batteries .......................................................................................................... 14-37

15. Method of Procedure (MOP) ......................................................................................................... 15-1 15.1 General Information........................................................................................ 15-1 15.2 General Method of Procedures (MOP) and CLEC MOP ........................... 15-3 15.3 Detail Method of Procedures ......................................................................... 15-3 15.4 Method of Procedure Preparation: ............................................................... 15-3 15.5 Work Description Details ............................................................................... 15-4 15.6 Method Of Procedure Write-Up Review ..................................................... 15-6 15.7 Approval/Signing Authorities ..................................................................... 15-6 15.8 Service Interruptions ...................................................................................... 15-7 15.9 Network Change Management System ........................................................ 15-8 15.10 Planned Impairment of Fire Protection Systems ...................................... 15-12

16. Competitive Local Exchange Carrier (CLEC) ........................................................ 16-1 16.1 General Requirements .................................................................................... 16-1 16.2 Cable Holes, Penetrations, and Fire/Smoke Protection ............................ 16-3 16.3 Equipment Designations ................................................................................ 16-3 16.4 Local Exchange Carrier (CLEC) Grounding ............................................... 16-4 16.5 Competitive Local Exchange Carrier (CLEC) Cancel, Expire,

Decommission or Change of Responsibility .............................................. 16-5 16.6 Collocation Job Documentation..................................................................... 16-7

17. Definitions .................................................................................................................. 17-1 17.1 Acronyms ......................................................................................................... 17-1



18. References .................................................................................................................................................................................... 18-1 18.1 CenturyLink Publications .............................................................................. 18-1 18.2 Ericsson Publications. ..................................................................................... 18-1 18.3 Ordering Information ..................................................................................... 18-1 18.4 Trademarks ...................................................................................................... 18-1

Sketches and Figures

3-1 Network Framework Mounting Hole Reference ....................................... 3-18 4-1 Floor Plan Sketch ............................................................................................... 4-5 5-1 Starting Stitch .................................................................................................. 5-22 5-2 Kansas City Stitch............................................................................................ 5-23 5-3 Sewing First Layer ......................................................................................... 5-24 5-4 Sewing Second Layer ...................................................................................... 5-24 5-5 Supporting and Sewing Cables to Supports at Turns ................................ 5-25 5-6 Securing Cable to Support with Kansas City Stitch ................................... 5-26 5-7 9 Ply Cord splice technique ............................................................................. 5-26 5-8 Chicago Stitch Used to Sew Cables Together .............................................. 5-27 5-9 Banding of Cables with 9 Ply cord ......................................................... 5-28 7-1 Solderless Wrapped Connecting .................................................................. 7-7 7-2 Minimum Wraps ............................................................................................... 7-8 7-3 Example of Good and Bad Wire Wrap ........................................................... 7-9 7-4 Solder on Terminal ......................................................................................... 7-10

Tables Table 3-1 Walls and Columns ............................................................................................... 3-12 Table 3-2 Aisle Spacing – New Applications .................................................... 3-12 Table 3-3 Number of Mounting Spaces on Common Equipment ................. 3-19 Table 3-4 1-3/4” Mounting Spaces on Common Equipment ......................... 3-20 Table 3-5 2-0” Mounting Spaces on Common Equipment ............................. 3-21 Table 12-1 Quick Reference Guide for Hazardous Materials by Facility Type....................................................................................................... 12-6 Table 12-2 Environmental, Health & Safety Departmental Contact List ....... 12-7 Table 16-1 Grounding Conductor Size Requirements .................................... 16-14

CenturyLink Tech Pub 77350 Chapter 1 Issue O, July 2016 Introduction

TOC1-i

CONTENTS

Chapter and Section Page

1. Introduction ................................................................................................................. 1-1 1.1 General (Scope of Document)........................................................................ 1-1 1.2 CenturyLink Quality Audits ......................................................................... 1-1 1.3 Quality Policy Statement ............................................................................... 1-1 1.4 Reason For Reissue ......................................................................................... 1-2 1.5 Document Organization................................................................................. 1-2

CenturyLink Tech Pub 77350 Chapter 1 Issue O, July 2016 Introduction

1-1

1. Introduction

1.1 General (Scope of Document)

This document provides Inside Plant (ISP) Service Suppliers with the general requirements affecting building facilities and their care, the installation and removal of telecommunications equipment, and related service requirements to be met prior to such activities. The term “Service Supplier” shall include all CenturyLink installation personnel, contractors or contracted agents, or Tenant organizations working in CenturyLink facilities.

This document provides material and workmanship requirements for Engineering and Service Suppliers and shall be a basis for audit and evaluation of a job. The workmanship items described in this section are generic and specific in nature and may be applicable to all installation and removal operations. In addition, the Service Supplier shall adhere to the specific installation (new and/or reuse), removal, and operational standards established in applicable equipment specifications as well as all handbooks, technical publications, Standards Configurations, National, State, and Local requirements that are needed to successfully complete installation/removal of the equipment and associated cabling.

Service Suppliers will also adhere to their Interconnection Agreements (ICAs) for Interconnection, Unbundled Network Elements, Ancillary Services and Resale of Telecommunications Services whichever is applicable.

CenturyLink values the relationships established with the Competitive Local Exchange Carriers (CLECs). The Service Supplier(s) are hereby instructed that in the unlikely event that CenturyLink technical publications pose unintentional conflicts of local, state, and national technical requirements, adherence to the most stringent standard(s) will prevail. The CenturyLink Multi-state Negotiations Interconnection Agreement and related documents can be found at: http://www.centurylink.com/wholesale/clecs/nta.html.

1.2 CenturyLink Quality Audits

The Service Supplier’s workmanship is subject to periodic inspection (audit) by representatives of CenturyLink Local Planning Engineering & Construction (LPEC). Information relative to this process may be reviewed in CenturyLink Technical Publication 77369 and is accessible at this link: http://www.centurylink.com/techpub/.

1.3 Quality Policy Statement

To establish long term, mutually beneficial relationships between CenturyLink and Service Suppliers, focused on a joint process committed to reduce cost and cycle time, improving service and providing continuous quality improvement.

http://www.centurylink.com/wholesale/clecs/nta.html

http://www.centurylink.com/techpub/

Chapter 1 CenturyLink Tech Pub 77350 Introduction Issue O, July 2016

1-2

1.4 Reason For Reissue

This publication has been revised to:

• Revise the format to the standard CenturyLink format.

• Update and reconfigure all chapters.

1.5 Document Organization

This document is organized as follows:

Chapter Title

1 Introduction

2 General Requirements

3 Assembly and Ironwork

4 Cable Holes, Penetrations, and Fire/Smoke Protection

5 Cabling, Forming, Running, and Securing

6 Wiring

7 Connecting

8 Equipment Designations

9 Power

10 Storage Batteries

11 Bonding and Grounding

12 Central Office Equipment Removals, Installs and the Proper Handling of Hazardous Materials

13 Documentation

14 Documentation Forms

15 Methods Of Procedure (MOPs)

16 Competitive Local Exchange Carrier

17 Definitions

18 References

Paragraphs in this publication are numbered as an aid in communicating with Service Suppliers.

CenturyLink Tech Pub 77350 Chapter 2 Issue O, July 2016 General Requirements

TOC2-i

CONTENTS


2. General Requirements .................................................................................................. 2-1 2.1 General ................................................................................................................ 2-1 2.2 Facility Access and Security ............................................................................ 2-5 2.3 Facility Environmental Conditions, Upkeep, Storage, and Handling ...... 2-8 2.4 Environmental, Safety, and Health .............................................................. 2-10 2.5 Electrostatic Discharge ................................................................................... 2-18 2.6 Fire Protection Policy ..................................................................................... 2-18 2.7 Network Alarms.............................................................................................. 2-21 2.8 Equipment Performance Tests ...................................................................... 2-24 2.9 Maintenance Window .................................................................................... 2-24 2.10 Wood Products and Wood for Use in Equipment Locations ................... 2-25

2.11 Letter of Deviation………… .... ……………………………………………...2-26


2-1

2. General Requirements

2.1 General

The following definitions are relevant throughout this publication: a) Service Supplier: A subcontracted entity procured with the sole intent of providing central office-based installation-related services constituting equipment placement and/or removal activities. b) Contractor: This term is synonymous with "Service Supplier." c) CLEC/CLEC sub contractor(s): This term is also synonymous with the "Service Supplier" definition but applies specifically, to those contracted entities that perform equipment placement and/or removal activities under the direction of the CLEC Customer. NOTE: When a Contractor or CLEC/CLEC subcontractor is engaged in activities solely within its own specific collocation space, such Contractor or CLEC/CLEC subcontractor will not be considered a Service Supplier for purposes of this Technical Publication.

2.1.1 It shall be the responsibility of the Service Supplier to have access to this document on site and available for use at all times during the installation/removal activities at CenturyLink Central Office, radio site, and fiber repeater hut locations.

2.1.1.1 Suppliers and/or representatives that perform COE installation-related work on behalf of CenturyLink will notify by email the appropriate CenturyLink Quality Manager(s) & Area Plant Supervisor (APS) a minimum of one week before both their proposed Job Start and Job Completion dates. For jobs lasting less than one week, a single notification with both the projected start and completion dates is sufficient.

2.1.2 No work shall start or be performed without a properly signed Method of Procedure (MOP). A copy of the MOP shall be posted in the work area. Refer also to Par. 15.2.3.

The MOP standard may apply to Competitive Local Exchange Carrier (CLEC) equipment installed in a “Caged Location” area or a “Cageless Location” space. Refer to Section 16.1.

The MOP requirement does not apply to Competitive Local Exchange Carrier (CLEC) equipment installed solely in a “Caged Location” area or a “Cageless Location” space that does not potentially impact the interoperability of the CenturyLink network. If CLEC equipment is installed or work is done that is not installed solely in a “Caged Location” area or a “Cageless Location” space and/or potentially affects the CenturyLink network, the MOP requirement shall apply. Note: Examples of the Local Network facility space requiring CLEC MOP compliance include (but are not limited to) the SPCS area footprint, and all TOLL/IOF lineups (including all DSX-1, DSX-3, Timing/Synchronization, PBD/BDFB locations and all Fiber Optic distribution bays). When required, a copy of the MOP shall be posted in the work area. Refer also to Par. 15.2.3 and Par. 16.1 respectively.

Chapter 2 CenturyLink Tech Pub 77350 General Requirements Issue O, July 2016

2-2

2.1.3 All work identified in the CenturyLink Fireworks Tracking Number specification and the detailed engineering specification shall be completed per CenturyLink standards.

2.1.4 Priority of Standards:

2.1.4.1 Fire, Life Safety Standards, local, state and Federal.

2.1.4.2 CenturyLink Planning & Engineering Guidelines (PEG), CenturyLink Engineering Standards (TP77351, TP 77355, and TP77385) and other Technical Publications and Guidelines. Arrangements not specifically identified in this document shall adhere to the intent of the requirements and guidelines. If a conflict occurs between standards, the more stringent standard shall apply. With respect to Wholesale Markets Interconnect Agreements (ICAs) that oversee CenturyLink’s interaction with Competitive Local Exchange Carriers (CLECs), this standard shall also apply in its entirety to CLEC equipment placed/installed within the facility footprint of the CenturyLink Local Network by the CLEC and/or its assigned sub-contracted entities, and not entirely within a “Caged Location” area or a “Cageless Location” space (where OSHA/NEC, or UL requirements prevail). This standard does not apply to CLEC (or its assigned sub-contractors) when their business activities* are limited solely to their designated collocation spaces via existing collocation access badging procedures. During the installation of a new “Caged Location” area or a “Cageless Location” space, all ICA, OSHA/NEC, or UL provisions prevail. Refer to Section 16 for additional information. * Note: Examples of CLEC business activities inapplicable to TP 77350 guidelines include(s) all reasonable and customary day-to-day capacity provisioning, circuit and network maintenance operations, and all basic system interoperability work routines. All other work types are considered “Inside Plant (ISP)” construction activities (Refer to Chapters 3-15) and are applicable to TP 77350 guidance and oversight. 2.1.4.3 Manufacturer’s requirements for their network elements. Manufacturer’s requirements shall meet or exceed all CenturyLink requirements or the more stringent requirement shall be followed.

2.1.5 Service Suppliers doing business with CenturyLink for a product type shall show a level of expertise in that technology based on past history, training, or related work experience. Service Suppliers shall be required to comply with all suppliers’, manufacturers’, and CenturyLink Standards and Publications. Lack of documentation or information is not an acceptable reason for noncompliance with this Standard. Service Suppliers shall not deviate from Standards outlined in this Technical Publication without written permission of the CenturyLink Design Engineer.

2.1.6 The Service Supplier shall be responsible for providing tools and expendable/consumable materials necessary to complete the job. When applicable,


2-3

specialty items (e.g., miscellaneous mounting and termination material) will be provided by the manufacturers of specific equipment vintages applicable to standard PEG requirements).

2.1.7 The Service Supplier shall purchase and pay for electrical permits, licenses, and inspections.

2.1.8 The Service Supplier's work shall meet the applicable requirements of the National Electrical Code (NEC), CenturyLink Requirements; CenturyLink PEG and Technical Publications, local requirements of the municipality, and city or state laws that vary from the NEC requirements.

2.1.9 When a Service Supplier becomes aware of a preexisting defective condition, that impacts the work on the job they are installing or removing; the Service Supplier shall contact the CenturyLink Design Engineer and take corrective action if authorized. This activity shall be documented in the job log.

2.1.10 Any questions not answered by CenturyLink Technical Publications, the job specification, PEG, drawings/records, etc. shall be referred to the “Design Engineer.” This requirement applies to all references made in this standard, which instructs the installation supplier to contact the “Design Engineer”.

2.1.11 To ensure that any subcontracted Line Extension (LE) Inside Plant (ISP) Supplier (LE-ISP Supplier), that is approved through Fireworks/Bidmaster, has the requisite competencies to perform central office-based workmanship, the following policy is enacted and enforced as follows: The LE-ISP Service Supplier is required to have a competent Lead Resource (e.g., Lead Technician and/or Supervisor assigned to oversee all installation/removal activities as they are commenced and executed. This competent Lead resource must be highly skilled and meet Competency Level 4 (CL-4) criteria identified below. The competent Lead resource must also be a duly-authorized entity of the primary LE-ISP Supplier and understands and assumes full liability on behalf of their company for the scope of work being performed. In the event that the primary LE-ISP Supplier uses the services of a subcontractor and/or partner company, the primary LE-ISP Supplier is accountable for ensuring that the subcontractor provides a competent Lead resource that has successfully passed the requirements stipulated by the CenturyLink Central Office Equipment Engineering & Installation/Technical Standards Policy Review commensurate with a Competency Level Four (CL-4) certification.

Note 1: CenturyLink requires that the Lead resource provided by the primary LE-ISP Supplier, be a direct employee of the primary LE-ISP Supplier and remain at the site location for the duration of the installation/removal project’s scope.

Note 2: CenturyLink requires that all subcontractors be pre-approved by CenturyLink prior to the engagement of any work activity and that the Lead resource provided by the approved subcontractor will remain at the job site location for the duration of the


2-4

installation/removal project’s scope. CenturyLink further requires that all ISP installation subcontractor and/or partner company representatives and resources obtain a successful certification to the CenturyLink Central Office Engineering/Installation/Technical Standards Policy Review: http://www.qservice-supplier-certification.com/. As defined per Ericsson’s (formerly Telcordia Technologies) Generic Requirements GR-1275-CORE (Issue 12, December 2010), Par. 23-3, the competency levels are described as follows:

2.1.11.1 Competency Level One (CL-1): is an entry-level position that is instructed and supervised by a Competency Level Three (or Four) installer or the LE-ISP Supplier Supervisor. This individual is capable of performing the addition/removal of common systems equipment/hardware only. Typically, this installer does not progress to CL-2 without a minimum of 1-1/2 years of experience or equivalent as determined by the LE-ISP Supplier’s training process. This installer does not perform work operations on equipment/circuits that are “in-service” and/or working.

Note: Service Supplier representatives at this competency level are prohibited from working in CenturyLink central office locations. CenturyLink Local Planning/Engineering Construction (LPEC) personnel are exempt from this requirement.

2.1.11.2 Competency Level Two (CL-2): is a position that requires a minimum of 1-1/2 years of experience and a certificate of completion from a training facility providing an installation workmanship skill-based curriculum. To progress to CL-2, this individual must demonstrate workmanship competencies in non-power or passive equipment types (e.g., assembly & ironwork, cabling, wiring, connecting, and equipment designations).

2.1.11.3 Competency Level Three (CL-3): is a position that requires (in addition to CL-2), a minimum of 3 years of accumulated experience, plus the capability to perform work operations without supervision or direction. The work operations include all non-power (passive) equipment types, all general purpose equipment types (e.g., multiplexers, alarms, carrier systems, and all DS0 through DS3-level circuit wiring), all self-contained intelligent systems (e.g., fiber optic terminals), and software driven intelligent systems (e.g., Stored Program Control, Digital Cross-connect, Signal Transfer Points, Frame Relay, Asynchronous Transfer Mode, Internet Protocol and Routers). In addition, this installer shall perform MOP preparation, resolve job specification/drawing discrepancies, and provide in-process quality audits, and act as an “in-charge” for the LE-ISP Supplier when needed.

Note: Competency certification is obtained for LE-ISP Suppliers by accessing the following link and determining individually which level of certification is needed based on Scope of Work and subcontracted necessity: http://www.centurylink-supplier-certification.com/. Levels CL-1, 2, and 3, by selecting and successfully passing the “COE Only” exam sets.


2-5

2.1.11.4 Competency Level Four (CL-4): is a position that requires (in addition to CL-3), a minimum of 6 years of accumulated experience, plus the capability to perform test and turn-up procedures on working equipment (including power distribution sources), provide circuit modifications, software retrofits/upgrades, and battery removals/ additions. Note: Competency certification is obtained for Level CL-4 by selecting and successfully passing the “COE + Power” exam sets.

2.1.12 Any CenturyLink employee can expel a Service Supplier’s representative and/or subcontracted agent from the facility, if their work operation(s) and/or competency level is suspect, i.e., puts the network at risk or fails to comply with appropriate safety requirements. When the Service Supplier or subcontracted agent is removed from a CenturyLink facility for any reason, the CenturyLink LPEC representative shall be notified immediately. Disciplinary action, when warranted, shall be taken.

2.2 Facility Access and Security

2.2.1 General

The amount of space and its location for administrative purposes shall be a matter of agreement between the Service Supplier and CenturyLink prior to the start of services. Every attempt shall be made to locate this area outside the room or compartments containing equipment. In those cases where this cannot be accomplished, the area should be set as far away as possible from the equipment locations. Drawings, documentation, and all other flammable materials used in and around equipment and cable racks during the work shift shall be removed at the end of each shift and stored in a fire resistant environment.

The Service Supplier shall be allowed normal use of lunchroom facilities. The Service Supplier shall be allowed access to toilet facilities, if available, in locations where work is in progress. The Service Supplier shall be responsible for providing portable toilet facilities in locations where facilities are not provided.

Temporary trailers/structures shall be provided by the Service Supplier for installation related work or storage room if space is not available at the work location. Any temporary trailers/structures shall be located away from the buildings and property lines accordance with local building and fire codes requirements outlined by the local authority having jurisdiction.

2.2.1.1 Service Suppliers and their hired and/or subcontracted personnel shall wear a valid company picture identification (above the waist, and visible from the front) at all times while at CenturyLink locations. This identification shall show: the company name, employee name, employee signature, card number, and current photograph of the employee. Contracted labor working for a Service(s) Supplier shall wear their company identification badge plus a tag showing Service Supplier Name (e.g., ABC Communications).


2-6

2.2.1.2 The Service Supplier shall be responsible for providing their own telephone service, when calls are not directly associated with a CenturyLink project. See Paragraph 2.2.2.

2.2.1.3 The Service Supplier shall be in the facility only during authorized scheduled work hours as agreed to and defined in the MOP. LPEC personnel associated with a Service Supplier shall notify the “Business & Consumer Markets Group”, (B&C) facility representative before or upon entering a facility to check their installers’ work. This is not required if Service Supplier personnel are on site and the job is in progress.

2.2.1.4 The Service Supplier shall be responsible for the security of all access keys and electronic access cards assigned to them. The duplication of keys and cards is expressly prohibited. Access keys/cards shall be obtained during the initial contact/MOP meeting with the B&C representative. These keys/cards shall be returned to the B&C representative at the time of the job completion or if the Service Supplier will be away from the job for an extended period due to job interruption. The B&C manager can elect for a Service Supplier to have keys/cards and be responsible for distribution and security. Service Suppliers that have leased office space in a CenturyLink Central Office(s) shall have access to their leased space, but shall not be allowed in other equipment areas unless covered by an active job and an approved MOP.

2.2.1.5 The Service Supplier shall be responsible for the security of job provided materials and equipment.

2.2.1.6 Whenever the Service Supplier is responsible for work activities in any CenturyLink-owned facility, the premises shall be kept secure at all times. The Service Supplier shall guard against and take the necessary steps to prevent unauthorized visitors from entering the CenturyLink facility for which the Service Supplier is responsible. Under no circumstances is the Service Supplier ever allowed to permit access into a CenturyLink facility, using their assigned security access card, to anyone not approved, cleared, or badged by CenturyLink Central Access Control Center (CACC).

2.2.1.7 The Service Supplier shall keep doors, windows, and gates closed.

2.2.1.8 The Service Supplier shall be responsible for the security of their personal valuables, tools, materials, and the parking of private and company vehicles.

2.2.1.9 Unauthorized equipment or devices such as cameras, recording equipment, metal ladders, etc. shall not be permitted in CenturyLink locations without the permission of the CenturyLink representative or CenturyLink Access Control (Refer to Par. 14.25). The CenturyLink Photography Policy is described in the CenturyLink Photography Policy located in the CenturyLink Wholesale Web site.

2.2.1.10 The Service Supplier shall not bring alcohol, drugs, firearms, weapons, or explosives into any CenturyLink facility.

2.2.2 Service Suppliers doing business with CenturyLink shall be allowed to use CenturyLink phone facilities under the following conditions:


2-7

2.2.2.1 Use of central office telephones, fax lines and copy machines shall be covered during the Method of Procedure (MOP) process.

2.2.2.2 The central office representative will designate a telephone line and fax machine for use by the central office installation supplier on the "General" MOP.

2.2.2.3 Use of the telephone line, copy and fax machines shall be for CenturyLink business only. No personal calls, copies or faxes are allowed. Business calls not associated with CenturyLink are not allowed.

2.2.2.4 All non-business toll/long distance calls shall be incurred by the Service Supplier.

2.2.2.5 The Installation Service Supplier shall make use of their company-provided communications device to minimize incoming calls to the CenturyLink central office facilities. The installer should give out their Company’s cell phone number, not the central office telephone number whenever possible. The intent of this guideline is to minimize the number of times a Central Office Technician will have to answer phone calls directed to the Service Supplier.

2.2.2.6 No cellular, PCS phones or other Radio Frequency Transmitting devices shall be on or used inside the perimeter of the Toll/IOF or Switch footprint of the Central Office. Those devices are allowable in the designated break areas.

2.2.2.7 Copy machines are to be used for CenturyLink business only. Business copies not associated with CenturyLink business or personal copies may not be made at any time.

These guidelines emphasize agreement and management of communications and copy machines between B&C Personnel and the Service Suppliers.

2.2.3 Special Procedures for Buried Equipment Enclosures

Special Procedures for working at Controlled Environment Vaults (CEV), Controlled Environment Chambers (CEC), Universal Enclosures (UE), or any other partially or fully buried equipment enclosures.

2.2.3.1 Prior to going to a site location, contact the Network Reliability Operations Center (NROC) at 1-800-258-8144 to verify if there are any outstanding alarms and to confirm the nature of the alarm(s) or to inform the NROC that you will be working at the site.

2.2.3.2 Upon arrival, verify that the air conditioner and exhaust fans are running by listening for the fan motors. Depending on the climate conditions at the time you arrive at the site, the ventilation system may not be on at that moment. If there is any indication that the air conditioning and/or ventilation are not operational, procure an appropriate type gas meter and test the site before entering.

2.2.3.3 A “red” light on a small box near the entrance indicates a potentially hazardous condition, do not enter. If a red light condition exists, listen and verify that the exhaust


2-8

fan is operating and if so, the red light should clear within 10-15 minutes at the most. If the red light does not clear; test, purge, and ventilate the site as described in the Safety Assurance System procedures for utility holes or contact your supervisor or state safety manager for further direction.

2.2.3.4 Upon opening the hatch or door, a “green” light on a small box near the entrance indicates a safe atmospheric condition and you may enter and proceed with your work.

2.2.3.5 If neither the red nor the green bulb is lit after opening the site door, replace the bulbs before taking further action. If either bulb still does not light, do not enter the site without first contacting your supervisor or state safety manager for further direction. For National Network Services CEVs, contact 1-800-860-6485 opt. 1 for guidance.

2.2.3.6 After entering the site, visually inspect the battery plant for any evidence of swelling (bulging), leakage, excessive heat (20 degrees or more above room temperature), warping of the batteries, or the smell of “rotten egg gas” (hydrogen sulfide). If any problems are evident, exit immediately and contact the Power and Environmental Alarm Center at 1-800-713-3666 to arrange for a complete evaluation of the power plant.

2.3 Facility Environmental Conditions, Upkeep, Storage, and Handling

Note: CenturyLink personnel are responsible for temporarily halting a job if environmental concerns are not complied with and for notifying the responsible manager/design engineer should this action be taken.

All building construction or alterations, within the areas requiring service supplier occupancy, shall be completed before the scheduled start of the installation or removal activity. Any exceptions shall be subject to agreement between the Service Supplier and CenturyLink Design Engineer.

CenturyLink shall provide suitable openings in buildings to allow material to be placed in position. This includes necessary openings, and ducts for cable and conductors through floors and walls as required.

CenturyLink shall provide the necessary ceiling inserts, embedded ceiling channel, or appropriate fastening arrangements in areas in which the equipment requires ceiling fastening.

CenturyLink shall provide floor and wall penetration sleeves when required to facilitate proper fire stopping. (Refer to Chapter 4).

CenturyLink shall provide electric power for all necessary purposes with suitable outlets in rooms in which work is to be performed. Heat and general illumination (permanent or temporary) in rooms in which work is to be performed and material stored shall also be provided by CenturyLink. Temporary lighting provided by Service Suppliers shall be removed at the end of the job.


2-9

2.3.1 The Service Supplier shall not adjust or disable any Heating, Ventilation, Air Conditioning (HVAC) or humidity control, or building alarm system. Any necessary adjustments should be requested through the CenturyLink building representative.

2.3.2 The Service Supplier shall provide CenturyLink approved fire retardant protection for floors (typically the use of double-sided Masonite has been authorized for floor protection), walls, and equipment when necessary to prevent damage. Walls constructed for temporary purposes during and installation or removal shall be constructed with fire retardant materials such as UL Listed lumber meeting FR-S 15P3/AWPA C-20 requirements.

2.3.3 The Service Supplier shall remove all job related flammable materials, such as waste paper, foam, plastic, cloth bags, packing boxes and crates, and similar materials on a daily basis. Solvents and paints shall be properly stored in their original, labeled containers and placed in an approved storage cabinet or a proper storage container when not in use.

2.3.4 The Service Supplier shall not create unauthorized holes and openings in the facility. The design engineer shall be contacted and shall be responsible for making arrangements to place necessary openings. Service Suppliers shall not subcontract the core drilling of floors or walls for the purpose of running cable.

2.3.5 Service Supplier shall be on site to receive and ensure proper storage of all material associated with their jobs. Failure to comply with CenturyLink “Fire Combustible Policy” any time during a job shall result in serious disciplinary actions. All equipment and materials shall be unpacked and cleaned outside of the facility or in the facility's authorized unpacking area. Equipment and materials shall be free of contaminates prior to being brought into the work area.

2.3.6 The cutting, filing, drilling, and milling or painting of the CenturyLink approved auxiliary framing, cable rack, etc. shall be done outside of the equipment area. When drilling of equipment or structures that cannot be removed from a facility proper protection and the use of a HEPA vacuum shall be required.

2.3.7 General cleaning of the equipment facility or storage area in which work is being done shall be performed by the Service Supplier during the entire installation or removal process. Care shall be taken to generate a minimal amount of airborne dust.

2.3.8 The Service Supplier shall use only a High Efficiency Particulate Arrestor (HEPA) vacuum, capable of filtering particles larger than .3 microns in size, and equipped with a static dissipative hose in CenturyLink facilities to capture dust and chips from the drilling of floors, walls, ceiling, ironwork, and equipment during the uncrating process, and while cleaning cable racks and equipment.

2.3.9 The Service Supplier shall be aware of conditions that may result in equipment thermal shock (failure or degraded service brought on by a rapid change in temperature) and take steps to prevent its occurrence.


2-10

2.3.10 At the completion of a job, the Service Supplier shall arrange for the disposal of remaining job generated trash, excess material, removal of temporary floor, wall, column, and equipment protection placed by the Service Supplier, and removal of the Service Supplier’s tools and property. The Service Supplier shall arrange for the turnover of all CenturyLink owned materials using RG33-0043 and/or any other forms in Chapter 14, associated with this function (e.g., the Material Reclamation Form). All equipment manuals and documentation shall be turned over to the B&C representative for proper storage. Combustible material shall not be left in the equipment frames, bays, or cabinets.

2.3.11 The Service Supplier shall establish and maintain documented procedures for the handling, storage, packaging, preservation, and delivery of products.

2.3.12 The Service Supplier shall provide methods of handling products to prevent damage or deterioration.

2.3.13 Upon removal of equipment bays or other items anchored to the floor, the installer shall have the option of repairing the vacated floor anchor holes using an approved fibrous mortar/cement filler compound (e.g., Hydraulic Waterplug cement) or contacting the CenturyLink Real Estate Work Environment Center (Real Estate Project Management) at 1-800-201-7033 to make arrangements.

When floor tile replacement is necessary, the installer shall call the telephone number above to arrange for repair. When the CenturyLink Real Estate Work Environment Center is selected to coordinate the repair, the Service Supplier will record the ticket number on the Job Start & Completion Checklist (RG 47-0158).

Note: The exception to this requirement is power room areas equipped with battery [spillage] containment in which Real Estate Operations will arrange for repairs.

2.4 Environmental, Safety, and Health

2.4.1 General

Note: CenturyLink has area safety personnel that have been assigned responsibilities for environmental, safety, and health conditions. When questions arise concerning these topics, the appropriate individual may be reached by calling the Fire and Property Protection UNICALL hotline (1-800-654-2525) and requesting the Environmental Health & Safety Manager for the state where work is taking place. (Refer also to Par. 12.4).

2.4.1.1 The Service Supplier shall perform a walk through of the work area, specific to their job, prior to the start of the installation or removal activity to identify any hazardous conditions and to become familiar with the location of emergency equipment. Any hazardous conditions existing in the work area shall be documented, reported to the Design Engineer, and recorded in the job log.

2.4.1.2 At the completion of the job, the Service Supplier shall again walk through the area and ensure that all of the Service Supplier’s tools, equipment, protective materials,


2-11

and trash, etc. has been removed and that no hazardous conditions have been created by the service supplier.

2.4.1.3 Any work in a building that requires the use of Radiography or x-ray techniques by Service Suppliers for the purpose of locating building structural members and verifying core drill locations. The following information shall be part of the contractor’s specifications, and part of their MOP document for the work at hand.

• Prior to starting work the Service Supplier must visually survey the building and the proposed work area floor by floor and in order to notify personnel about the potential for exposure to radiation and to assure that the exposure area is clear of personnel for the duration of the work.

• The Service Supplier must post warning signage on exterior doors or at safe

perimeter distances from the exposure area to warn personnel. Example: "WARNING - Radiography is in Progress (on Floors 1, 2, 3, etc.)", or "WARNING - x-ray equipment is in use (on Floors 1, 2, 3, etc.)"

• During each radiographic operation the contractor shall maintain continuous direct visual surveillance of the operation to protect against unauthorized entry into a high radiation area. No radiography or x-rays are permitted around the switch equipment.

• Certain equipment (for example, magnetic tape storage devices, etc.) may be susceptible to the electro-magnetic fields produced by an X-ray machine. In order to ensure that sensitive equipment is protected, the location of the radiography must be cleared by the CenturyLink Real Estate Building Manager and the B&C Central Office Manager. All radiography shall be done with approval of the CenturyLink Real Estate department. If a particular location cannot be x-rayed due to the sensitive nature of nearby equipment, other, less-intrusive techniques which don't create potentially harmful electro-magnetic fields must be used; or another location to place penetrations must be found.

2.4.2 Personal Protective Equipment (PPE)

Note: Service Supplier’s employee(s) shall assess the workplace to determine if hazards that require the use of personal protective equipment (for example, head, eye, face, hand, or foot protection - includes the removal of jewelry around energized equipment). The Service Supplier shall ensure that their employee’s or contracted labor are trained (recorded on a training record), and instructed on the proper use of safety equipment. The Service Supplier is responsible for providing their employees with PPE as needed.

2.4.2.1 Protective goggles or face shields shall be provided and worn where there is any danger of flying particles or corrosive materials.


2-12

2.4.2.2 Approved safety glasses shall be worn at all times in equipment areas, when working with tools or in any areas where there is a risk of eye injuries such as punctures, abrasions, contusions or burns.

2.4.2.3 Personnel, who need corrective lenses (glasses or contacts) in working environments having harmful exposures, are required to wear approved safety glasses, or protective goggles.

2.4.2.4 Protective gloves, aprons, shields, or other means shall be provided and required where employees could be cut or where there is reasonably anticipated exposure to corrosive liquids, chemicals, blood, or other potentially infectious materials.

2.4.2.5 Hard hats shall be worn where danger of falling objects exists. Hard hats must be inspected periodically for damage to the shell and suspension system. Damaged hats shall be replaced.

2.4.2.6 Appropriate foot protection is required where there is the risk of foot injuries from hot, corrosive, or poisonous substances, falling objects, crushing or penetrating actions.

2.4.2.7 Approved respirators shall be on site and available in areas where an emergency situation could require their use.

2.4.2.8 All protective equipment shall be maintained in a sanitary condition and ready for use.

2.4.2.9 Eye wash facilities, quick drench shower or Eye wash flush kits shall be located within 12 feet of any work area where employees are exposed to injurious corrosive materials. Special equipment needed for electrical workers shall also be available. Note: If such facilities are not present the supplier shall notify the B&C facility manager for the immediate resolution.

2.4.2.10 Food or beverages shall not be consumed on the premises within the area of the telecommunication equipment or in areas where there is exposure to toxic material, or other potentially infectious materials. All food or beverage trash shall be disposed of outside equipment areas.

2.4.2.11 Suppliers shall provide protection against the effects of occupational noise exposure when sound levels exceed the OSHA noise standard.

2.4.2.12 Work procedures, protective clothing and equipment shall be available and on site prior to cleaning up spilled toxic or otherwise hazardous materials or liquids. . Note: If such facilities are not present the supplier shall notify the B&C facility manager for the immediate resolution.

2.4.2.13 Procedures shall be in place for disposing of or decontaminating personal protective equipment contaminated with, or reasonably anticipated to be contaminated with, potentially infectious materials.


2-13

2.4.3 It is the Service Supplier’s responsibility to instruct their employees in the appropriate safety procedures and practices, the operation and safe use of tools and equipment, and to ensure employee adherence to these procedures and practices while on CenturyLink premises.

2.4.4 Hand And Portable Powered Tools

All tools and equipment (both company and employee owned) used by employees at their workplace shall be in good condition. Note: If tools requiring calibration are on site, these tools shall have the date of calibration attached to that tool. Tools with an expired calibration data shall not be used.

2.4.4.1 Hand tools such as chisels and punches, which develop mushroomed heads during use, shall be reconditioned or replaced as necessary. Broken or fractured handles on hammers, axes and similar equipment shall be replaced promptly. Worn or bent wrenches shall be replaced regularly. Appropriate handles shall be used on files and similar tools.

2.4.4.2 Personnel using tools shall be aware of the hazards caused by faulty or improperly used hand tools. Appropriate safety glasses, face shields, etc. shall be used while using hand tools or equipment which might produce flying materials or be subject to breakage. Tool handles shall be wedged tightly in the head of all tools.

2.4.4.3 Jacks, hoists or other lifting devices shall be checked periodically to ensure they are in good operating condition.

2.4.4.4 Tools cutting edges shall be kept sharp so the tool will move smoothly without binding or skipping.

2.4.5 Portable (Power Operated) Tools and Equipment

Grinders, saws and similar equipment shall be equipped with appropriate safety guards.

2.4.5.1 Power tools shall be used with the correct shield, guard, or attachment, recommended by the manufacturer.

2.4.5.2 Portable circular saws shall be equipped with guards above and below the base shoe. Circular saw guards checked to assure they are not wedged up, thus leaving the lower portion of the blade unguarded.

2.4.5.3 Rotating or moving parts of equipment shall be guarded to prevent physical contact.

2.4.5.4 Cord-connected, electrically operated tools and equipment shall be effectively grounded or be of the approved double insulated type.

2.4.5.5 Protective covers/ guards shall be in place over belts, pulleys, chains, and sprockets, on equipment such as concrete mixers, pumps, motor generators, and air compressors.


2-14

2.4.5.6 Portable fans shall be provided with full guards or screens having openings 1/2 inch or less.

2.4.5.7 Hoisting equipment available and used for lifting heavy objects shall have hoist ratings and characteristics appropriate for the task.

2.4.5.8 Ground-fault circuit interrupters shall be provided on all temporary electrical 15 and 20-ampere circuits, used during periods of construction. (Refer to Par. 2.4.8.8.)

2.4.5 9 Pneumatic and hydraulic hoses on power operated tools shall be checked regularly for deterioration or damage.

2.4.6 Powder-Actuated Tools

Personnel that operate powder-actuated tools shall be trained in their use and carry a valid operator's card.

2.4.6.1 Powder-actuated tool shall be stored in locked containers when not being used.

2.4.6.2 A sign at least 7 inches by 10 inches with bold face type reading "POWDER-ACTUATED TOOL IN USE" shall be conspicuously posted when the tool is being used.

2.4.6.3 Powder-actuated tools shall be left unloaded until they are actually ready to be used.

2.4.6.4 Powder-actuated tools shall be inspected for obstructions or defects each day before use.

2.4.6.5 Powder-actuated tool operators shall have and use appropriate personal protective equipment such as hard hats, safety goggles, safety shoes and ear protectors.

2.4.7 Confined Spaces

Confined spaces shall be thoroughly emptied of any corrosive or hazardous substances, such as acids or caustics before work operations begin.

2.4.7.1 All lines to a confined space, containing inert, toxic, flammable, or corrosive materials shall be “valved off” and blanked or disconnected and separated before work operations begin.

2.4.7.2 Impellers, agitators, or other moving parts and equipment inside confined spaces shall be locked-out if they present a hazard.

2.4.7.3 Natural or mechanical ventilation shall be provided prior to confined space entry. Note: Contact the Design Engineer if adequate ventilation is not present.

2.4.7.4 Atmospheric tests shall be performed to check for oxygen deficiency, toxic substances and explosive concentrations in the confined space before work operations begin.

2.4.7.5 Adequate illumination shall be provided for the work to be performed in a confined space. This may be accomplished by using temporary lighting.


2-15

2.4.7.6 Atmosphere inside the confined space shall be frequently tested or continuously monitored during the work operation. There shall be an assigned safety standby employee outside of the confined space, when required, whose sole responsibility is to watch the work in progress, sound an alarm if necessary, and render assistance.

2.4.7.7 The standby employee shall be appropriately trained and equipped to handle an emergency. The standby employee or other employees shall be prohibited from entering the confined space without lifelines and respiratory equipment if there is any question as to the cause of an emergency.

2.4.7.8 Approved respiratory equipment shall be required if the atmosphere inside the confined space cannot be made acceptable.

2.4.7.9 Portable electrical equipment used inside confined spaces shall be either grounded or insulated, and equipped with ground fault protection.

2.4.7.10 Before gas welding or burning is started in the central office, a HOT WORK PERMIT must be acquired, and all hoses checked for leaks. Compressed gas bottles are forbidden inside of the confined space. Torches may be lit only outside of the confined area, and the confined area tested for an explosive atmosphere each time before a lighted torch is to be taken into the confined space.

2.4.7.11 Employees using oxygen-consuming equipment (e.g., torches and furnaces in confined spaces), shall ensure that sufficient air is provided to assure combustion without reducing the oxygen concentration of the atmosphere below 19.5 percent by volume. CenturyLink Safety Managers can recommend approved oxygen gas testers if needed. Refer also to Table 12-2.

2.4.7.12 Whenever combustion-type equipment is used in a confined space, provisions shall be made to ensure the exhaust gases are vented outside of the enclosure.

2.4.7.13 Confined spaces shall be checked for decaying vegetation or animal matter which may produce methane.

2.4.7.14 Confined spaces shall be checked for possible industrial waste, which could contain toxic properties.

2.4.7.15 Confined space which is below the ground and near areas where motor vehicles will be operating shall be checked with a gas monitor (capable of detecting carbon monoxide) prior to entering the space (unless the space has a permanently-installed monitor). (The OSHA 8-hour exposure limit for carbon monoxide is 35 ppm or 100 ppm for 15 minutes.)

2.4.8 Electrical Cautionary notice

All electrical energy, whether AC or DC and independent of voltage, in CenturyLink facilities constitutes an arc hazard and must be treated accordingly. Insulated tools must be used and be in compliance with OSHA. All exposed live parts in the work area shall be protected from physical damage and any unplanned contact. In addition, voltages above 48 volts nominal, whether AC or DC, constitutes a shock hazard.


2-16

Protection provided will be done to accommodate the voltage. No work shall be performed or allowed to go forward until and unless inspected by an authorized CenturyLink representative.

2.4.8.1 Electrical work done in CenturyLink facilities shall be done in compliance with OSHA/NEC, CenturyLink technical publications and state/municipal codes.

2.4.8.2 Employees, Service Supplier, and contracted labor are required to report as soon as practicable any obvious hazard to life or property observed in connection with electrical equipment or lines. All electrical work shall adhere to CenturyLink approved products and PEG.

2.4.8.3 Employees, Service Suppliers and contracted labor are instructed to make preliminary inspections and/or appropriate tests to determine what conditions exist before starting work on electrical equipment or lines. Note: All tests and observations shall be documented on the RG47-0157 Test Record, and a copy left in the job package.

2.4.8.4 If electrical equipment or lines are to be serviced, maintained or adjusted, necessary switches shall be opened, and proper lock and tag-out procedures shall be used whenever turning off power will not impact Network traffic.

2.4.8.5 Portable electrical tools shall be equipment grounded or of the double insulated type.

2.4.8.6 Electrical appliances such as vacuum cleaners, polishers, and vending machines shall be grounded.

2.4.8.7 All extension cords being used shall have a grounding conductor. Multiple plug adapters shall be prohibited. Use of extension cords beyond the installation interval is prohibited in a central office environment.

2.4.8.8 Ground-fault circuit interrupters shall be installed when temporary 15 or 20 ampere, 120 volt AC circuits are required to perform construction, demolition, modifications, alterations or excavations. Extension cords are considered to be temporary wiring and must be equipped with a ground lead (e.g., 3-pronged plug). 2.4.8.9 Suitable disconnecting switches or plug connectors at the junction with permanent wiring shall protect all temporary circuits.

2.4.8.10 Electrical installations in hazardous dust or vapor areas shall conform to requirements outlined in the National Electrical Code (NEC) for hazardous locations.

2.4.8.11 Exposed wiring and cords with frayed or deteriorated insulation shall be repaired or replaced promptly. Flexible cords and cables shall be free of splices or taps. Clamps or other securing means provided on flexible cords or cables at plugs, receptacles, tools, equipment, etc. shall be securely held in place. All cord, cable and raceway connections shall be intact and secure.

2.4.8.12 Wet or damp locations, require the use of electrical tools and equipment, which are appropriate for the use or location or otherwise protected.


2-17

2.4.8.13 Location of electrical power lines and cables (overhead, underground, underfloor, other side of walls) shall be determined before digging; drilling or similar work is begun. This shall be the responsibility of the Service Supplier and/or contracted labor doing the work.

2.4.8.14 Metal measuring tapes, ropes/cables, handlines or similar devices with metallic thread woven into the fabric shall be prohibited where they could come in contact with energized parts of equipment or circuit conductors.

2.4.8.15 Use of ladders with metallic sides shall be prohibited in areas where the ladder or the person using the ladder could come in contact with energized parts of equipment, fixtures or circuit conductors.

2.4.8.16 All disconnecting switches and circuit breakers shall be labeled to indicate their use or equipment served. Disconnecting means “shall always be opened before fuses are replaced.” Documentation of assigned or spare capacity will be provided to the CenturyLink Design Engineering Representative. If the specific assignment is unknown, list as “assigned unknown.”

2.4.8.17 Interior wiring systems shall include provisions for grounding metal parts of electrical raceways, equipment and enclosures. Electrical raceways and enclosures shall be securely fastened in place.

2.4.8.18 All energized parts of electrical circuits and equipment shall be guarded against accidental contact by approved cabinets or enclosures. Special enclosures such as the power room shall be labeled at all entrances “Authorized Personnel Only”.

2.4.8.19 Sufficient access and working space shall be provided and maintained about all electrical equipment to permit ready and safe operations and maintenance. NEC Article 110.26 provides requirements for working clearances in front of, to the sides of, above, and below AC equipment.

2.4.8.20 Unused openings (including conduit knockouts) in electrical enclosures and fittings shall be closed with appropriate covers, plugs or plates. Electrical enclosures such as switches, receptacles, and junction boxes, shall be provided with tightfitting covers or plates.

2.4.8.21 Disconnecting switches for electrical motors in excess of two horsepower shall be capable of safely opening the circuit when the motor is in a stalled condition. (Switches must be horsepower rated equal to or in excess of the motor HP rating.) Low voltage protection shall be provided in the control device of motors driving machines or equipment which could cause probable injury from inadvertent starting. Each motor disconnecting switch or circuit breaker shall be located within sight of the motor control device.

2.4.8.22 Each motor located within sight of its controller or the controller disconnecting means shall be capable of being locked in the open position or have a separate disconnecting means installed in the circuit within sight of the motor. The controller for


2-18

each motor in excess of two horsepower shall be rated in horsepower equal to or in excess of the rating of the motor it serves.

2.4.8.23 Employees who regularly work on or around energized AC electrical equipment or lines shall be annually instructed in the cardiopulmonary resuscitation (CPR) methods.

2.4.8.24 No work shall be performed on LIVE/ENERGIZED AC CIRCUITS by other than a Qualified Electrician.

2.5 Electrostatic Discharge (ESD)

2.5.1 A tested and passing wrist strap shall be worn when removing, inserting, or handling electronic devices and components not in a static dissipative packaging. The wrist strap shall be snug fitting, make contact with the skin and be connected to a jack, terminal or connector with continuity to a properly grounded network element. The jack, terminal or connector must be designated as an “ESD Wrist Strap Connecting Point”.

2.5.2 When the Service Supplier is working on ESD sensitive equipment they shall test their wrist strap daily prior to use with either a pass/fail wrist strap test set or by using a volt-ohm meter. The reading shall be 1M + 15% Ohms and shall be recorded daily in the job log.

2.5.3 Devices and components shall be stored in their static dissipative packaging prior to insertion in the equipment.

2.5.4 Package and transport all circuit packs, including those presumed defective, in approved protective, static-dissipative containers.

2.5.5 The Service Supplier shall maintain a static safe environment for the handling of circuit packs and other electronic equipment. All containers or packing materials used shall be marked with ESD warning labels, and stored in a grounded metal enclosure.

2.5.6 The Service Supplier shall minimize the handling of circuit packs and store packs in anti-static or static dissipative containers.

2.5.7 Circuit packs shall be handled by their front faceplates. If additional support is required, use the outermost top and bottom edge, being careful not to touch any components or conductive paths.

2.5.8 Keep synthetic fibers, plastics, foams, etc., which are not anti-static, out of the environment where circuit packs are being handled.

2.5.9 When removing a circuit pack from service, the pack shall be immediately placed in an anti- static, protective container. The correct size container shall be used to adequately contain and physically protect the individual circuit pack.

2.6 Fire Protection Policy


2-19

The first few moments after a fire has started and/or is discovered are of extreme importance. Upon discovery of fire or smoke, first evacuate the building then call the Fire Department. When entering any CenturyLink central office facility equipped with a “Very Early Warning Fire Detection Alarm System” (VEWWFD) the Service Supplier is expected to locate the alarm system unit and identify the alarm system “reset” switch (Refer also to Par. 8.31 and Par. 15.10). This CenturyLink policy is intended to minimize the risk and extent of possible fires at CenturyLink central office locations. This Policy applies equally to contracted labor and CenturyLink employees.

2.6.1 Business Consumer Markets Group (B&C) (Formerly Central Office Operations)

2.6.1.1 All contracted ISP shall work towards maintaining a zero or near-zero level of combustible materials in the central office, Controlled Environment Vaults (CEVs), and National Network Services equipment areas.

2.6.1.2 Combustible materials may be brought into the equipment areas only when necessary to perform work and will be removed from the area when the work is completed. Manuals, papers, computer printouts, drawings, circuit pack boxes, plastic parts bags or any other combustible material must not be stored or left in or around equipment. These items must be stored in metal cabinets, desks or lockers when not in use.

2.6.1.3 Nothing shall be placed on top of a unit of equipment to interfere with the airflow necessary for the cooling of that equipment.

2.6.1.4 All doors in an equipment room shall be kept closed at all times. Fire doors and internal security doors shall not be blocked open or have lock assemblies impeded or disabled.

2.6.1.5 B&C personnel shall empty open trash receptacles located in an equipment area daily. Note: If this requirement is not followed by the B&C the service supplier shall notify their local quality manager representative. Only closed metal trash receptacles are located in an equipment area.

2.6.1.6 All desks, work areas and computer workstations located in equipment areas shall be kept free of combustible materials. The best solution is to locate work areas outside of equipment rooms or to build a separate room for them. If this is not possible, the combustibles must be controlled. Manuals and other combustibles should be kept in closed metal cabinets.

Circuit packs must be kept in anti-static packaging at all times and stored in closed grounded metal lockers or cabinets.

2.6.2 Installation Activities

2.6.2.1 The Service Supplier shall maintain a near-zero level of combustible material in the central office equipment areas during installation or removal activities. All equipment brought onto CenturyLink property shall be identified with a Job Number,


2-20

CLEC Billing Authority Number (BAN) – where applicable), Supplier name and a contact number for the Supplier.

2.6.2.2 Cardboard boxes and wooden crates containing equipment frames or units, or boxes of cable shall not be stored or staged in equipment areas. These items should be delivered to, stored, staged and uncrated or unpacked in a storage room separate from central office equipment areas. Items needed for daily work may be brought into the equipment rooms and shall be removed each day. If no storage room exists in the building, it will be necessary for the Service Supplier, Capacity Provisioning and Real Estate to provide temporary storage outside of the Central Office building for uncrating and unpacking. No uncrating or unpacking shall be done in equipment areas at any time.

2.6.2.3 If no alternative area exists, uncrated bays or units of equipment (anti-static wrap may be left in place if required), uncrated cables, boxed circuit packs, boxes of numerous small miscellaneous parts or similar items needed for daily operation, may be stored in equipment rooms if all of the following criteria are met:

a. There is absolutely no alternative area or room in the building that can be used.

b. All items shall be placed on fire retardant floor protection (masonite).

c. Combustibles are kept to an absolute minimum and all flammables and trash shall be removed on a daily basis and maintained in this manner for the entire cycle of the job. As boxes are opened, the contents are to be removed. All packaging materials, plastic, bags, paper, etc. must be disposed of daily.

d. Area is not adjacent to heating units, registers or radiators.

e. Area does not create a safety hazard or block access to exits, doors, light switches, AC panels, or any other areas that need to remain accessible to personnel.

f. Area is maintained to the minimum size necessary for daily operation.

g. Small items are stored in closed metal or plastic containers, or mobile “parts carts”.

h. All items will be removed from this area when no longer needed.

i. Small quantities of solvents and paints for use on the job shall be properly stored in their original, labeled containers.

j. This storage area is posted with a readable sign identifying a Job Number, Supplier name and a contact number for the Supplier.

k. At no time shall flammable materials be staged or stored in Battery Rooms.

l. The use of fire retardant tarps to cover staged materials is not approved for use in CenturyLink Equipment Space without written permission of CenturyLink Tire and Property Protection. Note: This will only be granted on a case by case basis.

2.6.2.4 The storage area, the amount and the type of items stored and the duration of storage shall be addressed in the initial "General/Detailed" Method Of Procedure


2-21

(MOP) for the job and approved at the discretion of the B&C representative. The B&C representative shall consider the risks involved as well as the costs associated with alternatives prior to approval.

2.6.2.5 The administrative area to be used by a Service Supplier shall be agreed upon with the B&C representative and addressed in the "General/Detailed" MOP. This area should be located out of the equipment area if possible, with similar requirements as the equipment storage area. Documentation, drawings and other combustible administrative items needed for daily use must be removed from equipment areas daily or stored in metal containers.

2.6.2.6 This policy applies only to the time that the Service Supplier is actively performing work related to the specific job. If the Service Supplier temporarily closes down work for more than 48 hours while waiting for parts, to perform more critical work on another job or for any other reason, the storage and administrative areas must be cleared of all combustible material until work is restarted. The only exception to this requirement shall be if the supplier has approval from the B&C facility representative. The supplier shall then record the agreement period in the job log (date, time etc.) (Also see Chapter 15, Par.15.2.2 for extended work delays of greater than 30 days.).

2.6.2.7 The B&C personnel responsible for a central office shall report all violations of CenturyLink combustible policy to their management, and have the responsibility to shut down a job in progress if the Service Supplier does not comply. When the Supplier is again in compliance, the work may be restarted. If for any reason the B&C representative shuts down a job due to this requirement they shall report that situation to the appropriate quality manager for that area.

2.6.2.8 During the acceptance of a job, the B&C representative shall assure that the Service Supplier has left the area free of combustibles and has closed all cable holes. (Refer to Chapter 4)

2.6.2.9 Adherence to this policy will allow the Service Supplier to perform work efficiently and maintain cost effectiveness while not placing CenturyLink at undue risk to the safety hazards, economic and service penalties associated with fires in the central office. The lack of adherence to this policy would necessitate a review of the Service Supplier’s contract for Central Office Installation work. It is the Service Supplier’s responsibility to adhere to this policy. If such an occurrence was to happen, the LPEC Program Administrator for that area shall be notified.

2.6.3 Smoking is not permitted in CenturyLink facilities, and not within 25 feet of any building entrance. Used smoking materials shall not be brought into CenturyLink facilities.

2.7 Network Alarms

2.7.1 General


2-22

All network elements installed by the Service Supplier shall be connected to the appropriate alarm system and tested with the Network Monitoring and Analysis Group (NMA).

NETWORK MANAGEMENT ALARM PROVISIONING NMA PROVISIONING OS/NE Connectivity, Database and Configuration Contacts listed below can be found at: http://saw3/NROC/NMAD/Nnmadbply.html

2.7.1.1 No network element shall be turned up for service, without the equipment alarms having been wired and tested. The Service Supplier is typically instructed to provide an alarm lead/circuit for each added individual network element (unless specifically instructed otherwise by the Design Engineer and/or the applicable AMC interconnection diagram to provide a multiple appearance - also referred to as “daisy-chaining”- from an existing alarm circuit).

The B&C facility representative shall accept responsibility for alarm testing and updating existing local records, if their software translations or cross-connections, are not completed prior to the required service date. The Service Supplier shall list all alarms and the reason they cannot be tested at job completion in the Job Log (RG 41-0046). The Service Supplier shall close the job with any exceptions listing equipment alarm status on the Service Interruption/ Degradation Report (RG 47-0013). In the event that the Service Supplier cannot complete the appropriate NMA testing for any alarm cables or leads, he/she will then complete an Alarm / OSS Testing Incompletion tag (RG 41-0173). This tag will be affixed to the front faceplate of the affected network element (typically on any fabricated hole or opening) with 9 ply cord. Refer also to Par. 2.7.2.2, 2.7.2.3, and 8.31.

The Service Supplier shall still be responsible to correct any problems associated with the installed product alarms. The Service Supplier shall negotiate with the Design Engineer for any additional alarm testing effort required, because of CenturyLink-related delays or problems. The supplier shall record all test results on RG47-0157 and place a copy in the job packet envelope (RG 51-0083).

2.7.1.2 Alarms that are equipped for future use, and require software translations or cross-connections, which are to be made in the future, do not require an ETEL number, X.25/IP port assignment or X.25 circuit ID. The Installer shall be required to run all alarm cables, perform standard continuity, power verifications, and designate/label per TP 77350 Chapter 8.

2.7.2.1 When testing is complete on serial or discrete alarms, the NMA group will provide a confirmation log number to the Service Supplier. This log number shall appear in the Installation Revised Completion Notice (Form RG 47-0002) and on the Installation Alarm Assignment and Capacity Sheet (RG 41-0170).

http://saw3/NROC/NMAD/Nnmadbply.html


2-23

Note: When testing is completed on X.25-type alarms (e.g., COLAN, AI, Digi-Pac), the Service Supplier will record the assignment information on the Job Log (RG 41-0046).

2.7.2.2 When X.25 or IP alarm testing cannot be completed for any reason (e.g., missing circuit packs, alarm system capacity, incomplete B&C responsibilities, etc.) the NMA group shall be notified and the reason(s) for incomplete testing will be documented in the Job Log (RG 41-0046). The Alarm/OSS Testing Incompletion Tag (RG 41-0173) shall be completed by the Installer and placed on the faceplate of the untested network element (typically on the front faceplate of the equipment). Alarms exceptions status shall be listed on the “Final” - Installation / Revised Completion Notice (RG47-0002) and the Job Start & Completion Checklist (RG 47-0158). If alarm assignments are available, they shall be designated per Chapter 8.

2.7.2.3 On Serial or Discrete alarms that could not be tested, the NMA Database group will provide a Non-Tested Log Number to the Service Supplier. This log number, along with an explanation, shall be placed on the Installation / Revised Completion Notice (RG47-0002), the Installation Assignment and Capacity Sheet (RG41-0170), and the Alarm/OSS Testing Incompletion Tag (RG 41-0173).

Note: For information specific to the Alarm/OSS Testing Incompletion Tag (RG 41-0173), refer to Par. 8.4.1 and Par. 8.26. If the Service Supplier is unable to attach the RG 41-0173 tag to the network element shelf faceplate, the next option is to use any mounting hole on the relay rack upright closest to the network element OR on the alarm cable on the rear of the shelf.

2.8 Equipment Performance Tests

2.8.1 Performance tests, required by a job, are to be conducted on newly installed and/or modified equipment by the Service Supplier to assure the equipment performance meets manufacturers’ and CenturyLink requirements. CenturyLink will assure that the tests are performed and that conditions causing unacceptable test results are corrected. To accomplish this CenturyLink may provide an observer(s) on the job. The test record summary, indicating tests performed and troubles found and cleared, shall be forwarded to the CenturyLink B&C representative prior to acceptance of the job and a copy shall be left in the job package.

2.8.2 Where a functional performance test is not performed, a continuity test shall be made on all conductors run and connected by the installer. The supplier shall record all tests results on RG47-0157 or equivalent and place a copy in the job package.

2.8.3 An authorized CenturyLink representative shall be present during test and turn up of power equipment (new or reused). Power equipment shall include (but not be limited to) the following;

1) Rectifiers

2) Converters

3) Inverters/UPS.


2-24

4) Ring plant/generators.

5) Standby engines and/or systems.

6) Plant distribution additions (i.e. PBD’s, PDSC's, BDFB’s, etc.).

7) Monitors and/or alarm units.

2.9 Maintenance Window

2.9.1 A Maintenance Window is a predetermined period of time during each day when specific planned maintenance and infrastructure provisioning work activities should be performed. The purpose of scheduling work during specific times is to minimize the risk of disruption to the CenturyLink network. Although load and service conditions vary by site, nighttime is generally the time of least traffic in most CenturyLink sites. Therefore the “Official Maintenance Window” is:

Maintenance Window

Monday night through (early) Saturday morning

10:00 P.M. to 6:00 A.M.

Saturday 10:00 P.M. through Monday 6:00 A.M. All times listed herein are considered “Local Time.”

Note: In high call volume offices or offices with excessive data transfer areas, the B&C facility representative can adjust maintenance window hours to minimize the risk of disruption to the CenturyLink network. For NNS sites, Maintenance Window intervals may be technology-dependent (refer to OPS-00103 for specific information).

2.9.2 Work performed in the “Maintenance Window” generally only applies to “in-service” or "hot" equipment. Other maintenance window work may include specific times such as when dead equipment is being connected/disconnected to/from live equipment or working on any equipment or area as required by the local office manager. Power and Grounding Installation Guidelines are contained in Chapters 9, 10, and 11 of this standard.

2.9.3 Any connection work on the Ground Window, CO Ground Bars or main Horizontal or Vertical Equalizers while they are "in-service" should be done in the maintenance window.

2.9.4 Any connection work on the main power board while it is "hot" (running/live/energized) should be done in the maintenance window.

2.9.5 Any connection or disconnection of equipment to the DC power plant bus work while it is "hot" (running/live/energized) should be done in the maintenance window.

2.9.6 Any addition, maintenance (torque of intercell connectors) or removal of a battery cell or string on a (S single string plant only).


2-25

2.9.7 Any connection or disconnection on the main AC power Board (feeder side) or any connection work on the AC transfer switch should be done in the maintenance window.

2.9.8 Any work that could be hazardous to the network (i.e., synchronization/timing cuts) should be done in the maintenance window unless specifically approved in writing by the B&C facility representative.

2.10 Wood Products and Wood for Use in Equipment Locations

All wood materials used for construction of temporary walls and equipment or terminal mounting boards must be either UL listed fire retardant pressure treated and factory marked with the UL label or be completely coated with a fire retardant paint.

2.11 Letters of Deviation

There are occasional cases where following the standards contained in CenturyLink Technical Publications are not possible because of specific, identified conditions within the structure. In a few of these cases, it is possible for a Letter of Deviation (RG 47-0169) detailing the condition, and the method used to provide a safe, reliable and well engineered alternative where the standards cannot be met. Letters of deviation are not valid for wholesale or economic concerns. Each instance of deviation shall be documented with an Application for Letter of Deviation (RG 47-0168) initiated by the Service Supplier, Field Engineer or CSPEC Engineer, CenturyLink Project Administrator (CPA) and submitted to CenturyLink Design Engineering. These Letters of Deviation (RG 47-0169) are not to be used in continuing non-standard practices that may have been applied in the past, or where new standards have superseded the old, (i.e. e.g.; Earthquake bracing upgrades caused by seismic zone changes). All letters of deviation shall be discussed with the Common Systems Planner responsible for the structure prior to issue and will include reference to CO office drawings, sketches, photos, and complete detailed descriptions of the existing office condition(s) as necessary. Only the CenturyLink Design Engineer responsible for the long-term management of the central office shall be authorized to issue a letter of deviation. If granted, the Letter of Deviation will be authorized and signed by the appropriate PEG representative, their Director, and the applicable Design Engineering Director.

Jobs that have a Letter of Deviation shall be required to retain a copy in the job packet envelope stored in the central office. The original Letter of Deviation shall be filed in the engineering job folder and stored as part of the permanent record.

Note: Letters of Deviation shall not be used to remedy installation defects. (Refer also to par. 14.18 and 14.19).

CenturyLink Tech Pub 77350 Chapter 3 Issue O, July 2016 Assembly and Ironwork

TOC 3-i

CONTENTS Chapter and Section Page 3. Assembly and Ironwork .............................................................................................. 3-1

3.1 General Requirements ...................................................................................... 3-1 3.2 Apparatus ........................................................................................................... 3-1 3.3 Appliance/Base and Utility Outlets and Permanently Mounted

Power Strips ....................................................................................................... 3-2 3.4 Auxiliary Framing............................................................................................. 3-2 3.5 Bolts, Nuts, Screws, and Threaded Rods ....................................................... 3-3 3.6 Cable Racks ........................................................................................................ 3-4 3.7 AC Conduit ........................................................................................................ 3-6 3.8 Cotter Pins .......................................................................................................... 3-6 3.9 Earthquake Considerations ............................................................................. 3-6 3.10 Equipment Removal For Reuse or Retirement ............................................. 3-8 3.11 Fiber Optic Protective/Distribution Systems ............................................... 3-9 3.12 Frames, Bays, Cabinets, and Stands ............................................................. 3-11 3.13 Framework and Ironwork Components ...................................................... 3-16 3.14 Lighting Fixtures ............................................................................................. 3-16 3.15 Rolling Ladders and Tracks ........................................................................... 3-16 3.16 Units of Equipment ......................................................................................... 3-17 3.17 Antenna and associated Transmission Lines .............................................. 3-21 3.18 Earthquake Zone Map .................................................................................... 3-22 3.19 Alignment Tables ............................................................................................ 3-22 3.20 Building Envelope Drilling Procedures ....................................................... 3-23 3.21 Floor Anchors and Installation Instructions ............................................... 3-24 3.22 Floor Anchor Bolt Modification Procedures ............................................... 3-26 3.23 Floor Tile Punch Procedure: .......................................................................... 3-27 3.24 Floor Tile Drilling With HEPA Vacuum Attachment ................................ 3-28 3.25 Floor Tile Drilling With Separate HEPA Vacuum That Is Not

Attached To Tile Drill: .................................................................................... 3-29 3.26 Raised Floors .................................................................................................... 3-29 3.27 Waterproof Floor ............................................................................................. 3-29 3.28 Battery Containment ...................................................................................... 3-30

Chapter 3 CenturyLink Tech Pub 77350 Assembly and Ironwork Issue O, July2016

Figures Figure 3-1: Network Framework Mounting Hole Reference ..................................... 3-18 Figure 3-2: Frame/Bay/Cabinet Mounting Hole Reference Pattern .......................... 3-25 Tables Table 3-1: Wall and Columns ......................................................................................... 3-12

Table 3-2: Aisle Spacing – New Applications ............................................................. 3-12

Table 3-3: Number of Mounting Spaces on Common Framework ......................... 3-19

Table 3-4: 1-3/4” Mounting Space Number of Mounting Spaces on

Common Framework ..................................................................................... 3-20

Table 3-5 2-0” Mounting Space Aisle Spacing ........................................................... 3-21


3-1

3. Assembly and Ironwork

The Planning & Engineering Guidelines (PEG) for some types of equipment and CenturyLink technical documents may define equipment-specific requirements which may differ from those identified in this chapter. The more specific standard shall apply.

3.1 General Requirements

3.1.1 The location of auxiliary framing, cable racks, frames, relay racks, bays, cabinets, and other equipment shall conform to the particular plans, drawings/records, and specifications for each installation. CenturyLink Planning & Engineering Guidelines shall be used wherever possible and supersedes manufacturer documentation. Refer to CenturyLink Technical Publication 77351, Standard Configuration, and technical documents for engineering guidelines.

3.1.2 All assemblies and ironwork referred to in this section shall be installed to meet Seismic zone requirements for the area in which they are installed unless specified. Seismic zones 0, 1, and 2 (defined as “Light”) shall be installed to meet seismic zone 2 requirements. Seismic zones 3 and 4 (defined as “Heavy”) shall be installed to seismic zone 4 requirements. See section 3.18, “Earthquake Zone Map” for specific requirements. Areas identified as “Heavy” shall comply with supporting requirements for equipment, even if the building structure is substandard for “Heavy” earthquake zones.

3.1.3 Overhead clearance in all aisles and equipment areas must be maintained at a minimum of 7 feet. This includes auxiliary framing, cable rack, cableway systems, grounding feeders, vent ducts, conduit, lighting, etc. Environments with other heights shall maintain clearance’s equivalent with that environment’s standard heights.

3.1.4. Unistrut embedded in the concrete ceiling is designed to support telecommunication equipment environments. Other ceiling support shall meet the requirements identified in TP 77351.

3.1.5. Separate areas of primary and secondary framing, where possible, should be of a consistent design so that when extended to each other and where intersected they shall be of a consistent level. Auxiliary framing used exclusively for the support of cable rack shall be consistent with other existing levels of framing where possible to be consistent with TP 77351. Refer also to Par. 3.4.1.

3.1.6. Where one additional row of frames is to be ultimately installed, the auxiliary framing shall be extended to allow for the ultimate installation of cable rack, ladder track, lighting, etc.

3.1.7. All new areas will be engineered and installed with a 7' Floor Supported System as defined in CenturyLink Planning & Engineering Guideline documents (specifically TP 77351).


3-2

3.2 Apparatus

All pieces of apparatus shall be installed and secured in accordance with job specifications, drawings/records, and configurations.

3.3 Appliance/Base and Utility Outlets and Permanently Mounted Power Strips

Notes: 1. See 9.1, “AC Circuits,” for additional requirements.

2. Appliance/Base outlets are defined as those outlets traditionally located in the base plates and end guards of equipment frames and are to be used exclusively for powering portable test equipment, inspection lamps, and portable temporary computer terminals. These outlets shall never be used to power motorized equipment; i.e., drill motors, vacuum cleaners, buffers, etc. Utility outlets and permanently mounted power strips are defined as those outlets dedicated and intended to power equipment mounted in that frame; i.e., modems, permanently mounted test equipment, computer terminals. These outlets also shall not be used to power motorized equipment. Wall and column mounted outlets may be used for motorized equipment.

3.3.1 All outlets shall be installed and properly positioned per job specifications and documented on Central Office drawings/records.

3.3.2 All outlets shall be of the common National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA) configuration, which connects the grounding terminal common to its frame.

3.3.3 Isolated ground (outlets that do not connect the grounding terminal common to its frame) or “Orange” outlets are not permitted in CenturyLink locations. All AC outlets shall have their grounding lug referenced to the frame, bay, or cabinet in which they are mounted. Refer also to CenturyLink TP 77351 section 2.5.13.3 and CenturyLink TP 77385.

3.3.4 When removals involve AC, as with appliance/base outlets, utility outlets, or permanently mounted power strips, all remaining AC conductors shall be properly terminated.

3.4 Auxiliary Framing

3.4.1 Auxiliary framing bars or channels shall be installed in stock lengths (20 ft.) wherever possible. All pairs of auxiliary framing channels or bars shall be of uniform length, aligned per job specification/drawing and closed with end caps or finishing clips when bars or channels extend beyond a clip or support. Finishing clips or end caps may be omitted where ends of bars or channels extend to within three inches of a wall, column, or other vertical surface.


3-3

3.4.2 Auxiliary framing shall be located on centers of approximately 5 feet. In no instance shall auxiliary framing supports exceed 6 feet. The distance between the last supports and auxiliary framing bar ends shall not exceed 2 ft 6 inches. Auxiliary framing bars shall be flush with the end of support clips at a minimum. Framing bars or channels shall extend approximately 3 inches beyond the last set of clips to provide for staggered splicing where additional framing would be ultimately installed. Each auxiliary framing section shall have a least one point of support. Junctions and bracing fabrications shall not be considered a point of support.

3.4.3 All splices, junction details, brackets, and hangers shall be secure and installed per CenturyLink Engineering Standard 77351 and PEG.

3.4.4 All auxiliary-framing splices in the same aisle of adjacent pairs of auxiliary framing shall be avoided. In no case shall two adjacent pairs of auxiliary framing be spliced.

3.4.5 The use of captive split nuts and slotted clips are restricted for ironwork and cable rack applications in earthquake zone light areas, but prohibited in earthquake heavy areas. Split nuts, included with existing threaded rod bracket kits, used for the support of some fiber duct work is acceptable when extending a horizontal fiber duct in embedded areas of an office. Any other applications require approval of the representative responsible for Common Systems standards.

3.4.6 For High Type Auxiliary Framing, the maximum distance between levels of framing or between the ceiling and the first level of framing shall not exceed 5 feet 0 inches.

3.4.7 The height of auxiliary framing is measured from the finished floor to the bottom of the auxiliary channel.

3.4.8 No pair of bars or channels used for the direct support of vertical loads shall have fewer than two points of support. A support shall be located on each side of the load.

Note: A "vertical load" may be a load either "pushing" down on auxiliary framing from above, or a load "pulling" on the auxiliary framing from below. Cable rack and most auxiliary framing arrangements would exert vertical loads. Conduit, used for equipment lighting and outlets, is an example of a component that would not exert a vertical load.

3.5 Bolts, Nuts, Screws, and Threaded Rods

3.5.1 All bolts, nuts and screws used to secure any part or unit shall be plated to prevent corrosion (an exception are solid copper and stainless hardware), tight, plumb; free of damage, and meet specific / manufacturer’s torque requirements where required. All bolts, threaded rods, etc., shall be sized for the hole they are being used in (i.e., Placing 3/8" bolts in a 1/2" hole is PROHIBITTED). Washers shall NOT be used to place an undersized part in a larger hole except where specifically allowed by PEG or technical


3-4

publications. All washers shall be sized for the bolt/threaded unit they are intended to be mated.

3.5.2 The threaded part shall be flush at a minimum and may protrude to an extent not to create a safety or service hazard. Maximum allowable protrusion, where exposure may create a safety or service hazard, shall not exceed the diameter of the threaded unit.

3.5.3 Both ends of bolts, screws or threaded rods shall be free of sharp edges.

3.5.4 The use of threaded rod splices requires the approval of the representative responsible for Common Systems standards.

3.6 Cable Racks

3.6.1 All cable racks shall be of the proper approved size and type, and located, leveled and aligned per job specification and drawing.

3.6.2 All sections of cable rack shall have both stringers supported at a minimum of one point, regardless of length. The ends of both cable rack stringers shall be bolted to the auxiliary framing support and only one bolt is required at intermediate auxiliary framing supports on alternate sides of the rack. Additional intermediate bolts may be required depending on actual support requirements in the office.

3.6.3 Cable rack runs consisting of one piece of rack, which are unsupported at each end, require a minimum of two points of support on each cable rack stringer (a minimum of four points of contact/supports per cable rack).

3.6.4 Horizontal cable racks shall be supported on approximately 5 foot centers. Cable rack splices do not constitute a support.

3.6.5 The distance between the last supports and the cable rack ends shall not exceed three feet. Cross-aisle sections of cable rack five feet or less in length may be supported by two corner brackets applicable to the earthquake zone at each end.

3.6.6 Open and protruding ends of ladder type cable rack (and any open-ended apparatus requiring closure) shall be finished with closing details or protective rubber caps.

3.6.7 All splices, junction details, brackets, and hangers shall be secure and installed per CenturyLink Engineering Standards 77351 and PEG.

3.6.8 New cable rack shall be of the solid bar stringer type or as identified as approved in PEG and technical documents. The addition of new tubular or hollow stringer type cable rack is strictly prohibited; however, existing rack may be utilized where allowable support loads will not be violated. Existing channel stringer type cable rack may be extended with solid stringer cable rack to its logical conclusion.


3-5

3.6.9 A minimum vertical clearance of 12 inches will be maintained above cable racks. Note: National Network Services ROW sites are exempt from this requirement. If meeting the 12-inch requirement is unattainable, the Service Supplier must refer this condition to the Design Engineer for a resolution.

3.6.10 Power cable rack located within the power room area for battery stands and power board equipment will be set at a minimum of 8 feet from the floor to the top of the cable rack stringer whenever practical.

Note: Ground windows, due to their arrangement, may constitute a lower minimum cable rack height or where lower ceiling conditions dictate. In these instances, the power cable rack shall be located no lower than 7 ft. 3 ½ inches from the floor to the top of the cable rack stringer (for 1-½ inch cable rack stringers) and 7 foot 4 inches (for 2-inch cable rack stringers) respectively. This lower power cable rack height may also be used where low ceiling heights require power cable racks to be placed at this lower level.

3.6.11 Dedicate power cable rack shall be only solid stringer for the 15-20 inch rack and solid stringer reinforced for the 25-30 inch rack.

3.6.12. When horizontal switchboard or fiber cable rack has a vertical change in elevation of more than 9 inches, a connecting cable rack (waterfall) shall be installed between the horizontal levels of cable racks. When horizontal power cable rack has a vertical change in elevation of more than 12 inches, a connecting cable rack (waterfall) shall be installed between the horizontal levels of cable rack. The connecting cable rack shall be installed typically at an angle (as close as possible to either 45 ° or 90 ° as applicable) and at a length no greater than the distances defined in TP77351, Chapter 6, Unit A. Refer to Par. 3.6.17 and 5.1.5.

3.6.13 The height of cable rack is measured from the floor to the top of the cable rack stringer.

3.6.14 Full lengths of cable rack and / or auxiliary channel per TP 77351 and engineering guidelines should be installed wherever possible.

3.6.15 Ceiling and auxiliary channel support is standard for main aisle cable racking per TP 77351, CenturyLink PEG, and Technical Documentation. Lineup cable racking supported in the 7-foot floor supported environment is limited to the initial cable rack level plus one additional level. Where more levels are required, the subsequent levels of cable racking must be supported from the ceiling. Ironwork from a 7-ft. environment may attach to a ceiling-supported environment on a limited basis where office conditions prevent the continuation of the 7-ft environment and/or where access is required to existing ceiling supported distribution frames and equipment. Where office conditions prevent support from the ceiling, main aisle cable racks may be floor-supported with approval from the representative responsible for Common Systems standards and CenturyLink Design Engineering.


3-6

3.6.16 Cable rack should be placed above the center of the main aisle and equipment lineup aisles. Where this is not possible, contact the CenturyLink Space Planner and Design Engineer. Consideration should be given to heat dissipation, size of the cable rack, length of drop into the bay, and installer access whenever placing cable rack in the rear aisle.

3.6.17 Cable racks positioned vertically for the purpose of adjoining parallel horizontal cable racks at different elevations (offsets greater than 9 inches for switchboard or fiber or 12 inches for power) will be installed at a 45° or 90° angle, as applicable, using fixed-degree edge clamps.

Note: The Service Supplier is only authorized to use adjustable edge clamps when pre-existing office conditions preempt Par. 3.6.17 or in heavy earthquake zone (Reference TP 77351, Chapter. 6 Unit 3 - VERTICAL OFFSETS.) Adjustable clamps, per exhibits 2-E1-40A and 40B are preferred for vertical offsets. The Service Supplier will install these cable racks as close to the 45° or 90° angle as is practical while minimizing the horizontal distance.

3.6.18 Cable rack brackets will be placed at intervals not to exceed 18 inches. Cable rack horns will be staggered (on alternating sides of every other cable rack cross-strap). At crossing points and where cables break off the racks, it may be necessary to locate additional brackets to add protection for the cables.

3.7 AC Conduit

See Chapter 9.1.5, "Conduit" for specific requirements.

3.8 Cotter Pins

The tips of all cotter pins shall be bent back and rest against the rod or bolt to prevent injury by projecting ends.

3.9 Earthquake Considerations

For offices in designated Heavy Seismic Zones, special standards apply. Additional information can be found in the TP 77351 section 6E. The CenturyLink Representative having responsibility for Central Office Common Systems planning shall have the ability to increase the bracing requirements for specific equipment types or applications.


3-7

SEISMIC ZONES: Three seismic rating systems used in the United States. They are Ericsson (formerly Telcordia Technologies), the Uniform Building Code, and the Applied Technology Council. Telecommunications equipment is installed according to the Ericcson rating system. The following chart illustrates the differences between the various rating systems.

Ericsson (formerly Telcordia

Technologies) Uniform Building Code Applied Technology Council

0 0 1

1 1 2

2 2 3

3 3 4 & 5

4 4 6 & 7

http://www.centurylink.com/wholesale/downloads/2004/040709/QwestCO-EarthquakeZone_July2004.xls

Telecommunications equipment installed by and for CenturyLink in its equipment structures shall be braced according to the following:

Equipment located in an Ericsson seismic zone 0, 1 and 2 shall be installed to an Ericsson seismic 2 requirement. This shall be referred to as an “Earthquake Light Environment”.

Equipment located in an Ericsson seismic zone 3 or 4 shall be installed to an Ericsson seismic zone 4 requirement. This shall be referred to as an “Earthquake Heavy Environment.”

3.9.1 In all earthquake zones, cable rack, auxiliary framing, battery stands, equipment frames, shall be located no closer than 6 inches to exterior or interior walls or columns. Columns shall not be boxed in any earthquake zone. Framing parts shall be directly butted. All measurements shown in Exhibits indicate maximum allowable gap tolerances.

3.9.2 All auxiliary framing, cable rack and support fabrications shall be equipped with external tooth lock washers in “Heavy” earthquake zone installations. In an “Earthquake Heavy Environment”, externally toothed lock washers shall be used to secure all bolted details. Lock washers shall be sized to match the threaded unit being used. Lock washers are not shown in most exhibits to improve clarity. These lock




3-8

washers shall be placed to prevent the nut from loosening. One lock washer is required per bolted assembly. The lock washer shall be under the nut of a bolt and nut assembly.

3.9.2.1 The splicing of threaded rods is prohibited in “Earthquake Heavy” zones.

3.9.3 Splices in the same aisle of adjacent pairs of auxiliary framing shall be avoided. In no case shall two adjacent pairs be spliced in the same aisle. Splices shall be staggered at least one aisle or support point apart. Only drilled-through, bolted splices shall be permitted.

3.9.4 Frame extension supports (bay extenders) are intended to provide support for 7 foot frames installed in 9 foot and 11 foot, 6 inch environments and for 9 foot frames in 11 foot, 6 inch environments. The mounting of any equipment in bay extenders is strictly prohibited.

3.9.5 Approved Heavy earthquake zone frame extensions (bay extenders) shall be secured between the frame and extender with a minimum of four bolts (one in each corner of the extender) as specified by the manufacturer. Approved frame extensions (Bay extenders) in Light earthquake zones shall be secured between the frame and extender with a minimum of two bolts.

3.9.6 FINISHING DETAILS: 3/8 or 1/2 inch through bolts equipped with external tooth lock washers shall be added to the ends of the auxiliary framing per TP 77351 Exhibit 2-E5-2D.

3.9.6.1 The size of the 3/8 or ½ inch bolt kit will be matched to the size of the bolt hole that occurs in the auxiliary framing.

3.9.6.2 A 1-1/2 inch spacer shall be placed between the framing channels to maintain separation. Electrical Metallic Tubing (EMT) conduit does not constitute a suitable spacer for separation.

3.9.6.3 Finishing clips shall be added where the end of framing channels is more than 3 inches from bracing details, threaded rods, etc.

3.9.7 Where extension of auxiliary framing is probable, the ends of the bars shall be drilled for future splices.

3.9.8 In an earthquake heavy environment, stiffening clips shall be added to new auxiliary framing as in TP 77351. These clips shall be on a maximum of 36-inch centers. Where bracing or other attachments occur, these will serve the purpose of the stiffening clips.

3.10 Equipment Removal for Reuse or Retirement

3.10.1 The Service Supplier shall make a visual inspection of the equipment being removed for reuse to identify and document physical defects or missing parts (broken or bent terminals, broken or warped circuit pack shelves, missing hardware, etc.). The inspection and agreed-to repairs shall be completed prior to the equipment being


3-9

shipped, documented in the job log, and notification of completion of the repairs sent to the CenturyLink Design Engineer.

3.10.2 The Service Supplier shall utilize the proper tools and methods and procedures to ensure that the equipment being removed, as well as remaining equipment, is not damaged during the removal process. If the equipment is damaged during the removal activity, the Service Supplier shall notify the CenturyLink Design Engineer.

3.10.3 Care shall be taken not to damage or remove any shop wiring.

3.10.4 All installers' wiring shall be removed and terminals cleaned unless otherwise instructed by the CenturyLink Design Engineer.

3.10.5 The Service Supplier shall utilize proper packing assemblies when preparing to ship equipment removed for reuse. All equipment shall be packed and secured per job specification or manufacturer's instructions to safeguard against possible equipment damage during shipment.

3.10.6 System circuit packs and plug-in units shall be removed and routed as outlined in the job specification package, unless otherwise noted by the Design Engineer. When it is necessary to protect the structure of the equipment, circuit pack and plug-in units shall be packaged separately in approved ESD containers and identified with the circuit pack or plug-in number on the outside of the container prior to shipment. ESD control measures shall be practiced if circuit pack removal is required. See Chapter 2, Par. 2.5, “Electrostatic Discharge ESD.”

3.10.7 In areas adjacent to, and within 6 feet of, Isolated Ground Plane Systems the Service Supplier shall ensure that Foreign Object Ground paths are not disturbed. If equipment and ironwork that is Foreign Object Grounded is removed, the Service Supplier shall ensure that ground paths are properly reestablished to remaining equipment and ironwork. See 11.5, “Isolated Ground Systems for Stored Program Control Systems,” and CenturyLink Technical Publication 77355, “Grounding Central Office and Remote Equipment Environments,” for additional information.

3.10.8 All equipment identified for removal shall have all points of termination disconnected. The associated cabling must be removed.

3.10.9 All equipment identified for deactivation and eventual removal from service will be considered “Retired In Place.” The deactivated equipment shall have its’ power cabling removed in a manner that ensures that the equipment cannot be inadvertently placed back in service upon retirement. The Service Supplier will affix any relay racks, equipment units, and termination points with RG 43-0007 (“DO NOT USE THIS EQUIPMENT”) per Par. 8.29. In addition, all associated far-end stamping information of the disconnected equipment at the BDFB or Power Board will be removed.


3-10

3.11 Fiber Optic Protective/Distribution Systems

Wherever physically possible, fiber optic cable will be segregated from other types of Network Facility cables (i.e., power and switchboard) to provide the required isolation and protection. Ideally, fiber cable support systems dedicated to fiber optic cable only should be planned.

When a fiber cable support system must be shared by cables of differing types, every effort must be made to segregate the cable types for all new cable installations to prevent damage. This is best accomplished by routing cables as straight as possible while maintaining minimum bend radius requirements along the cable route.

3.11.1 Systems installed in equipment locations shall be assembled and aligned per drawings/records, specifications, Technical Publications (77351), PEG, and technical documents.

3.11.2 Fiber optic cable troughs are used to support OFNR fiber cable patch cords/jumpers or small quantities (10 or less) of OFNR (1-to-8 fibers/cable). Fiber optic cable troughs will be installed in new 7’ floor-supported areas if determined to be relevant by the PEG engineer. All covers and devices used to maintain fiber cable/jumpers within their horizontal and vertical protective duct systems shall be in place and secure. The use of “split flex” tubing within an existing fiber duct systems is restricted. Horizontal runs of split flex tubing and the use of split flex tubing within a cable rack is strictly prohibited.

3.11.3 Fiber optic cables and jumpers shall be run on dedicated racks or in existing dedicated cableways. Maximum length of fiber slack storage available for placement in approved fiber management systems is defined in CenturyLink PEG, or the manufacturer’s documentation for fiber slack storage devices. Fiber slack storage in cable racks or fiber duct systems is strictly prohibited.

3.11.4 Fiber optic inner duct is not acceptable for Central Office installations. Placement of new or use of existing inner duct is strictly prohibited.

3.11.5 Metallic conduit shall not be used to route fiber cables within a Central Office environment. Where a splice point cannot be reached within 50 sheathed feet into the Central Office environment, indoor/outdoor fiber optic cable can be utilized with the approval of the representative responsible for fiber cable standards and the Design Engineer.

3.11.6 A dedicated cable slot/hole/sleeve shall be used for fiber cable entering the equipment facility from the CEF with provisions for approved fire/smoke and gas stopping. Using cable sleeves associated within Distributing Frames for running fiber cable is prohibited. Placing fiber duct systems and OFN rated fiber cables through a floor or wall cable penetration is strictly prohibited.


3-11

3.11.7 Horizontal sections of solid fiber trough shall be supported per TP 77351 Par. 6G2.5 (or current manufacturer requirements, whichever is more stringent) as follows:

3.11.8 Vertical 2”X 2” multi-slotted fiber duct arrangements, Inter-Bay Management (IMP) panels, or other approved fiber protection systems shall be provided for every fiber frame requiring patch cord termination within that bay. Fiber cables transitioning from a horizontal cable rack system must be loosely bundled and secured as close to the top of the vertical 2”X2” multi-slotted fiber duct as possible using the holes on the back of the duct. Sharing a single duct between two bays is prohibited per TP 77351 Par. 6G.8.6. Sharing a single fiber duct system downspout between two bays in a Central Office lineup is allowed where a trumpet flare fitting is used on the downspout and the horizontal duct can be located so the vertical fiber cable can drop almost directly into the 2”X2” multi-slotted vertical duct.

3.12 Frames, Bays, Cabinets, and Stands

All pieces of apparatus shall be installed and secured in accordance with PEG requirements.

3.12.1 Frames, bays and cabinets shall be welded steel type construction. No aluminum or bolted bays shall be allowed on new equipment additions. Refer also to TP 77351, Chapter 2, Par. 2.5.1.

3.12.1.1 Locate all frames, bays and piece parts per job specification and drawing/record. All frame parts shall be free of defects, secure, and aligned.

3.12.2 All frames and bays, shall have a minimum of two top supports and a minimum of two bottom floor supports in seismic zone “Light” and two top supports and four bottom floor supports in seismic zone “Heavy”. CenturyLink’s PEG and/or specific manufacturer designs may require additional top or floor supports (e.g., cabinets and BDFBs require four top supports). Top supports made with threaded rods or bolts may not exceed 8 inches in length (measured from top of frame to the bottom of the first level of auxiliary framing bars). All equipment shall be top supported by methods defined in Technical Publication 77351 unless other methods are approved and documented in CenturyLink PEG documents. See associated configuration and TP 77351 figures for use of a frame support pipe as a top support in 9 and 11-foot environments and parallel auxiliary channel as top support in 7-ft environments.

3.12.3 All battery stands shall be floor-secured, meet manufacturer’s recommendations, and comply with CenturyLink minimum requirements for the Earthquake Zone in which the stands are installed.

Note 1: For two-tiered, one-row battery stands, a minimum of 3 feet is required on both one long side and one short side of the stand. For two-tiered, two-row battery stands, a minimum of 3 feet is required on both long sides and one short side of the stand.


3-12

Note 2: In the switching environment, the recommended space around the perimeter of the switch footprint is 6 feet whenever possible to prevent extensive Foreign Object Grounding (FOG).

3.12.4 The uprights of all frames or cabinets where the flanges align will be junctioned together. Equipment frames 7 feet high require a minimum of three junction plates. Equipment frames 9 and10 feet or 11 feet 6 inches high require a minimum of four junction plates.

3.12.5 The vertical alignment of all frameworks shall be plumb within the allowable deviations as shown in the “Alignment Tables”, in Paragraph 3.19.

3.12.6 The distance between the TOP of an approved pipe or column-type stanchion and the BOTTOM of the supported ironwork shall not exceed 2 inches.

3.12.7 Frame guardrails, end guards, and spacers shall match the established office configuration (e.g., color, bay/RR/cabinet depth, whenever practical) and be in alignment, as indicated by the floor plan (front of frame bases shall be flush). Transition plates or guard rail adapters shall be installed where this cannot be accomplished, whether the lineup is equipped with rolling ladders or not.

3.12.8 Cabinets on casters or rollers shall have the rolling system disabled or removed and be anchored to the floor in accordance with the earthquake zone requirements in which they are installed.

3.12.9 Frame, Framing and Racking Clearances

Table 3-1: Walls and Columns

Component Perpendicular

To Wall or Column

Standard Distance from

Wall (Aisle)

Minimum Distance from Wall (Aisle)

Standard Distance from

Column

Minimum Distance from

Column

Equipment Frames or Cabinets

4’

3’

6”

6”

Auxiliary Framing

6” 6” 6” 6”

Cable Racking 6” 6” 6” 6”

Notes: 1) Front or rear aisle spacing (from Table 3-2) applies unless the aisle is an egress aisle.


3-13

Any egress aisle, to the front, rear, or side of a bay, shall be a minimum of 4 feet wide.

2) This distance to a column is for the end of a bay to the column. Standard and minimum front or rear aisle spacing will apply to distances from the front or rear of a bay to a column.

Table 3-2: Aisle Spacing – New Applications

Equipment Type

Standard Front (Maintenance)

Aisle

Minimum Front (Maintenance)

Aisle

Standard Rear (Wiring) Aisle

Minimum Rear (Wiring) Aisle

Low Heat Density

Equipment Frame or

Cabinet (up to 1200 Watts

total per frame/cabinet)

3’ 2’-6” 3’ 2’-6”

High Heat

Density Equipment Frame or Cabinet

Framework (over 1200

Watts total per frame/cabinet)

Custom Engineering

4’*

Custom Engineering

3’*

FDF 4’ 3’ 3’ 3'

Switch 3’ 2’-6’ 2’-6” 2’-6”

Flooded Battery Stand

(2 Tier/2 sided)

3’-6” 3’

3’-6” 3’


3-14

Flooded Battery Stand (Single Sided)

3’ 3’ 6” from the wall (one long

side only)

6” from the wall (one long

side only)

Valve Regulated Lead Acid

Battery Stand

3’ 2’-6” 2’-6” 6”

AC Equipment and Panels (less

than 480V)

3’-6” 3’ 3’-6” 6”

AC Equipment

and Panels (480VAC and

greater, or 240V Delta)

4’ 3’-6” 4’ 6”

Cosmic Frame 4’ 4’ 4’ 4’

CDF, MDF or Mini Cosmic

Frame

4’ 3’ (3’-6” if required as

egress)

4’ 3’ (3’-6” if required as

egress)

DSX 4’ 3’ 4’ 3’

Main Aisle, Egress

4’ 3’-6” 4' 3’-6”

NOTE: Aisle spacing will be clear and unobstructed from any protrusions into the aisle (including columns, AC panels, cable holes, PICS storage cabinets, desks, etc).

Low Heat Density Framework or Cabinet Equipment (up to 1200 Watts total) is defined as traditional telecommunications equipment with a total heat release of less than 1200 Watts per bay or cabinet.


3-15

High Heat Density Equipment Framework or Cabinet (over 1200 watts total) is defined as technologically advanced and concentrated telecommunications equipment with a total heat release greater than 1200 Watts. Rectifier shelves/bays may fall into this category.

Battery Stands measurements are taken from either the outside foot of the battery stand or the outside edge of the individual battery stand containment.

Raised Floor Environment shall adhere to the equipment aisle spacing as outlined in Table 2.1 as stated in TP 77351 Chapter 2. Increased aisle spacing may be required due to tile access. Additional requirements shall be discussed in TP 77351 Chapter 13.

Main Aisle in a Central Office environment provides space for placement of feeder cable racks, conduit, equipment lineup designation numbering and identification, and breaks at the ends of the 50-foot equipment lineups. The main aisle may also be considered the main egress, see below.

Egress is defined by OSHA as "Means of egress." A means of egress is a continuous and unobstructed way of exit travel from any point in a building or structure to a public way. For our purposes a public way is defined as an exit that leads out of the building.

AISLE MEASUREMENTS

• Equipment frame aisles will be measured from the outer most edge of the frame guard rail or guard rail extension to the outer most edge of the opposite frame guard rail or guard rail extension. Cabinets with doors that extend beyond the base of the cabinet shall be measured from the outer most edge of the portion of the cabinet which protrudes the farthest.

• Main aisles are measured from the outer most point of the end guard attached to the first frame in one lineup to the outer most point of the end guard attached to the first frame in the lineup directly across the new main aisle. An “aisle” shall be considered clear and unobstructed space.

• Placing new telecommunications equipment shelves within a bay whose aisle spacing is less than 2 feet is strictly prohibited. The only exception allows for the placement of tie panels for the purpose of migrating out of the frame or area to a new portion of the office where adequate aisle spacing to ensure equipment survivability and maintenance can be provided. Letters of deviation violating the 2 foot minimum aisle spacing will not be considered valid.

LINEUP REQUIREMENTS

• Frameworks of the same depth shall be used in CenturyLink Central Office (CO) frame line-ups.


3-16

• A maximum difference of 4 inches in depth (maximum 1 inch front, maximum 3 inches rear) is allowable for frames or cabinets within a system lineup while maintaining adequate front and rear aisle spacing requirements outlined in TP 77351, Chapter 2, Table 2.1.

Note: See Paragraph 3.9, “Earthquake Considerations,” and Paragraph 3.18, “Earthquake Zone Map,” for specific Earthquake zone requirements. Seismic zones 0, 1, and 2 (defined as “Light”) should be installed for seismic zone 2. Seismic zones 3 and 4 (defined as “Heavy”) shall be installed for seismic zone 4. See 3.12 “Frames, Bays, Cabinets, and Stands”.

3.13 Framework and Ironwork Components

3.13.1 All piece parts (i.e., ironwork, framework, threaded rod, miscellaneous details, etc.) shall be installed per equipment drawings/records/configurations and shall be secure, aligned, plumb, and free from defects, sharp burrs, points, etc.

3.13.2 All splices on cable racks, auxiliary framing bars or junction bars shall be butted together or butted against junction hardware. Gaps shall not exceed 1/8” or as identified in TP77351, Chapter 6.

3.13.3 All surfaces of equipment and ironwork parts shall be free of rust, dirt and contaminants. If rust is apparent on equipment or parts, they shall be cleaned and painted.

3.13.4 All cut ends of cable rack auxiliary framing, threaded rods, and other unprotected metal parts shall be plated or painted.

3.13.5 End guards shall be provided for end of equipment lineups, and end shields provided when frame duct / uprights (wiring and cables) are exposed within an equipment lineup where spacers are not required. End guards are required to close off frames where spacers are needed.

3.13.6. Approved stanchions shall be secured in the light seismic zones with 2 floor anchors of the correct size and 4 floor anchors of the correct size in the heavy seismic zones.

3.14 Lighting Fixtures

Note: See 9.1, “AC Circuits.” All approved lighting fixtures shall be installed in accordance with job specifications, PEG, Technical Publication 77351, and drawings/records/configurations.

3.15 Rolling Ladders and Tracks

Note: See 9.1, “AC Circuits.”


3-17

3.15.1 Hanger rods or bolts used for direct support of ladder track shall be provided with a cotter pin or self-locking nut.

3.15.2 Ladder stop bolts and bushings shall be installed on all ladder track ends and equipped with cotter pin or lock nut.

3.15.3 Ladder track stop bolts shall be placed or relocated to ensure accessibility of equipment from rolling ladder.

3.15.4 Non-creep bolts shall be installed, burred, and staked on all ladder track ends.

3.15.5 Ladder track splice screws shall be equipped with washers and burred, staked or secured with self-locking nut.

3.15.6 Rubber plugs shall be installed at both ends of the ladder track to prevent hazard to personnel. Ladder track ends shall be no closer than 6 inches from a wall.

3.15.7 Fenders and wheel guards shall be provided on all ladders where specified.

3.15.8 All ladder brakes shall be adjusted per CenturyLink standards or manufacturers' standards, as applicable, to ensure proper operation of brake assembly.

3.15.9 All brake rope ends shall be trimmed and clamped to remove risk of personal injury.

3.15.10 All ladders shall run free and clear of equipment.

3.15.11 Distributing frame or single sided lineup ladders shall have their handrails located on the side of the ladder farthest from the equipment it serves.

3.16 Units of Equipment

Note: When mounting positions are identified in inches or in fractions of inches, these measurements are from the zero reference point to the bottom of the mounting space where the shelf will be located. The actual measurement to the physical bottom edge of the shelf may vary depending on manufacturer design but the shelf should not infringe on an adjacent mounting space. (Refer to Figure 3-1).

3.16.1 All units of equipment shall be installed, aligned and secured in accordance with PEG, job specifications and drawings.

3.16.2 All installer mounted units shall be secured with a minimum of four screws in the upper and lower most available mounting holes on each side of the unit. Units exceeding 8 inches in height require 1 additional mounting screw on both sides for each additional 8-inch interval. Additional screws may be required for heavier units or as required by manufacturers' specifications.

3.16.3 All units of equipment (including cabling, connectors, distributing frame blocks, etc.) shall not extend beyond the front or rear edges of the base or guardrail of the frame.


3-18

3.16.4 Frames shall not be equipped above the 7-foot level. Rolling ladders are the traditional approved method of access, and shall be installed front and rear of equipment for 9 foot or 11-foot, 6-inch environments.

3.16.5 Mounting space adapters shall be used where hole-spacing is incorrect for the equipment being mounted in the frame, bay, or cabinet. The frame, bay or cabinet shall not be drilled under any circumstance to accommodate equipment mounting.

Figure 3-1 Network Framework Mounting Hole Reference

Notes: 1. Bottom of first mounting space. The bottom of the first mounting space in a

framework is the zero (0) reference point. 2. The location of the first mounting hole will vary depending on the type of

framework (Network, Unequal Flange, etc.) and the mounting space configuration (1-3/4", 2").


3-19

3. Refer to Table 3-3 for numbers of mounting spaces in varying frameworks. 4. In some cases this portion of a mounting space may need to be designated as "space

not available" (SNA). The next added shelf may need to start at the next full mounting space.

5. Besides the tapped holes for mounting equipment, some frameworks may be equipped with additional holes above or below the actual mounting spaces. Equipment shall not be mounted in these locations.

Table 3-3 Number of Mounting Spaces on Common Framework

Framework Type 7-0 9-0 11-6 Mounting Space 1.75" 2.00" 1.75" 2.00" 1.75" 2.00"

Network 44 39 57 50 75 65 Network Rack & Stack 43 38 n/a n/a n/a n/a

Unequal Flange 43 38 56 49 73 64 Cabinets 44 39 n/a n/a n/a n/a

Note: The dimensions identified in Table 3-4 and Table 3-5 are referenced from the bottom of the associated mounting space.

Table 3-4 1-3/4” Mounting Space

Mounting Space

Dimension Mounting Space

Dimension

38 64.75" 131.25" 37 63.00" 75 129.50" 36 61.25" 74 127.75" 35 59.50" 73 126.00" 34 57.75" 72 124.25" 33 56.00" 71 122.50" 32 54.25" 70 120.75" 31 52.50" 69 119.00" 30 50.75" 68 117.25" 29 49.00" 67 115.50" 28 47.25" 66 113.75" 27 45.50" 65 112.00" 26 43.75" 64 110.25"


3-20

25 42.00" 63 108.50" 24 40.25" 62 106.75” 23 38.50" 61 105.00" 22 36.75" 60 103.25" 21 35.00" 59 101.50" 20 33.25" 58 99.75" 19 31.50" 57 98.00" 18 29.75" 56 96.25" 17 28.00" 55 94.50" 16 26.25" 54 92.75" 15 24.50" 53 91.00" 14 22.75" 52 89.25" 13 21.00" 51 87.50" 12 19.25" 50 85.75" 11 17.50" 49 84.00" 10 15.75" 48 82.25" 9 14.00" 47 80.50" 8 12.25" 46 78.75" 7 10.50" 45 77.00" 6 8.75" 44 75.25" 5 7.00" 43 73.50" 4 5.25" 42 71.75" 3 3.50" 41 70.00" 2 1.75" 40 68.25" 1 0" 39 66.50"

Table 3-5 2-0” Mounting Space

Mounting Space

Dimension Mounting Space

Dimension

33 64" 130" 32 62" 65 128" 31 60" 64 126" 30 58" 63 124" 29 56" 62 122" 28 54" 61 120"


3-21

27 52" 60 118" 26 50" 59 116" 25 48" 58 114" 24 46" 57 112" 23 44" 56 110" 22 42" 55 108" 21 40" 54 106" 20 38" 53 104" 19 36" 52 102" 18 34" 51 100" 17 32" 50 98" 16 30" 49 96" 15 28" 48 94" 14 26" 47 92" 13 24" 46 90" 12 22" 45 88" 11 20" 44 86" 10 18" 43 84" 9 16" 42 82" 8 14" 41 80" 7 12" 40 78" 6 10" 39 76" 5 8" 38 74" 4 6" 37 72" 3 4" 36 70" 2 2" 35 68" 1 0" 34 66"

3.17 Antenna and associated Transmission Lines

3.17.1 Antenna and associated Transmission Lines/Waveguides shall be installed and supported as specified in accordance with job drawings / records, specifications, Technical Publications (77355 and 77360), and Standard Configuration documents and, manufacturers’ instructions.


3-22

3.18 Earthquake Zone Map


3-23

3.19 Alignment Tables

VERTICAL ALIGNMENT Maximum Allowable Deviation From Plumb

Height Maximum Allowable Deviation 4’6” or Less 1/16”

Over 4’6” and less than 7’

1/8”

7’ to 9’ inclusive 3/16” Over 9’ 1/4”

HORIZONTAL ALIGNMENT Shall Be Level

3.20 Building Envelope Drilling Procedures

All drilling of the equipment building envelope, consisting of floors, walls, ceiling, or any wall/separation therein, shall be accomplished in a safe and environmentally sound manner, which captures and contains any debris using proper HEPA vacuum and protective materials.

All floor tiles shall be considered and treated as asbestos, unless identified as asbestos free.

These procedures shall be followed whenever the Service Supplier is performing an installation that involves drilling through floor tiles that contain asbestos or if the Service Supplier is unsure of the asbestos content of the floor tiles. See Chapter 12, “Equipment Removals/Installs and the Proper Handling of Hazardous Materials” and RG 09-1031 Class 3 Asbestos Work Notification Form (Par. 14.1) for additional information.

3.20.1 Dry Drill Procedures

• Assemble tools and equipment: drill motor, drill bit, eye protection, petroleum jelly, spray detergent, paper wipes/towels, plastic locking seal bags, container (box) labeled with a Class 9 DOT label.

• Mark the floor tile where drilling is intended.

• Spread petroleum jelly in a five-inch diameter circle, 1/4” thick, surrounding the drilling point.


3-24

• Place the drill bit at the starting point and drill at the slowest practical speed. The early debris is the material from the tile. The later gray material is concrete dust formed into petroleum jelly slurry.

• Remove the drill bit and wipe the floor and drill bit with paper wipes/towels. Clean the resulting oily surfaces of the drill bit and floor with spray detergent.

• Place all used paper wipes/towels and filter from vacuum in a large plastic locking seal bag, place this bag into a second plastic locking seal bag, and place the bag in a properly-labeled asbestos container for disposal.

• Properly fill out a Straight Bill of Lading RG 33-0017, addressed to the Material Reclamation Center (MRC), and contact the MRC for pick up. Insert the following information in the Hazardous Materials section of RG 33-0017:

• Number and Units - number of containers

• Hazardous Materials - RQ, Asbestos, 9, NA2212, PG III

• Hazard Class - 9

• NA - NA2212

• Weight - estimated total weight of container

3.20.2 Wet Core Drilling Procedures

• Assemble tools and equipment: drill stand, drill motor, core bit, water tank, vacuum pump, water collection kit, damp and dry paper wipes/towels, plastic locking seal bags, container (box) labeled with Class 9 DOT label.

• Mark floor tile where drilling is intended.

• Follow the manufacturer’s drilling procedures for setup, drilling, and wastewater collection.

• When drilling is complete, vacuum any remaining water and clean up equipment with paper wipes/towels.

• Follow procedures in 3.20.1, “Dry Drill Procedures,” steps 6 and 7.

3.21 Floor Anchors and Installation Instructions

There is one anchor bolt assembly approved for all telecommunications equipment placed within the CenturyLink network. The only exception is the approved power equipment anchor for battery stands (see 3.21.1). For the part number of the approved anchor bolt, contact the CenturyLink representative responsible for Common System standards.


3-25

Unapproved anchor bolts are prohibited. Refer also to TP 77351, Chapter 2, Par. 2.5.6.2. The approved 12 millimeter metric anchor with a 60 millimeter embedment depth is designed for shallow floor application within Seismic zone 0,1,2 and 3, 4 areas. It is equipped with a M12 torque nut and requires an 18 millimeter drill bit to install. The approved torque indicating anchor bolt assembly shall be provided for both light and heavy Seismic areas. All telecommunications equipment frames, relay racks, bays and floor mounted cabinets will have a hole pattern on the base of the frame for anchoring to concrete floors. Both the equipment frames and anchoring material will comply with level 3,4 NEBS requirements.

All anchors shall be installed per the manufacturer’s specifications or standard configurations. Refer also to Figure 3-2.

Seismic Requirements

All equipment frames shall be anchored to meet the Seismic zone requirements for the area in which they are installed. Seismic Zones 0, 1, 2 are defined as light and Seismic Zones 3, 4 are defined as heavy. Light Seismic Zones – All Floors: Require two ½ inch CenturyLink standard torque indicating anchor bolts to secure CenturyLink standard equipment bays and cabinets at diagonally opposite corners. Floor supported cabinets shall be anchored at all four corners. Note: Equipment groupings, whose average equipment and cable weight exceeds 850 pounds, require overhead bracing for any floor and four anchors; one on each corner of the equipment bays. The average equipment and cable weight is defined as the weight of all equipment, cable equipment frameworks, and cable divided by the total number of framework bay modules. If the cable weight center of gravity is above the 8 foot level, reduce the 850 pound decision point to 800 pounds. To serve as structural tie struts, cross-aisle cable racks should have a maximum spacing of 5 feet. Heavy Seismic Zones – All Floors: Require four-½ inch CenturyLink standard torque indicating anchor bolts to secure equipment bays and cabinets. In addition, two hold down plates are recommended with each frame. Hold-down plates are not required on approved frames equipped with an internally reinforced base which prevents the installation of the plates. A means to level and plumb the frames, to compensate for variations in floor uniformity, will be either a part of the frame or usable with the frame. These may include washers, shims, wedges or leveling screws. All kits must be evaluated and approved before use in any CenturyLink telecommunications facility. The approved base molding must be installed when anchoring each frame, cabinet or bay. When mounting frames, bays, and cabinets on raised floor environments, the raised floor


3-26

manufacturer’s instructions for mounting to the concrete floor below shall be followed. Anchoring to the raised floor plates alone is strictly prohibited.

All battery stands and other equipment placed in CenturyLink telecommunications power room will use the approved power equipment anchor. Two anchor bolts are required on each battery stand support foot in earthquake zone 3,4 (heavy) and one per foot in earthquake zone 1,2 (light). Four anchors are required for each power room bay in earthquake zone heavy and two anchors installed diagonally in earthquake zone light.

Note: The standard power equipment / battery stand anchor may not be used with shims. When shims are required for use with power equipment / battery stands, the standard telecommunications equipment anchor may be used in place of the standard Power / battery stand anchor.

3.22 Floor Anchor Bolt Modification Procedures

The Service Supplier may cut or modify floor anchor bolts in restricted applications only (e.g., where the anchors installed in the base of the approved stanchions pose a potential safety/trip hazard and when the standard toll/switch floor anchors are used to anchor battery stands on uneven concrete floors where shimming is required) following the anchor manufacturer’s guidelines. The Service Supplier will adhere to the following procedures to ensure the minimization of airborne metal debris. Refer also to Par. 2.3.6.

3.22.1 Using a metal saw blade, cut the threaded rod at a minimum of two full threads extending beyond the nut. Take care to prevent the propagation of metal filings in the Network Facilities environment.


3-27

3.22.2 Do NOT use abrasive cutting blades, torch or any other heat source to cut the threaded rod after installation.

3.22.3 The cut end will have no exposed zinc plating. A protective coating (CenturyLink-approved touch-up paint for Network Facilities applications) shall be applied to that end to minimize oxidation.

3.23 Floor Tile Punch Procedure:

Tools needed:

• Approved Floor Punch

• A one-inch diameter punch.

• Heat Gun

• If available, use an approved heating device (i.e., heat gun) to heat the tile. Use heating device in accordance with manufacturer’s instruction.

• Place floor tile punch on the area to be punched.

• Strike punch with a mallet while trying not to move the punch (if a heat gun is not available, 1 to 3 forceful strikes with a sharp punch will be needed to get through the floor tile. Additional strikes may cause splintering of the tile.)

• Remove the tile plug.

• If additional debris remains after punching, use spray detergent or HEPA vacuum (approved for use with asbestos) to clean up. If a HEPA vacuum is used for cleanup, the pre-labeled asbestos disposal container must be treated as asbestos waste and must not be emptied for re-use. Emptying the container could cause asbestos fiber release.

• Double bag plug and any asbestos debris that may remain. Ensure that the outer bag is properly labeled for asbestos disposal. Seal the bag and place in a storage area previously identified for asbestos waste. After several bags or containers (i.e., 4 or more) have been accumulated at the location, contact your local EHS or Environmental Manager for pickup and disposal according to local regulations (please call (UNICALL 800) 654-2525 for the area Manager).

Please note that the floor tile punch can also be used to fill in a plug of tile that has been removed previously:

• Select the same size punch as the one that was used to remove the piece of tile.

• If there is a hole in the concrete underneath the tile layer, make sure that you have filled the hole with a stable material to prevent the plug from falling into the hole.


3-28

• Using the punch on an extra floor tile that may be available, follow the procedure listed above to create a plug.

• Apply an appropriate glue or mastic to the underlying material to hold the plug in place. Place the plug in the hole and tap gently into place with the mallet.

• Double bag the asbestos debris and plug. Ensure that the outer bag is properly labeled for asbestos disposal. Seal the bag and place in a storage area previously identified for asbestos waste. After several bags (i.e., 4 small bags or more) have been accumulated at the location contact your local EHS or Environmental Manager for pickup and disposal according to local regulations (please call (UNICALL 800) 654-2525 for the area Manager).

3.24 Floor Tile Drilling With HEPA Vacuum Attachment

Floor tile drills with HEPA vacuum attachments, approved for use with asbestos, can be used if the collection container is pre-labeled for asbestos debris. The drill should be operated at the lowest speed practical to maximize the debris collected in the vacuum.

Additional Considerations:

• To ensure that fiber release is minimized, ensure that the drill and attachment are working properly and are not clogged. If the vacuum attachment gets clogged, the obstructions must be cleared to maximize suction. Water should be sprayed onto the debris to minimize fiber release while the vacuum is being cleared.

• If the HEPA vacuum is not working properly, the procedure for use of a drill with petroleum jelly, “lubricant cable wire interduct” must be used to reduce fiber exposures.

The pre-labeled asbestos disposal container must be treated as asbestos waste and must not be emptied for reuse. Emptying the container could cause unnecessary asbestos fiber release.

• Double bag any remaining asbestos debris. Ensure that the outer bag is properly labeled for asbestos disposal. Seal the bag and place in a storage area previously identified for asbestos waste. After several bags or containers (i.e. 4 or mom) have been accumulated at the location, contact your local EHS or Environmental Manager for pickup and disposal according to local regulations (please call (UNICALL 800) 654-2525 for the area Manager).

3.25 Floor Tile Drilling with Separate HEPA Vacuum Unattached to Tile Drill:

This method can be used when two technicians are available to perform the work. One employee would perform the drilling while the other holds the vacuum (equipped with a disposable container for asbestos wastes). The additional employee must operate the vacuum at the point to catch as much of the released debris as possible. If the vacuum


3-29

becomes clogged, the obstructions must be cleared to maximize suction. Water should be sprayed onto the debris if there is a potential for fiber release while the vacuum is being cleared. If you cannot get the HEPA vacuum to work properly, follow the procedures for drilling through floor tile utilizing petroleum jelly to contain asbestos fibers.

The pre-labeled asbestos disposal container must be treated as asbestos waste and must not be emptied for re-use. Emptying the container could cause asbestos fiber release. Double bag any remaining asbestos debris or items used for cleanup. Ensure that the outer bag is properly labeled for asbestos disposal. Seal the bag and place in a storage area previously identified for asbestos waste. After several bags or containers (i.e. 4 or more) have been accumulated at the location, contact your local EHS or Environmental Manager for pickup and disposal according to local regulations (please call (UNICALL 800) 654-2525 for the Area Manager).

3.26 Raised Floors

When mounting frames, bays, or cabinets on raised floor environments, the floor manufacturer's and/or CenturyLink PEG requirements shall be followed. Where raised floors refer to ED4A306-70 for methods of support use Group 4 for light earthquake applications and Group 16 for heavy earthquake applications. Copies of ED4A306-70 can be obtained by contacting Alcatel-Lucent Technologies, Inc. at http://www.alcatel-lucent.com/.

3.27 Waterproof Floor

3.27.1 Before drilling into any basement floor or basement wall, it shall be the installer's responsibility to determine from the CenturyLink Building Engineer whether or not waterproofing has been provided. Usually this is covered on job drawings or in job specifications.

3.27.2 When waterproofing is used, CenturyLink shall decide the method for securing the frames.

3.27.3 Drilling in waterproofed floors, where authorized, is limited to depths not exceeding three inches.

3.27.4 If the waterproofing cannot be temporarily broken to accept anchors, the “poured concrete block” method should be considered; however, some frames cannot be secured in this manner. Refer to CenturyLink Technical Publication 77351, “CenturyLink Engineering Standards, General Equipment Requirements.”

3.27.5 Frames equipped with pull out units, where an appreciable amount of the weight may be shifted outward, shall not be fastened with the “poured concrete block” method.

3.28 Battery Containment

http://www.alcatel-lucent.com/

http://www.alcatel-lucent.com/


3-30

3.28.1 Before drilling floors for new battery stands the installer shall determine if there are any containment requirements. This may include the entire room. After a floor containment system has been compromised the Real Estate department shall be notified to reestablish the containment.

CenturyLink Tech Pub 77350 Chapter 4 Issue O, July 2016 Cable Holes, Penetrations, and Fire/Smoke Protection

TOC4-i

CONTENTS


4. Cable Holes, Penetrations, and Fire/Smoke Protection .......................................4-1 4.1 General Requirements ...................................................................................4-1 4.2 Closure Labels ................................................................................................4-2 4.3 Horizontal, Miscellaneous, and Vertical Penetrations .............................4-3 4.4 Intumescent Fire Stopping Examples .........................................................4-3 4.5 Cable Hole/Penetration Designations ........................................................4-4 4.6 Approved Materials.......................................................................................4-4 4.7 Embargoing Blocked/Exhausted Cable Hole Penetrations.....................4-4 4.8 Approved Label Templates ..........................................................................4.5

4-4 Floor Plan Sketch ........................................................................................................4-5


4-1

4. Cable Holes, Penetrations, and Fire/Smoke Protection

Note: All cable holes and penetrations that are opened shall be closed with the appropriate intumescent method and labeling requirements listed herein or defined in an Engineering Judgment document provided by the fire stop manufacturer. Approved fire stopping arrangements are based on the appropriate UL listed fire stopping assemblies as specified in CenturyLink’s Fire and Life Safety Practices “E-3 Fire and Smoke Stopping”.

The recommended method of fire / smoke stopping is accomplished with approved intumescent and endothermic materials and high temperature caulking compounds.

Cable holes shall not be filled beyond the amount specified by the manufacturer U.L. assembly drawings for the fire stop material to operate effectively.

Cable holes nearing or surpassing capacity will be brought to the attention of the CenturyLink Engineer responsible for the project immediately. The engineer will consult with the respective planner.

All Service Suppliers are required to have trained, certified personnel when working on fire stopping. Personnel completing the approved fire-stopping manufacturer’s seminar will be deemed certified to properly provide cable hole, penetration, and Fire/Smoke protection fire stopping.

The PEG Configuration of some specific types of equipment and CenturyLink Drawing Standards can identify additional requirements beyond those documented in this chapter.


4.1.1 All cable holes, slots through floors and walls of interior spaces opened for installation purposes, occupied or not, shall be temporarily closed at the end of each working day and/or shift or whenever it is anticipated that no additional cable will be run that same day. Cables holes shall be permanently closed, using an approved method, when no further cable will be run on that specific job. (In “no case” should this exceed 5 days of inactivity before permanently sealing penetrations).

4.1.2 Job installation/removal work requires optimum fire protection to be maintained at all times.

4.1.3 The Service Supplier shall utilize CenturyLink approved fire/smoke stopping systems, which shall be properly installed to conform with their respective Underwriters Laboratory (UL) Listings.

4.1.4 Only one manufacturer’s fire/smoke stopping system shall be used to close any individual penetration. Mixing components from multiple manufacturers within a single penetration is strictly prohibited. Only one fire stop manufacturer should be used for cable tray penetrations per building.

Chapter 4 CenturyLink Tech Pub 77350 Cable Holes, Penetrations, and Fire/Smoke Protection Issue O, July 2016

4-2

4.1.5 Intumescent and non-intumescent systems and putties shall not be mixed or comingled. Intumescent stopped holes shall use intumescent putty only. Putty shall be installed per Underwriters Laboratories Listed of Engineering Judgment assembly drawings and manufacturer’s instructions.

4.1.6 The installer shall refer to intumescent material manufacturer's “Application and Specification Guide” for specific requirements and instructions.

4.1.7 All cable holes and slots that utilize mineral wool bags Be upgraded to an approved fire stop system when opened for a cabling addition and/or mining operation or as soon as practical.

4.1.8 All wood material used for construction of temporary walls and equipment or terminal mounting boards must be either UL listed fire retardant pressure treated and factory marked with the UL label or be completely coated with a fire retardant paint. Mounting boards should be kept to the minimum size required to mount equipment and allow for reasonable growth.

4.1.10 For any work in a building that requires the use of Radiography or x-ray techniques by contractors or vendors for the purpose of locating building structural members and verifying core drill locations, following shall be part of the contractor’s specifications, and part of their MOP document for the work at hand.

• Prior to starting work Contractor must visually survey the building and the proposed work area for personnel exposure floor by floor and notify personnel about the potential for exposure to radiation and to assure that the exposure area is clear of personnel for the duration of the work.

• Prior to starting work Contractor must post warning signage on exterior doors or at safe perimeter distances from the exposure area to warn personnel. Example:

• "WARNING - Radiography is in Progress (on Floors 1, 2, 3, etc..)", or

• "WARNING - x-ray equipment is in use (on Floors 1, 2, 3, etc.)"

1. During each radiographic operation the contractor shall maintain continuous direct visual surveillance of the operation to protect against unauthorized entry into a high radiation area.

4.2 Closure Labels

Note: A template for labels is included with the cable hole application figures and may be reproduced on pressure sensitive paper for use. See Section 4.6.

4.2.1 A green temporary closure tag shall be placed on or near any hole opened during the installation process. This tag shall be removed when the cable hole is permanently closed. It shall be permissible to use a reusable placard (magnetic or etched plastic) to satisfy this requirement. Temporary closures shall be made at the end of each working day or when no additional cable is to be run that same day. The bottom cover is not required for “temporary closures.”


4-3

4.2.1.1 Temporary closure requires that the top cover be secured with a minimum of five bolts (corners and center front) and that putty is installed around cables.

4.2.1.2 Temporary closures, associated with cable removals, require that an additional composite sheet be placed over the old sheet. This sheet shall be used to cover the void caused by the removal of cables. The additional sheet shall be bolted with a minimum of two bolts, and keep the gaps between the cables and the composite sheet one-half inch or less. Installer shall putty the void between the composite sheets and the cables.

4.2.1.3 The edge of the composite sheet against cables shall be taped with aluminum tape (1-2 mils thick), or plastic finger edging approved by the composite sheet manufacture. Protection is required to shield the cables from the composite sheet metal edges.

4.2.2 A red permanent closure tag shall be placed across the edge of a cable hole cover at the end of the installation process to assure that the label is destroyed if the cover is subsequently removed. This tag is required on both sides of the cable hole/penetration.

4.2.3 Closure labels shall have the following information: CenturyLink Job Number, Fire Stop Manufacturer, UL Listed or Engineering Judgment Number, supplier/organization name, telephone contact number, and date of closure. See Section 4.6 for labels.

4.3 Horizontal, Miscellaneous, and Vertical Penetrations

4.3.1 All cable slots, cable sleeves and openings through fire rated walls and floors including conduit runs, fiber optic distribution systems, and other openings require fire/smoke stopping.

4.3.2 All floor cable holes require a top cover of .112” thick steel sheet (.112 is an American Standard Preferred Thickness approximately related to AWG size 10.

Note: Where steel cover plates are used in wall penetrations, the continued use of these plates is optional unless the UL-listed assembly drawing requires their use.

4.3.3 All cable holes through fire rated walls require steel cover plates on each side of the penetration when the traditional method is used.

4.3.4 Temporary protection such as cones, posts, rails shall be provided for personnel and equipment where there is a danger of personnel or material falling through the cable hole.

4.4 Intumescent Fire Stopping Examples

Refer to the applicable UL Listed assembly drawing shown in the CSPEC Home Page (under the Sections titled “Training, then Cable Racks, and then Fire Stopping Specifications”) for the specific method required to suit the cable penetration configuration and office condition. The installer shall strictly adhere to the UL approved fire stopping assembly drawings in the CSPEC Home Page or the Engineering Judgment drawing provided.


4-4

4.5 Cable Hole / Penetration Designations

4.5.1 When cabling drawings/records do not show penetration location names, covers shall be designated per the following pattern (FFCCA) – FF=Floor, CC=Closest Column(s), A=Alpha (A thru Z) locations. A typical designation would be “02B5C.”

4.5.2 Floor penetration designations will be determined by the top cover location and will be applied to both sides of the penetration. All new and opened cable holes shall comply with this requirement. Refer to the Floor Plan Sketch Figure 4-1.

Note: TP 77353 Central Office Drawing Standards refers to a “Cap Delta” (∆) symbol when describing fire-stopped cable hole penetrations on COE-FM floor plan drawings. This symbol is a drawing requirement only and the Service Supplier will not designate the cable hole covers with this symbol.

4.6 Approved Materials

UL listed Fire Protection Products approved for use in Telecommunication Buildings will be identified in CenturyLink Standard Configuration and technical reference documents.


4-5

RG 47-0133 Fire-stopped Cable Hole Label (3"T X6"L)

Figure 4-4 Floor Plan Sketch depicting proper cable hole designations

Northwest Corner

D3 D5 D4

C5 C4

B3 B5 B4

A3 A5 A4

Facilities without columns shall be laid out in a similar fashion. All measurements shall be taken from the Northwest corner. Cable holes shall be designated similar to these examples.

01B3A

01B3B C3

01B5A

01C3A


4-6

4.7 Embargoing Blocked / Exhausted Cable Hole Penetrations

4.8.1 When cable penetrations become blocked due to their capacity limits being reached, the Service Supplier shall notify the CenturyLink Design Engineer listed on the face sheet of the DWP. The penetration will be identified on the Central Office drawings and in the field as an embargoed penetration. Placing additional cable of any type in an embargoed cable hole is strictly prohibited.


4-7

4.8 Approved Label Templates

CABLE HOLE OPENED RG 47-0132

This cable hole is to be temporarily closed at the end of each working day or when no additional

(5-15)

cable is to be run that same day and shall conform to

CenturyLink Technical Publication TP 77350.

Project Number:

Vendor/Organization:

Date Closed:

Firestop Manufacturer:

UL Listed Fire Assembly or EJ number:

Responsible Party Contact

Information:

RG 47-0132 Cable Hole Open Label (3"T X6"L)

FIRESTOPPED CABLE HOLE NOTICE RG 47-0132

(5-15)

This cable hole has been firestopped in accordance

with CenturyLink Technical Publication TP 77350.

Project Number:

Vendor/Organization:

Date Closed:

Firestop Manufacturer:

UL Listed Fire Assembly or EJ number:

Responsible Party Contact

Information:

RG 47-0133 Fire-stopped Cable Hole Label (3"T X6"L)

CenturyLink Tech Pub 77350 Issue O, July 2016

Chapter 5 Cabling, Forming, Running, and Securing

CONTENTS Chapter and Section Page

5. Cabling, Forming, Running, and Securing ............................................................... 5-1

5.1 General Requirements .....................................................................................5-1 5.2 Cable Mining ...................................................................................................5-3 5.3 Bending and Forming ......................................................................................5-5 5.4 Protection and Storage ....................................................................................5-7 5.5 Securing and Supporting ................................................................................5-8 5.6 Power cables ...................................................................................................5-10 5.7 Grounding Conductors .................................................................................5-11 5.8 Cable Pile-up ...................................................................................................5-12 5.9 Coaxial Cables ................................................................................................5-13 5.10 Fiber Optic Cable ...........................................................................................5-13 5.11 Ribbon Cable...................................................................................................5-18 5.12 Repair of Damaged Cables ...........................................................................5-18 5.13 Spliced Cables, Splicing Systems, and Mated Connectable Cables ........5-18 5.14 Use of Nylon and Plastic Cable Ties ...........................................................5-19 5.15 Securing Tables...............................................................................................5-20 5.16 Securing Figures .............................................................................................5-22

Figures

5-1 Starting Stitch .............................................................................................................. 5-22

5-2 Kansas City Stitch ...................................................................................................... 5-23

5-3 Sewing First Layer ..................................................................................................... 5-24

5-4 Sewing Second Layer ................................................................................................. 5-24

5-5 Supporting and Sewing Cables to Supports at Turns ........................................... 5-25

5-6 Securing Cable to Support with Kansas City Stitch .............................................. 5-26

5-7 9 Ply Cord splice technique ....................................................................................... 5-26

5-8 Chicago Stitch Used to Sew Cables Together ......................................................... 5-27

5-9 Banding of Cables with 9 Ply cord ........................................................................... 5-28

TOC 5-i



5-2

5. Cabling, Forming, Running, and Securing

Note: Additional requirements for power cabling are found in Chapter 9.

5.1 General Requirements The requirement for cable routing and segregation shall be per job specification and records/drawings, specified in CenturyLink Standard Configuration documents or technical publications.

Cables shall be run directly from point to point with only a “maintenance loop” of cable (not to exceed 4 feet) stored on the cable rack. All “maintenance loop” cabling must remain within the confines of the cable rack or designated cable support system.

5.1.1 All cables (other than grounding cables and alarm wires) shall be run within the confines of the cable rack stringers and shall not be run so as to block access to entrance to a bay. Do not run cables on existing cable racks where cable pileup exceeds cable pileup limits or the top of cable horns. Cable horns are limited to a maximum usable length of twelve inches. Routing of cables between relay racks and frames without using the overhead cable support systems is prohibited (Unless specified in the Standard Configuration document). Placement of vertical splices, adapters on or in the relay rack uprights and cable ways and or horizontal/vertical cable support systems is prohibited. Unless specified in the PEG the use of connectors in the frame/relay rack uprights is also prohibited

Note: If the PEG grants the Service Supplier a Letter of Deviation on running their cable in offices that have excessive build-up then that supplier shall document and place a copy of that waiver in the job package.

5.1.2 Supporting or securing of any cable to AC conduit is prohibited.

5.1.3 Remove all cable running tags and binder grouping material after the completion of testing. Exception: When requested by the B&C personnel and the CenturyLink Design Engineer concurs with a letter of deviation, on a per job basis, the tags may be left in place if those tags are made of a fire resistant material and will not inhibit the installation of future cable or restrict equipment maintenance. A copy of that waiver shall be placed in the job package. Refer also to Chapter 6, Par. 6.5.

5.1.4 Cable and cable management systems shall be at a distance sufficient to maintain a maximum cable/enclosure temperature of 115° F. At a minimum, the distance shall be no less than 6 inches of clearance from engine exhaust pipes, steam pipes, or other similar hazards.

5.1.5 Cable spanning horizontal planes shall not exceed 9 inches without additional support. Interim support points (auxiliary framing, conduit, etc.) must be installed so as not to interfere with future cross aisle cable racks or cable access to bays, cabinets,



5-3

BDFB return bars, etc.

5.1.6 Where cables transition off a cable rack, they shall be routed over the side stringers or off the end of a cable rack that will not be extended at some future date. Cables shall not be routed through the cable rack with the exception of “un-protected” battery cables where cable bending radius requirements can be maintained (refer to Par. 9.2.8).

For additional cable routing and transition requirements, refer to TP 77351 Chapter 6, Par. 6A.4.6. All cables dropping into a frame from a horizontal cable rack or duct system must be routed to align as directly above the frame upright or vertical duct system as possible. At no time will cable of any type make a horizontal transition greater than nine inches across the top of the bay to access the opposite bay upright or vertical duct arrangement. Overhead horizontal cable rack or duct systems must be extended beyond the location below where the cable will enter the bay upright or vertical duct.

5.1.7 All cable connections within a bay shall be supported within 24 inches of a point of termination.

5.1.8 Cables larger than 14 AWG must not be routed through a frame’s uprights. Cables smaller than 14 AWG, must not pass from the front of the bay to the rear (unless specified in CenturyLink Standard Configuration documents).

5.2 Cable Mining

5.2.1 Cable mining conducted above working equipment shall only be done after precautions are taken to protect the equipment below. A protective barrier shall be constructed between the cable rack and the equipment. Before any cables are removed, the cable racks shall be vacuumed with a High Efficiency Particulate Arrester (HEPA) vacuum.

5.2.1.1 The B&C personnel will identify the critical equipment over which any cable mining activity must be performed in the Maintenance Window. The Service Supplier or contract agent will add this information to the Detailed MOP using the following format:

“List of Equipment on the Mining Route. Activity above this equipment must be performed in the Maintenance Window.”

Relay Rack and Equipment Description

RR# (s) (DCS, Optical Terminal equipment, power plant

rectifiers, BDFB, synchronization, alarming, etc.)



5-4

This information must be entered into the Detailed MOP before any actual work steps or requirements are added. This is to recognize which equipment is considered “Critical Equipment” and where cable mining activities will be performed in the maintenance window.

NOTE: All other cable mining activities, assigned by this job, can be performed during normal business hours (including the restitching of cable racks after cables selected for removal are mined). 5.2.2 Ring or loop type cutters, which require the free end of the cable to be inserted through a ring or loop, shall be required for the removal of cable. Removal of cables shall have an authorized "Detailed" MOP written before any cable is removed. 5.2.3 A current probe or clamp on ammeter capable of reading both AC and DC currents shall be used to check for a zero current condition prior to the cutting of power/power return and grounding cables. The installer shall be required to designate the far-end termination on both sides of the power / grounding cable prior to the initial cut. This shall be documented in the "Detailed" MOP and a copy placed in the job package.

Note: Any power/power return and ground cable found without zero current flow shall be referred to CenturyLink B&C for de-energizing. If a grounding conductor is inadvertently energized, ensure that there is an adequate alternate current path prior to cutting it. Power cables (either the “hot” lead or the grounded return) that are going to be cut/removed and are still energized must be defused (or circuit breaker disabled) prior to the cut/removal.

5.2.4 All cables earmarked for removal/mining should be removed, where practical, to maintain cable pileup limits and safe loads. Where cabling cannot be removed without causing a service interruption, those cables shall be mined / removed to a minimum of the top of the cable rack where removal is not possible and the ends of all remaining cables shall be individually taped and tagged with far end information for future removal. All removals shall be in compliance with all applicable codes including NEC Article 800.2: Abandoned Communications Cable is defined as: Installed communication cable that is not terminated at both ends at a connector or other equipment and not identified for future use with a tag. (This definition has been added to the 2002 Code for use with 800.52(B), which now requires removal of accessible abandoned communications cable. Abandoned cable increases fire loading unnecessarily, and, where installed in plenums, it can affect airflow. Similar requirements can be found in Article 640, 645, 725, 760,820, and 830.)



5-5

5.3 Bending and Forming

5.3.1 Cables shall not be run or formed in a manner that violates the minimum bend radius.

Minimum Bending Radius for Cable and Wire Table



5-6

Power Cables

Wire Size Max. Amps Circular Mils Weight/Ft. Diameter* Min. Bend Radius 30 0.3A 100 - - 0.09” 28 0.5A 160 - - 0.11" 26 0.9A 254 - - 0.14" 24 1.3A 404 - - 22 2.3A 642 - - 20 3A 1,021 - - 18 7A 1,624 - - 16 10A 2,582 - - 14 15A 4,110 0.026# 0.19" 1.71" 12 20A 6,530 0.035# 0.21" 1.89" 10 30A 10,380 0.049# 0.24" 2.16" 8 50A 16,510 0.084# 0.31" 2.79" 6 65A 26,240 0.126# 0.40" 3.60" 4 85A 41,740 0.190# 0.45" 4.05" 2 115A 66,360 0.275# 0.51" 4.59"

1/0 150 105,600 0.443# 0.63" 5.67" 1/0 Flex 150 111,100 0.510# 0.66" 5.94"

2/0 175 133,100 0.540# 0.68" 6.12" 2/0 Flex 175 131,300 0.630# 0.72" 6.48"

4/0 230 211,600 0.814# 0.75" 6.75" 4/0 Flex 230 222,200 0.890# 0.84" 7.56"

350 310 350,000 1.310# 0.98" 8.82" 350 Flex 310 373,700 1.490# 1.07" 9.63"

500 380 500,000 1.815# 1.12" 10.08" 500 Flex 380 535,300 2.000# 1.24" 11.16"

750 475 750,000 2.700# 1.34" 12.06" 750 Flex 475 777,700 2.900# 1.54" 13.86"

Fiber Optic Cables

Cable Type

Sub-Units/Cable

Fibers/Sub- Unit Assembly

Sub-Unit Diameter

Cable Diameter*

Min. Bend Radius

Single N/A N/A N/A 2mm 1.5 Dual N/A N/A N/A 2mm 1.5 inches

Quad 4 1 1.6mm 5.4mm 2.1 inches 12 Strand 12 1 900 µm 0.278 inches 2.8 inches 24 Strand 4 6 0.184 inches 0.541 inches 5.41

48 Strand 4 12 0.206 inches 0.590 inches 5.9 inches 72 Stranded 6 12 0.206 inches 0.722 inches 7.2 inches 72 Ribbon 6 12 Ribbon Ribbon Ribbon



5-7

General Rules for Non-Specific Cable Types

Cable Type Bending Radius Switchboard/ABAM 3 Times Cable Diameter

Shielded/Coaxial, Twin Conductor 10 Times Cable Diameter Power Cable 9 Time Cable Diameter (Refer to Par. 9.11)

Armored Cable (BX), Flexible Steel

5 Times Cable Diameter Grounding Conductor 1 Ft. Min. (12 in.)

Note: General Bending Rule, (for cable types not specified above) bending radius equals 10 times the diameter.

5.3.2 Earthquake Considerations Cabling between equipment elements that are secured to different earthquake planes (i.e. floor and ceiling) shall require additional slack between the cable break off and the equipment frame. Typically an additional 9 inch slack loop shall be provided.

5.4 Protection and Storage Protect all cables and wires against damage at all locations where they come in contact with sharp edges or threaded rod, using sheet fiber paper, plastic edge guard, and/or protective tubing as appropriate.

5.4.1 All cables stored for future use shall be identified at the point of termination with both far and near end location information. All cables shall be stored in a manner that allows for future access.

5.4.2 Cables run (extended), but not yet connected, shall be coiled, banded, and stored in a manner that shall not damage equipment or cause a safety hazard. Under no circumstances shall unconnected cables be stored in the cable rack system, in frame uprights, or vertical duct systems. Unconnected cables in cable support systems must be removed.

5.4.3 Plastic electrical tape or heat shrinkable tubing shall be used to wrap/protect the butt location of ABAM and shielded cables.

5.4.4 All cables shall have their exposed ends covered (taped) during the running process to protect existing equipment. The tape shall be left on until the cables are terminated. All cable running activities that have been determined to have the potential of damaging equipment or causing a safety hazard to personnel shall have a "Detailed” MOP written and authorized describing the hazards of how the supplier will handle the emergency situation.

5.4.5 Specific Locations Requiring Protection All types of cable rack that have threaded rod(s) within 3 inches of the cable rack shall have the threaded rod(s) protected with protective tubing. All tubing shall be installed prior to the start of cable running operations.



5-8

5.4.5.1 Provide protection using sheet fiber paper on inverted ladder-type cable rack in a horizontal or vertical plane where the wire and cable is in contact with the flange side of the cross straps.

5.4.5.2 Power wires fastened to the underside of channel type cable rack straps shall be protected.

5.4.5.3 Cables on distributing frames that are butted at the transverse arm require fiber protection or fanning rings.

5.4.5.4 Fanning rings shall be required when wires are fanned under transverse arms (i.e. when wires from one cable are terminated on multiple blocks).

5.4.6 Specific Cabling Requiring Protection All soft rubber insulated cables require protection when secured with 9 ply cord, or equivalent. Cable insulation that will not cold flow is exempt from this requirement. Cold flow is a condition where insulation thins or flows away from an impingement point.

5.4.6.1 All exposed ends of power/ground cables shall be protected with rubber insulating tape and plastic electrical tape or heat shrinkable end caps. The added insulating and protective covering shall be equivalent to the insulation and protective cover of the involved cable. This requirement applies specifically to common feeders serving multiple bays or cables that have been dead-ended.

5.5 Securing and Supporting 5.5.1 All switchboard cables and wires not in screened or panned and bracketed (with cable horns) are to be sewn with. 9 ply cord (twine, waxed polyester, 9 ply) or equivalent. Horizontal runs are to be sewn every sixth strap and when necessary to keep cable in the cable rack or from sagging through the cable rack. Vertical runs and all waterfall type cable racks are to be sewn on alternate straps (typically beginning at least 2 straps prior to and ending 2 straps after the waterfall distance to maintain a smooth transition). To the extent possible and prudent, cables shall be sewn in complete layers the approximate width of the cable rack before starting additional layers. Installer may leave securing cord provided that an ending stitch is made and the cord is properly stored (secured back so that it doesn’t provide a safety hazard for equipment or personnel) for future use. No more than two square inches of cable shall be secured under a single stitch. Band between cable rack break-off and first frame support is exempt from the two square inch requirement. Note: Securing cables at the shelf or point of termination shall be per PEG or manufacturer’s recommendation, whichever is more stringent.



5-9

5.5.2 All cables shall be tied with 9 ply cord, or equivalent, at cable rack break-off points, banded or tied between the cable rack and first support (where this distance exceeds eighteen inches), and tied at the first available support (cable support bracket) on a frame, bay, vertical fiber duct or cabinet. Where no cable support bracket exists, the Service Supplier may secure cabling through rear relay rack upright mounting holes or rear vertical fiber duct mounting holes to meet the eighteen-inch requirement provided that cable bending radius tolerances are maintained (refer also to par. 5.3). At the point of break-off the cable rack stringer (side of the cable rack) cables shall be bundled together and protected with sheet fiber paper or equivalent. When cable rack pileup prevents the installer from securing cables at the cable rack break-off, they shall be secured to the existing cables.

5.5.3 All cables and wires shall be secured at intervals not to exceed three sheath feet in protected ducts or eighteen inches in open ducts and at all turns or junctions within the frame, bay, or cabinet.

5.5.4 Secure all cables at turns, before and after all turns and junctions of horizontal runs in other than pan, basket, and horned racks.

5.5.5 Cable shall not be unsupported for a distance greater than three sheath feet, measured from the last support on the cable rack or waterfall to the first support on the frame, bay, or relay rack, or vertical fiber duct except where otherwise specified in PEG, specifications or drawings.

5.5.6 Distributing frame cabling requires the securing of all cables on first and every alternate transverse arm, at break-off points, turns, and at the terminal strip location. Cables secured to horizontal transverse arm shall be secured according to the following table. Transverse arms on the horizontal side of the distribution frame shall have their cabling equally distributed across the served area. Cables are butted on the transverse arm at the point of break-off. Cable Ties shall not be used to secure cables on Distributing Frames. Cables shall be secured using 9 ply waxed cord or equivalent.

5.5.7. All cables shall be secured in a manner that affords access to the equipment.

Distribution Frames Cable and Wire Securing

How To Identify Need Securing Guidelines On transverse arms 5” or less Secure cable sheath within one-half inch of

butt. On transverse arms 5” to 12” in length

Secure cable sheaths within one-half inch of butt.



5-10

On transverse arms greater than 12” 1. Secure at cable turn 2. Secure at cable butt location 3. Secure midway between butt and turn

Frame vertical side Sew cables at alternate transverse arms Unsupported drop at bottom or top of frame

Maximum cable distance 3 sheath feet

Distribution of fanning rings No additional support required Wires that cross under a transverse arm at cable butt

Requires a fanning ring instead of butt fiber

5.6 Power Cables

The use of segregated cable racks for power is the first choice of installation in central offices. Where placement of a separate segregated power cable rack is not physically possible (some embedded 9’ or 11’6” environments) the following may apply with the approval of the Representative responsible for Common Systems engineering standards and the Design Engineer.



5-11

Power cables with protection devices 70 amps or less and using cables 4/0 AWG or smaller may be run on cable racks utilized for switchboard cabling if no alternative exists. Any power cables larger than 4/0 regardless of size shall be run on dedicated FUSED POWER CABLE ONLY cable racks (per TP 77385). The placement of any type of cable used for anything other than power on FUSED POWER CABLE ONLY racks is strictly prohibited. New floor supported area build-outs will require segregated cable racking for power cable. The issuance of Letters of Deviation waving any of these requirements shall be considered invalid. Refer also to Chapter 9 Par. 9.2.4.

5.6.1 Dedicated FUSED POWER CABLE ONLY cables racks shall not be equipped with screens, pans or cable horns. T-intersections and / or 90 degree turns in the racks require corner brackets in order to maintain the minimum-bending radius of larger size cables. All cabling on these racks shall be secured per Table 5.15.

5.6.2 Power cables (Battery and Battery Return) on unsecured cable racks shall be closely coupled/paired and secured together at 24-inch intervals. Refer also to Par. 9.2.3 and 9.3.2.1.

5.6.3 Cables from the rectifiers to the battery, charge/discharge bus, between the battery stands and from the batteries to the distribution panels shall be on a separate cable rack from all other cables. These cables shall be referred to as UNPROTECTED POWER CABLES.

5.6.4 Vertical runs of power cable, which extend more than three floors, shall be provided with twenty feet of horizontal cable run out every third floor to alleviate weight buildup.

5.6.5 Power (battery and battery return) cables shall be supported within 24 inches of a point of termination.

5.6.6 Power alarm and monitoring leads run within power room locations only may be secured directly to cable rack stringers with 9 ply cord. Use of metal securing clips on cable rack stringers or auxiliary framing and/or nylon (or other) tie wraps for securing these leads is prohibited. Alarm and monitoring leads run outside of the power room environment shall be run on a dedicated switchboard cable rack where such switchboard cable rack exists.

5.7 Grounding Conductors 5.7.1 Grounding conductors 1/0 and smaller may be secured directly to the side of cable racks with cord or ties. See 5.14, “Use of Nylon and Plastic Cable Ties ”.

5.7.2 Grounding conductors larger than 1/0 shall be suspended on and secured to cable hangers. Cable hangers shall be placed at eighteen-inch intervals.

5.7.3 Grounding cables shall be supported within 24 inches from the point of termination.



5-12

5.8 Cable Pile-up

5.8.1 All cables shall be run within the confines of the cable rack stringers and shall not be run so as to block access to the entrance of a bay. Do not run cables on existing cable racks where cable pileup exceeds cable pileup limits or the top of cable horns. Cable horns are limited to a maximum usable length of twelve inches

Note: Detailed cable pile-up information is documented in Technical Publication 77351, Chapter 6, 6A.4.1. Safe load limits is documented in Technical Publication 77351 Chapter 6A.3.

Switchboard/ABAM Cable

Horizontal Cable Rack

Width of Cable Rack Supports on 5’1”

Centers Supports on 6’0”

Centers 5” to 12” See 5.8.1.1 See 5.8.1

15” to 25” 12” 10” 30” 10” 7”

5.8.1 The maximum pile-up of switchboard, coax, ABAM, etc. allowed on cable rack 12 inches wide or less shall be no greater than the width of the cable rack.

Vertical Cable Rack

5.8.2 Vertical runs of Switchboard/ABAM type cables are is limited to 12 inches of pile up for cable racks 12 inches and larger.

Power Cable Rack 5.8.3 The maximum pile-up on vertical or horizontal “Power Only” cable rack shall not exceed 7 inches.

Power Cable Pile-up (Horizontal and Vertical)

Width of Ladder Cable Rack

Maximum Depth of Cable Allowed

(Supports on 5’1” Centers


(Supports on 6’ Centers 12-20 Inches

(Solid Stringer Only) 7 Inches 7 Inches

25-30 Inches

(Reinforced Only) 7 Inches 7 Inches



5-13

5.8.4 The maximum width of horizontal and vertical dedicated power cable rack shall not exceed 20 inches before converting to a reinforced cable rack. Any dedicated power cable rack 25 inches in width or larger shall be a reinforced cable rack. All power cable rack shall be solid stringer type only.

5.8.5 The maximum pile-up on cable hangers or “T” bars or brackets shall be limited to 2 1/2 inches. One-inch cable minimum clearance shall be maintained between hanger and supporting cable rack stringer. The maximum pile-up on cable brackets or hangers shall not exceed the manufacturers recommended weight restriction or the width of the bracket, whichever is more stringent.

5.8.6 Fiber Optic Riser Type Cable Pile-up (Horizontal and Vertical)

Width of Ladder Fiber Cable Rack


(Supports on 5’1” Centers)


(Supports on 6’ Centers)

5 Inches

5 Inches

5 Inches

12-20 Inches

7 Inches

7 Inches

5.9 Coaxial Cables

5.9.1 Coaxial cables may be commingled with other types of switchboard cables and wire. Coaxial cables shall not be run on “Fiber Optic Only” or “Power Only” cable rack.

5.9.2 Care shall be taken, when sewing or banding, not to indent or collapse cables.

5.10 Fiber Optic Cable

5.10.1 Upon receipt of fiber optic cables for installation, the Service Supplier shall conduct a walk-through of the cable route. The Service Supplier shall inform the CenturyLink Design Engineer of any fiber cable that exceeds acceptable slack limits referenced in Paragraph 5.10.4.

5.10.2 Wherever fiber cables may come in contact with any sharp or metal edge, the cable shall be protected with sheet fiber paper or equivalent. Fiber jumpers and cables shall be protected from lacing twine by wrapping those in one layer of sheet fiber paper.

5.10.3 Fiber Optic Intra-office Riser cables and jumpers shall not be pulled or twisted during installation. Fiber cable (12 fiber and smaller) must be bundled together and loosely secured every 6’ along horizontal cable support systems to prevent coiling or snagging. Manufacturers' guidelines regarding bend radius shall be followed at all times where these requirements are more stringent than those listed in this chapter.

5.10.4 Fiber Optic Cable slack storage within dedicated, segregated fiber-only cable



5-14

racks or fiber duct-type protection systems is strictly prohibited. Fiber optic cable slack shall be stored in approved slack storage panels and facilities only. The looping of fiber cables (within any dedicated fiber duct or cable rack system) is strictly prohibited. Fiber jumper slack shall be stored on reels or trays, specifically designed for that purpose. Only CenturyLink-approved fiber cable support systems and slack storage units may be used within Central Office environments. Slack lengths stored in the horizontal trough system or on the “Fiber Optic Cable Only” Cable” rack shall not be looped and will adhere to the following examples:

Note: Acceptable fiber cable slack limits within horizontal sections of “Fiber Only Cable” rack or trough systems will be equal to or less than those stated in the following tables.

Maximum Fiber Cable Slack Lengths per Fiber Cable (Within “Fiber-Only” Cable Racks):

Run Length in Meters

Run Length In Feet

Maximum Slack In Feet (Meters)

1-15 ∼3.3’ to ∼50’ 2’ (∼.6m) 16-25 ∼53’ to ∼ 82’ 3’ (∼.9m) 26-50 ∼85’ to ∼164’ 5’ (∼1.5m) 51-75 ∼167’ to ∼246’ 7’ (∼2.1m) > 76 >∼250’ 10’ (∼3m)



5-15

Maximum Fiber Cable Slack Lengths per Fiber Cable (Within “Fiber Duct-Type” Cable Racks):

Run Length in Meters

Run Length In Feet

Maximum Slack In Feet (Meters)

1-15 ∼3.3’ to ∼50’ 1’ (∼.3m) 16-25 ∼53’ to ∼82’ 2’ (∼.6m) 26-50 ∼85’ to ∼164’ 3’ (∼.9m) > 51 >∼167’ 5’ (∼1.5m)

5.10.5 Cable ties shall not be used for banding or securing fiber optic cables/jumpers.

5.10.6 Metallic type fiber optic cables shall be grounded. Components include protective cable covering, cable sheath and/or any metallic inner strength members.

5.10.7 All 90-degree corners used to route and support fiber cables on “FIBER OPTIC CABLE ONLY” cable racks must be equipped with corner brackets. Fiber cables are routed around the corners using the approved corner brackets.

5.10.8 New cable racks installed to support fiber optic cables must be dedicated for that purpose. Placing intra-office fiber optic cables with copper cables on the same cable rack is strictly prohibited. All new fiber cable racks will be dedicated, segregated orange ladder type (solid stringer only) equipped with orange plastic kydex pan and cable horns. The standard size cable rack for fiber optic cables in 7’ floor-supported systems is 20” (unless specific office conditions, CenturyLink capacity decisions, or CenturyLink Standard Configuration documents dictate otherwise). Fiber optic cables run horizontally on these racks are not secured except where the cable breaks onto or off of the cable rack. At these points, the fiber cable will be wrapped with a layer of sheet fiber paper and secured to the cable rack stringers, or transition bracket while maintaining the minimum bend radius.

5.10.9 Vertical fiber cable rack will be installed using the orange ladder cable rack without the plastic pan and brackets. The vertical fiber cable itself must be manually wrapped with sheet fiber paper and securely tied with 9 ply cord to every cable rack cross strap to secure the cable on vertical runs. Fiber optic inter-office “MIC” type cable will be laid in the orange cable rack unsecured. Existing gray fiber cable rack will not be removed to add the new standard fiber orange cable rack. Adding orange pan to other colors of fiber cable rack is not acceptable. New fiber cables placed on existing gray fiber cable rack will continue to be wrapped with sheet fiber paper and secured to every fourth cross strap. Orange panned and bracketed fiber cable rack will be used for all new additions. Gray cable rack is not acceptable for new fiber cable rack installations, only for extending existing systems. For additional fiber optic cable requirements, refer to par. 8.17.2 and TP



5-16

77351, Chapter 6, Unit G or the CenturyLink Fiber Optic Cable Requirements and Slack Limits Policy document.

5.10.10 Fiber cables transitioning from a horizontal cable rack system must be loosely bundled and secured as close to the top of the vertical 2”X2” multi-slotted fiber duct as possible using the holes on the back of the duct.

5.10.11 End caps are required on the end of all horizontal or vertical sections

5.10.12 Fiber jumpers and cables will be run in either an approved fiber protection system or on dedicated, segregated cable rack per the following guidelines:

Fiber Optic Cable / Jumper Type Shall be run in a Fiber Protection

System

Shall be run on Fiber Cable Rack

OFN type Fiber Jumpers Yes No (Note 1) OFNR / OFNP Type Fiber Cable: 1 fiber Yes Yes (Note 3) OFNR / OFNP Type Fiber Cable: 2 to12 fibers

Yes (Note 2)

Yes (Note 3)

OFNR / OFNP Type Fiber Cable: over 12 fibers

No Yes

Notes: 1. It is recommended that fiber patch cords/jumpers shall not be run commingled

with larger type fiber optic cables. The weight of the larger cables has the potential to cause service-disrupting micro bends in the smaller patch cords/jumpers.

2. Small quantities of fiber optic cables (10 cables or less total) containing between 4 – 8 fibers/cable may be run in the fiber duct where existing office conditions prevent the installation of a cable rack system (or where the maximum quantity of 10 cables would not be exceeded).

3. Multiple groups of single or dual OFNR fiber cables may be run on dedicated, segregated panned and bracketed orange fiber-only cable rack when the following criteria is met: • The small fiber cables are to be bundled together every 5’ to 6’ within the ladder

[panned and bracketed] orange cable rack. • The fiber cables are bundled together by wrapping the fiber cable group with

sheet fiber paper and loosely securing with 9 ply cord. • Care must be taken to ensure that small fiber cable bundles remain undamaged

on the cable rack. Where possible, segregate the fiber cable bundles from larger cables within the cable rack and limit instances where large cables cross over smaller cable bundles.

5.10.13 Outside Plant (OSP)-rated fiber cable must be spliced and converted to OFNP or OFNR fiber cable at the cable vault or cable entrance into the CO environment. The OSP-rated fiber cable must be transitioned to low smoke indoor OFNR rated cable within 50



5-17

sheathed feet from the OSP cable entering into the network facility from an outside wall to conform to current applicable National Electric Code (NEC) limits and CenturyLink network policy requirements. To support this OSP cable length limitation, an approved FSF device must be placed within the 50 sheathed feet of the OSP cable’s entrance into the network facility through an outside wall. This length limitation includes all rise and run measurements along the cable route to the FSF, including inside the cable vault. Only the use of OSP OFNR or OFNP indoor/outdoor rated transition cable will allow extension beyond the 50 foot rule.

5.10.14 Fiber optic cable trough capacity pileup estimates are as follows (by duct size):

2” x 2” FiberGuide Duct Pileup in

Inches Quantity 1.7 mm

Cables Quantity 2.0 mm

Cables Quantity 3.0 mm Cables

2 480 360 160





2 960 720 320 3 1440 1080 480 4 1920 1440 640





2 1440 1080 480 3 2160 1620 720 4 2880 2160 960





2 2880 2160 960 3 4320 3240 1440 4 5760 4320 1920

Note: The pileup estimates above are based on the following assumptions:

• Fiber cable quantities listed above are laid straight within the duct to obtain the maximum capacity available.

• Fiber cables are singles or small “duals” only. • These estimates apply only to horizontal sections of fiber duct.



5-18

• All fiber cables placed in the trough are the size indicated. 5.11 Ribbon Cable Some Fiber Optic Ribbon type cables can be run on dedicated fiber cable rack. For detailed specifications on fiber optic cable approved for use within central offices and buildings, contact the CenturyLink representative for fiber cable standards or technology selection. All other fiber ribbon cables shall be placed in dedicated cableways and labeled for fiber optic ribbon cables only.

5.12 Repair of Damaged Cables 5.12.1 Damaged outer jackets of Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) covered cables shall be repaired with electrical tape. The tape shall be applied in two half-lapped layers with the final two wraps applied without tension and overlapping. The tape shall extend a minimum of two inches past the damaged section.

5.12.2 Seriously damaged sections of outer jackets of PVC covered cables shall be repaired by removing the damaged section and replacing it with the covering from a similar cable. Apply a single half-lapped layer of electrical tape over the new section, extending two inches either side of the repaired section, to secure it in place.

5.12.3 Damaged outer jackets of power cable shall be repaired with an insulation equivalent to that of the original insulation or with an insulating device identified for the purpose. Heat shrink tubing and/or electrical tape are approved for this use.

5.12.4 A run of cable shall be replaced if the number of damaged conductors exceeds five percent of total conductors. For fiber cables the maximum number of damaged conductors cannot exceed 12 fibers out of a 72-fiber cable.

5.12.5 Repair of damaged fiber cables must be evaluated (for loss characteristics) and approved by the PEG Representative responsible for fiber cable standards prior to installation.

5.13 Spliced Cables, Splicing Systems, and Mated Connectable Cables 5.13.1 Multi-conductor cable shall be rerun if the number of spliced conductors exceeds five percent of the conductors in the cable. Under certain conditions, this requirement may be deviated from with permission of the CenturyLink Design Engineer or the use of an approved cable splicing system. A LOD shall be required and the reason for not rerunning the cable shall be documented in the job log.

5.13.2 Splicing of any type of cables shall be kept to a minimum and, if required, shall be done at the equipment shelf or approved splice shelf. All splices shall be protected.

5.13.3 Mating of connectable cables shall be kept to a minimum and if required shall be done at the equipment shelf. Connectors shall only appear in the vertical upright. Connectors shall only appear in the vertical upright of frames, bays or cabinets when specified in the PEG Standard Configuration.



5-19

5.13.4 Mated connectable cables shall be mated and secured by using twine, tie wraps, hook and loop systems, screws, spring clips, clear heat shrink, etc.

5.13.5 Spliced or mated cables shall be protected, designated (location, type, functionality), and be accessible for maintenance. Splices or mated cables that are stored in cableways, or dispersed throughout the equipment facility shall require a “Master Location List” (RG47-0156). The “Master Location List”, shall show all splice number, splice locations, splice type, and functionality of the spliced circuit. The “Master Location List” shall reside at the same facility and be available to those with a need for the information. Splice locations shall also be designated to show exact location of the splice. Designations shall be visible from the floor, and are require a minimum designation of a Master Location List reference number. Splice connections shall have sufficient slack at the splice point for maintenance. Splicing fiber optic cables are only permitted within approved splice shelves.

5.13.6 Protective covers or caps shall be installed on unused connectors to protect contacts from mechanical or ESD damage.

5.14 Use of Nylon and Plastic Cable Ties 5.14.1 Cable ties are not approved for securing or banding of cables in cable racks or securing fiber optic cables and jumpers.

5.14.2 Cable ties used for banding and securing of cable, PVC protection etc. shall be of an adequate size, type, strength, etc. for the particular application. Tightening cable ties to the point of damaging the cable is strictly prohibited.

5.14.3 Cable ties shall be trimmed at the locking head with a flush cutting device that provides automatic tensioning.

5.14.4 Under no circumstances shall cable ties have sharp or jagged cut ends protruding from the locking head. A cable tie is considered to have sharp or jagged ends when it is sharp to the touch.

5.14.5 The locking head of reusable cable ties shall be positioned so as not to interfere with the installation or removal of apparatus or equipment

5.14.6 Reusable cable tie tails shall be positioned so as not to present a personnel hazard.

5.14.7 When superimposing additional cable or wire to forms, existing cable ties shall be removed where the heads of tie wraps interfere with additional cable or wires.

5.14.8 Where cable or wire forms are secured to cable securing brackets, the locking head of the cable tie shall be positioned on the side of the bracket opposite the side on which the cables or wires are run.

5.14.9 Nylon ties shall not be used at any location on the MDF, CDF SDDF, COSMIC or any other type of Distribution Frame.

5.14.11 Approved Cable Tie Applications



5-20

5.14.11.1 Banding together of cables after the cables break off the cable rack or other similar banding operations.

5.14.11.2 Banding together of cables or power wire including flexible cordage and soft rubber cables with the use of protection.

5.14.12.3 For power cable strain relief ties.

5.14.13.4 For banding together armored cables.

5.14.14.5 The securing of power, ground, and armored cable to cable brackets and other similar-type wire supporting details in power equipment bays.

5.14.15.6 The securing of ground cable to the stringers of cable rack and auxiliary framing bars.

5.15 Securing Tables

Sewing Horizontal Resting Runs On

Dedicated Power and Switchboard Cable Racks

Size of Wire Sew at Strap No. of Twine Strands

Ultimate No. of Layers

Cables per Stitch

400 kcmil or Larger

Every 4th

4

Any Number Note 1

2

250-374 kcmil

Every 4th

2

Any Number Note 1

2

4/0 and Smaller Every 4th

2

Any Number Note 1

4

Switchboard Cable Every 6th

2

Any Number Note 1

6 Note 2

Fiber Optic Cable

(OFNR) Every 4th 2

Any Number

Note 1

Note 3

(Refer also to Par. 5.10.13)



5-21

Sewing Vertical Or Inverted Horizontal Runs

On Dedicated Power and Switchboard Cable Racks

Size of Wire Sew at Strap Number of Twine Strands

Ultimate Number of

Layers

Cables per Stitch

250 kcmil or Larger

Every Strap 4

Note 1 1

4/0 - #4 Every Strap 2

Note 1 2

#6 and Smaller Every Strap 2

Note 1

Note 2 Switchboard

Cable Alternate

Strap 2

Note 1

4 Note 2

Fiber Optic Cable (Refer to Note

1 below)

Every Strap 2 Any Number

Note 1

Note 3

(Refer also to Par. 5.10.9)

Note: The following types of fiber optic cable ratings are included in these securing requirements: • OFNP • OFNR • I/O OFNP • I/O OFNR • OSP-rated (where permitted to be run on cable rack).



5-22

Sewing on Horizontal Runs of Cable Hangers

Cable Hangers Spaced at 18” Intervals

Size of Wire Sew at Strap Number of Twine Strands

Ultimate Number of

Layers

Cables per Stitch

250 kcmil or larger

Every Hanger 2

Note 1 1

4/0 and smaller Every Hanger 2

Note 1

2 Note 2

Notes:

1. Limited by Par. 5.8.6, “Cable Pile-up,” requirements.

2. Cables under a single stitch shall not exceed two square inches.

3. Quantities of single fibers (1 - 12) can be loosely secured together provided they do not exceed 1 square inch per stitch. Fiber optic cables containing between 24 – 72 fibers will be secured at 2 cables per stitch.

5.16 Cable Securing Figures

DOUBLE A LENGTH OF TWINE. EVEN UP ENOS AND PASS LOOP UNDER THE STRAP.

PLACE FREE ENOS THROUGH LOOP.

Figure 5-1 Starting Stitch



5-23

PlACE I'AU ENOS

UNDEASTIW'

COMPLETED STI TCH

TIGHTEN STITCH BY PUWNG TO THE RIGHT & DRAWING LOOP TO TOP FRONT EDGE OF CABLE. REMOVE SLACK & TIGHTEN STITCH WITH A STEADY EVEN PULL.

Figure 5-2 Kansas City Stitch



5-24

,

KEEP STrTCHES STRAIGHT

'-·

WrTH I<NOT 11EADY TO BE PUu.ED TlGHT.

// \

: i

l

'\,9.01 1

Figure 5-3 Sewing First Layer

Figure 5-4 Sewing Second Layer



5-25

1/8" x 1" Steel Bar, Ends Rounded--+-+-- -,. and Deburred. Furnished by Installer.

Simple Stitching For Securing Bar to Cable Rack

Cable--

Note: This figure is an example of one method of preventing cable sag. Thickness of bar is "minimum". Location of bar, type of twine or cord, and type of stitching is discretionary.

trap Iron Support 1/8" X 1"

Figure 5-5 Supporting and Sewing Cables to Supports at Turns



5-26

'

LOCK ON "KANSAS CITY" STITICH

STARTING LOOP PLACED AROUND FORM 7 BRACKET. SIMILAR TO THE STARTING LOOP FOR A REGULAR CHICAGO STITCH

SECT AA

STARTING HAWTHORNE KNOT FOR STITCH ENDING STITCHES.PULL

PASS EACH END COMPLETELY AROUND IN OPPOSITE DIRECTIONS AND END

TIGHT AND CUT OFF ENDS.

SECURING CABLE TO SUPPORT WITH KANSAS CITY STITCH

WITH A SQUARE KNOT SECURING CABLE TO SUPPORT WITH CHICAGO STITCH

Figure 5-6 Securing Cable to Support with Kansas City Stitch

LOCATE SPLICE SO IT WILL NOT INTERFERE WITH THE MAKING OF STITCHES

. ...-NEW TWINE LOOPED

1

PASS ENDS OF OLD TWINE THRU LOOP

OF NEW TWINE

CUT OFF ENDS . \ CLOSE TO KNOT '. 4

&i

Figure 5-7 Splice



5-27

WHEN PASSING TWlNE BETWEEN CABLES LEAVE ENOUGH SLACK ON BOTH SIDES SO AS TO MAKE ITLONG ENOUGH TO GRASP THE TWlNE WHILE TIGHTENING THE STITCH

®

TIE WITH DOUBLE KNOT AND CVT OFF ENOS TO 1/4"

IN EACH CASE PULL OUT SLACK BEFORE STARTING NEXT STITCH

SECOND STITCH

VIEW OF COMPLETED CHICAGO STITCH

STITCH CABLES

Figure 5-8: Chicago Stitch Used to Sew Cables Together


CenturyLink Tech Pub 77350 Issue O, J

5-28

Figure 5-9: Banding of Cables with Twine

CenturyLink Tech Pub 77350 Issue o, July 2016

Chapter 6 Wiring

TOC 6-i


6. Wiring ............................................................................................................................ 6-1

6.1 General Requirements .....................................................................................6-1 6.2 Fanned and Unsewn Forms ............................................................................6-1 6.3 Sewn Forms .......................................................................................................6-2 6.4 Protection ..........................................................................................................6-2 6.5 Cable Tags .........................................................................................................6-2

Chapter 6 Wiring


6-1

6. Wiring

6.1 General Requirements 6.1.1 Equipment installed shall have all wiring run and terminated to the locations specified using the type, color, gauge, and fuse/breaker size specified in the drawings/records and/or manufacturer's specifications and instructions.

6.1.2 Wire shall be neatly dressed and run in such a manner as to avoid congestion, to ensure accessibility, and to maintain clearance between terminals.

6.1.3 All spare and unused wire shall be placed in fiber/protective tubing or secured to the existing form or equipment. The Service Supplier also has the option of cutting/ trimming back spare wiring at the cable butt location. All bare wire ends shall be insulated. This requirement shall also apply to spares within a frame distribution block enclosure.

Note: Under no circumstances shall spared wiring be coiled around in-service wiring.

6.1.4 Where a functional performance test is not performed, a continuity test shall be made on all conductors ran and connected by the Installer, this test shall be made with appropriate test equipment (Manufacturers continuity test card - i.e., streaker). Functional performance and continuity testing shall be recorded on RG47-0157 “Test Record (COE)”; Copy of test records shall be left in Job Packet/EJP.

6.1.5 Wires connected in distribution frame blocks shall be dressed to allow visual inspection of terminal connections.

6.1.6 Wire dress shall be sufficient to provide for only one additional skinner length without splicing the conductor.

6.1.7 Wire shall be both listed and rated for the application. 6.2 Fanned and Unsewn Forms 6.2.1 Fanning rings shall be placed as provided in job specifications prior to wiring operations.

6.2.2 Provide fiber protection at butt locations on transverse arms of distributing frames where fanning rings are not used. When cable wiring fans under the transverse arm, fanning rings are required.

6.2.3 Loose wires not held in place by rings or other similar retaining devices shall be banded at each point of breakout.

Chapter 6 Wiring


6-2

6.3 Sewn Forms 6.3.1 Shall be neatly dressed and secured in a manner that avoids congestion and affords access to the equipment.

6.3.2 All wiring added to existing forms shall be neatly dressed and properly secured. 6.3.3 All ending stitches shall be trimmed of excess twine.

6.3.4 Forms designed for hinged equipment shall be capable of accomplishing movement without twisting or damaging the form.

6.4 Protection All wiring shall be protected from hazardous conditions such as sharp edges, excessive strain, etc. If heat shrink tubing is used, it shall be correctly sized and be clear only. (Note: Alarm leads/wires are exempt from requiring clear heat shrink tubing used for sheathing protection.)

6.5 Cable Tags All temporary installation cable running tags must be removed prior to job completion and turnover. An exception to this standard is permitted when the CO Operations representative requests that the cable running tags remain in place for future use (e.g., CLEC Decommission activity).

Note: Cable tags attached by the manufacturer that contain circuit identification information are not cable running tags and shall not be removed.

Chapter 7 Connecting


6-2

CONTENTS


7. Connecting .......................................................................................................................7-1

7.1 General Requirements .....................................................................................7-1 7.2 Coaxial Connections and Test/Turn-up Parameters ..................................7-1 7.3 Connectable Cables..........................................................................................7-3 7.4 Crimp Compression Connectors, Splices, and Taps ....................................7-3 7.5 Quick Clip/Slotted Beam Connections .........................................................7-5 7.6 Soldered Connections ......................................................................................7-5 7.7 Solderless Wire Wrapped Connections .........................................................7-5 7.8 Solderless Wire Wrapped Exhibits ................................................................7-7 7.9 Fiber Optic Cable Connections ....................................................................7-11

Figures 7-1 Solderless Wrapped Connecting ................................................................................7-7 7-2 Minimum Wraps ...........................................................................................................7-8 7-3 Example of Good and Bad Wire Wrap ......................................................................7-9 7-4 Solder on Terminal .....................................................................................................7-10

CenturyLink Tech Pub 77350 Issue O, July2016


7-1

7. Connecting

Note: AC, power, and grounding connecting requirements are specified in Chapter 9.


7.1.1 All connections made over solder or on terminals with soldered connections shall be soldered.

7.1.2 Connections made with un-tinned wire do not require soldering, simply because they are un-tinned or not plated.

7.1.3 All DC/grounding wire connections terminated under screw heads shall be made with an approved ring connector. “Fork” connectors are allowed for DC power terminations, but only if they are of the flanged “locking” type. Fork connectors are prohibited for use in grounding connections. Stranded wire shall be tinned to the extent of forming a solid conductor-end prior to being inserted into any threaded compression connector.

7.1.4 All single-hole and two-hole terminations for power and bonding/grounding shall require the use of a lock washer, except where double or locking nuts are standard. Use shake proof (star) lock washers under mounting screws and split ring lock washers with bolts and nuts. Lock washers shall not be placed between the connecting terminal and the contact surface.

7.1.5 All terminals, lugs, and connection points shall be free of contamination and previous connecting materials; i.e., corrosion, paint, grease, dirt, etc.

7.1.6 Plated surfaces, such as silver or lead-plated copper, etc., are plated to prevent oxidation and reduce contact resistance and, therefore, shall not be sanded or abraded. If cleaning is required, wipe with a dry cloth.

7.1.7 All types of connections shall be secure (tight) and shall conform to manufacturer’s torque requirements where specified.

7.1.8 Coaxial connectors installed shall be of the type specified in the job or installation instructions, or manufacture’s documented requirements.

7.1.9 All cables/wires shall be connected as identified in CenturyLink StandardConfiguration documents, installation specifications, or manufacturer’s requirements.

7.2 Coaxial Connections and Test/Turn-up Parameters

Correct crimping practices and components shall be used as specified by the manufacturers' of the connector components and crimping tools. All Coax connections shall be made using manufacture’s approved tools and procedures. Field testing of all new coax connections shall be accomplished per manufactures recommendations. For DS3/STS-1 connectors the following process shall be used.



7-2

7.2.1 Coaxial Cable Signal Level Test

Measure a terminated signal level of 0db, +/- 2db. The acceptable range is -2db to +2db. (NE) where the coaxial cable terminates must have a DS3 card installed. If unavailable, a second test set can be used for end-to-end testing over the coaxial cable being accepted.

Note: Testing to a physical loop-back, e.g., a barrel connector, is NOT considered valid for this application.

• Verify that all crimped connectors have been properly installed and tightened per manufacturer specifications.

• The cable length must be within acceptable limits per COLLOE-JA-01-0003, SECTION V – DIAGRAMS AND TABLES OF MAXIMUM CABLE LENGTHS or DSJA03011, DS3 REGENERATION ALL STATES NETWORK DSC, SECTION 3.0 – CABLE LENGTH LIMITS).

• COLLOE-JA-01-0003, SECTION V – DIAGRAMS AND TABLES OF MAXIMUM CABLE LENGTHS or DSJA03011, DS3 REGENERATION ALL STATES NETWORK DSC, SECDTION 3.0 – CABLE LENGTH LIMITS).

• Network element LBO settings are correct based on cable length and makeup. Refer to appropriate manufacturer documentation to verify settings.

Note: If the Service Supplier is measuring the signal level provided by the network element at the DSX3/Equal Level Point, then connect a test cord between the OUT jack of the DSX and the RECEIVE jack of the test set.

• Measure a terminated signal level of 0db, +/- 2db. The acceptable range is -2db to +2db.

• Next, following instructions provided in the appropriate NE documentation, perform a LINE loopback on the DS3 facility.

• Connect a test cord from the IN jack of the DSX3 to the TRANSMT jack of the DS3 test set. Option the test set to send test pattern 2^23-1, MODE = M13. At the DSX3 OUT jack, measure a terminated signal level of 0db, +/- 2db. The acceptable range is -2db to +2db.

Note: If the Service Supplier is using a second test set to generate a signal, option the test set to send test pattern 2^23-1, MODE = M13.

• Connect the test set TRANSMIT jack to the COAX being accepted using a test cord equipped with the appropriate connector type at the NE end of the cable.

• At the DSX3 OUT jack, measure a terminated signal level of 0db, +/- 2db. The acceptable range is -2db to +2db.



7-3

• Insert the signal into the IN DSX3 jack and measure it with the test set on the NE end

of the cable. Place a 45˚ bend ahead of the connectors to verify error-free operation during the acceptance.

• Verify Signal Level is within limits and Pulse Shape test indicates PASS. 7.2.2 T-BERD 310 Test Set Optioning

7.2.2.1 Transmit set up: MODE = M13 PATTERN = 2^23-1

7.2.2.2 Receiver set up:

• Under Results 1, toggle to SIGNAL with right most selector switch.

• Toggle to DBdsx with left most selector switch to view signal level.

• Toggle to Summary with left most selector switch and verify “All Results OK” is indicated. Errors will be displayed if they are present.

7.2.1.2 The results of all tests shall be recorded on RG47-0157. Copy of test records shall be left in the job packet.

7.2.2 A CenturyLink approved or manufacturers' specified crimping tool shall be used.

7.2.3 Center conductors shall be secured in the method specified by the manufacturer for the component being used. The component shall either be soldered or crimped, but not both.

7.2.4 Components shall be crimped once only, multiple crimps shall not be allowed. 7.3 Connectable Cables

Connectors shall be properly mated and secured with an approved method; i.e., clips, screws, tie wraps, hook and loop systems, etc.

7.4 Crimp Compression Connectors, Splices, and Taps

7.4.1 Aluminum connectors/lugs are not authorized for use in CenturyLink locations. Copper/tinned copper connectors/lugs shall be used.

7.4.2 All crimp compression connections shall be made using approved commercial connectors shall be properly made with the correctly sized connector and installed to the manufacturers' requirements pertaining to the wire gauge, type of wire, type of lug, and the crimp compression tool used.



7-4

7.4.3 Wires shall be inserted to the full depth of the lug. For wire larger than 10 AWG (and up to 2 AWG), the wire shall be inserted into the lug to a depth within 1/8 inch of the inspection hole. For wire sizes larger than 2 AWG, the insertion depth shall be within 1/4 inch of the inspection hole.

7.4.4 The space between the wire insulation and the bodies of connectors and lugs shall be kept to a maximum of one eighth of an inch. If necessary, field prepared connections may use transparent (clear) heat shrinkable tubing when insulation is required to protect the connector from shorting and/or the connector barrel extends beyond the edge of a protective cover. The use of any other color of heat shrinkable tubing is strictly prohibited.

7.4.5 All connections shall be accessible for inspection. Power conductor H-taps shall be taped with plastic electrical tape, have covers applied, and the covers secured with 9 cord. Ground connections made with C-taps/H-taps do not require protective covers.

7.4.6 All connections shall be free of sharp edges, fins, or burrs caused by the crimping process.

• Crimps shall not extend onto the tang area.

• Individual crimps may not be re-crimped after initial application.

• Only one wire shall be crimped in a connector barrel.

7.4.7 Compression crimps shall be permitted on solid wire, 16 gauge and smaller, and on solid 2 AWG tinned copper conductors used specifically for internal connections to the ring ground system (Refer also to Par. 11.9). Connectors used on solid 2 AWG shall be specifically intended for use on solid wire.

7.4.8 Parallel H-tap or C-tap connector covers for battery and battery return cables shall be secured with 9 ply cord. Parallel connectors shall not be located on cable rack cross-straps, stringers, vertical runs or any other metallic object, which will cause pressure to be exerted on its protective cover. Parallel connectors shall be located (and staggered) within the space between cable rack cross-straps when run on the lowest cable layer and are permitted on the cable rack per Par. 5.6.

7.4.9 Butt or reducing splices for power connections are required to be insulated with clear manufacturer heat shrink tubing. Butt or reducing splices for grounding connections are not required to be insulated. Note: If the manufacturer heat shrink tubing is not available, two layers of standard clear heat shrink is permitted.



7-5

7.5 Quick Clip/Slotted Beam Connections 7.5.1 Quick clip terminations shall be made with the correct tool, properly inserting the wire into the working portion of the terminal, and shall be secure.

7.5.2 Only one wire of the proper size and type shall be engaged in each terminal slot, wire ends from previous connections shall be removed.

7.5.3 Textile (cloth) insulated wire shall not be terminated in slotted beam terminals.

7.5.4 Conductors shall not be placed on deformed terminals.

7.5.5 Previously terminated wire ends shall not be re-terminated; use new wire ends.

7.5.6 Wire ends shall clear metallic parts by one thirty-second of an inch, minimum.

7.5.7 Wire ends shall protrude one sixteenth of an inch beyond the edge of a clipped terminal.

7.6 Soldered Connections

7.6.1 Connections shall be soldered so as to provide a secure metallic connection between the parts. Solder used shall be 60/40 rosin-core solder.

7.6.2 A minimum of one and one quarter turns shall be made on all soldered, wrapped connections.

7.6.3 Pig tail components shall be soldered, unless the component is specified by the manufacturer for wire wrap installation, or is modified to add leads suitable for wire wrap connection. Wire wrapped components shall have a minimum of five conforming turns. See 7.8, “Solderless / Wire Wrapped Exhibits.”

7.6.4 Solder shall flow and encompass the entire exposed length of the terminal connections.

7.6.5 Sufficient heat shall be applied to connections to prevent cold solder joints. The installer shall consider heat sinks if adjacent components or connections could be damaged by excessive heat.

Solder connections may only be made where approved. Terminals that are not tinned or capable of being tinned, shall not be soldered.

7.6.7 Minimum Clearances for Soldered Connections A minimum clearance of 1/32 of an inch shall be maintained between adjacent soldered connections or soldered connections and metal work.

7.7 Solderless Wire Wrapped Connections

“Solderless/Wire Wrapped Exhibits,” are established standards, and compliance to these standards are recommended. Exemptions listed in Section 7.8, “Solderless/Wire Wrapped Connections,” are intended to be for 20-26 gauge wires only.

7.7.1 Solderless wire-wrapped connections shall be secure and shall conform to the consecutive turns/wraps requirements shown in Figure 7-2 “Minimum Wraps.”



7-6

7.7.2 All connections not meeting the minimum requirement shall be re-terminated using the solderless wrapped technique. This may require:

• Complete re-skinning of the existing lead.

• Running a new lead.

Soldering only when the above conditions cannot be met and are not specifically prohibited by other requirements.

7.7.3 Clearances for Solderless Wrapped Connections Examples of deficiencies: Overlaps, excessive separations, excessive shiner (+1/8 inch), excessive tail (+1/8 inch), or lead that has been previously terminated. Solderless Wrapped Connections shall be located at the base of the terminal or adjacent to previous connection(s).

7.7.4 A minimum clearance of 1/32 of an inch shall be maintained between adjacent connections or connections and metal work.

7.7.5 Separations between adjacent wraps shall not exceed .005 of an inch for 20, 22, 24, and 26 gauge wire; .003 of an inch for 28 and 30 gauge wire.

7.7.6 Wire end projections shall not jeopardize minimum clearances and shall be less than 1/8 inch in length.

7.7.7 Insulation shall be within one eighth of an inch of terminal. Exception: 28 and 30 gauge wire shall have one full wrap of insulation before wire wrapping begins. This requires the use of a bit designed to provide a “modified” wrap. The turn of insulated wire shall not count as 1 of the 7 minimum consecutive conforming turns. Use of a “modified” bit by the installation Service Supplier for wire wrapping in any application other than that listed above (e.g., distributing frame blocks, equipment shelf backplanes, etc.) is prohibited.



7-7

7.8 Solderless Wire Wrapped Exhibits

.045 SQUARE

Figure 7-1 Solderless Wrapped Connecting



7-8

GAUGE MINIMUM WRAPS 19, 20 &

22 5

24 6 26 7 on flat punched or square

wire drawn terminals (8 on all others)

28 & 30 7 plus ¾ wrap of insulation

1 2 3 4 5 6 7

Insulated Wire 8

Reference Corner for Bare Wire Turns 7th Turn May End Here Bare Wire

Minimal Acceptable Condition

.015

(Min.)

Reference Corner for Bare Wire Turns

Reference Corner for Insulated Wire Turns

20 or 30 Gauge Connection

Figure 7-2 Minimum Wraps



7-9

BAD GOOD SEPARATION

1 2 3 1 2 3 4

24 GA 1 2 3 4 5 6

COUNT BROKEN BY EXCESSIVE SEPARATION

REQUIRED COUNT MET

3 OVERLAP

1 2 1 2 3 24 GA

1 2 3 4 5 6

COUNT BROKEN BY OVERLAP

REQUIRED COUNT MET

BULGE

1 2 3 1 2 3 24 GA

1 2 3 4 5 6

COUNT BROKEN BY SECOND BULGE

ONE BULGE WITHIN COUNT; REQUIRED COUNT MET

BULGE

1 2 3 4 5 24 GA

1 2 3 4 5 6

COUNT BROKEN BY SECOND BULGE

ONE BULGE WITHIN COUNT; REQUIRED COUNT MET

Figure 7-3 Example of Good and Bad Wire Wrap



7-10

BAD GOOD SOLDER ON TERMINAL

24 GA

SOLDER ON TERMINAL OR ANY CONNECTION; SOLDER AT CONNECTIONS (REQUIREMENT NOT MET)

REQUIREMENT MET; MINIMUM OF TWO ADJACENT WRAPS SOLDERED.

PARTIALLY TINNED

1 2 1 2 3 24 GA

TWO WRAPS WITH NO EXPOSED COPPER; REQUIREMENT NOT MET

THREE WRAPS WITH NO EXPOSED COPPER; REQUIREMENT MET

SHINER

1 2 3 4 5 24 GA

EXCESSIVE SHINER CAUSING

SHORT WRAPS AND POSSIBILITY OF A CROSS. CANNOT BE

CORRECTED BY SOLDERING

REMOVE AND REWRAP. SOLDER IF SLACK DOES NOT

PERMIT IT. 3 WRAPS DESIRABLE; 1-1/4 WRAPS MIN.

WIRE END PROJECTS

1 2 3 4 5 24 GA

1 2 3 4 5 6

EXCESSIVE END CAUSING SHORT WRAP MUST BE SLDERED AFTER WRAPPING DOWN

EXCESSIVE END CAN BE WRAPPED DOWN WITHOUT SOLDERING (IF GOOD WRAPS ARE NOT MOVED OR DISPLACED.

Figure 7-4 Solder on Terminal



7-11

7.9 Fiber Optic Cable Connections

7.9.1 Fiber Optic Cable / Fiber Optic Jumper Testing Procedure

In order to minimize the possibility of incorrect fiber optic cable / jumper termination, the Service Supplier will perform, at a minimum, a basic continuity test on installed fiber optic cables & jumpers with an Optical Loss Meter. This device is also referred to as a “light meter.” The results of this test will be documented on RG 47-0157.t

Note: Fiber optic cables within a stored program control system (e.g., electronic switching) that are tested by manufacturer’s requirements, are exempt from this procedure.


Chapter 8 Equipment Designation

TOC 8-i


8. Equipment Designations .......................................................................................8-1

8.1 General Requirements ...............................................................................8-2 8.2 Color of Characters for Stamping and Labels ........................................8-3 8.3 Designation Conventions ..........................................................................8-3 8.4 Connectors and Connectorized Cables ...................................................8-4 8.5 Distributing and Protector Frames ......................................................... 8-5 8.6 Drawings and Assignment Records ........................................................8-6 8.7 AC Circuits ..................................................................................................8-6 8.8 Batteries and Battery Stands .................................................................... 8-6 8.9 DC Breakers, Fuses, Switches, and Shunts .............................................8-7 8.10 DC Distribution Elements .........................................................................8-9 8.11 Conductors, Leads, Bonding/Grounding Points .................................. 8-9 8.12 Mechanical Equipment and Rooms .......................................................8-11 8.13 High Temperature Surfaces ....................................................................8-11 8.14 High Voltage Surfaces .............................................................................8-11 8.15 Rectifiers, Converters, Inverters, Power Supplies ...............................8-11 8.16 Bus bars and Ground Bars ..................................................................... 8-11 8.17 Rolling Ladders ........................................................................................8-12 8.18 Cable Rack Systems .................................................................................8-12 8.19 Marking Records / Drawings ................................................................8-13 8.20 Miscellaneous stenciling ........................................................................ 8-13 8.21 Distributing Frame Exhibits .................................................................. 8-16 8.22 Bay Equipment Labels .............................................................................8-17 8.23 Temporary Removal and Installation Tag ............................................8-19 8.24 Labels .........................................................................................................8-19 8.25 Collocation Decommission Cable Tag ...................................................8-21 8.26 Fire Code Power Room Door Placard ...................................................8-25 8.27 Alarm / OSS Testing Incompletion Tag ................................................8-26 8.28 Lock out/Tag out Tag .............................................................................8-27 8.29 Equipment “Removal from Service” Tag............................................. 8-28 8.30 Building Columns ....................................................................................8-29 8.31 Equipment “Hot Surface” Tag ...............................................................8-30 8.32 NFPA “Very Early Warning Fire Detection Alarm System” ............ 8-30 8.33 CenturyLink Pair Gain Site “WARNING” Tag ...................................8-31



8-1

8. Equipment Designations


8.1.1 All designations shall be accurate, permanent, legible, visible, aligned, secure, the proper color, at the prescribed location, complete, and conform to the existing equipment standard configuration or existing office designation pattern. All far end labeling that is associated with a bay shall contain the correct bay numbering as it appears on that associated bay (and/or relay rack). To ensure the permanency of designations, the Service Supplier is encouraged to apply a clear sealant so that corners and edges do not become raised and peel.

8.1.2 The CenturyLink Bay Equipment (RG 47-0130, -0131) Label in Paragraph 8.21 shall be used for the purpose of identifying Job number, power, alarms, timing, DSX, etc., including circuit numbering where necessary on all units of equipment. This includes equipment in the transport, power (e.g., BDFB / PBD alarm information) and miscellaneous (MIS, MISC, M, etc.) switch frame environments.

8.1.3 Network element equipment, mounted in a frame, bay, or cabinet, shall be designated with either the entire label left intact, or a portion thereof, as appropriate. If the frame, bay, or cabinet is fully equipped with like equipment (subscriber / digital carrier, D-4, etc.), then a single label for the entire bay may be used.

8.1.4 Labels shall be located on the part of the frame, bay, or cabinet that is not normally removable by maintenance personnel and which shall remain fully visible. The intent of the Bay Label is to identify the far end location and termination point of cables.

Note: This label does not apply to cables that do not leave the bay. As existing equipment is augmented and/or reconfigured, the Service Supplier will update the stenciling on the RG 47-0130, -0131 to reflect the most current information as required.

8.1.5 Stamping or approved labeling is required on painted or plated surfaces. The use of labeling machines is acceptable with black lettering on white background being the preferred method. Black lettering on a clear background is also permissible provided that the designation is legible.

8.1.6 Designation tags, cable sheaths, connectors and approved designating labels may be designated by printing, using a fine point, permanent, black ink marker.



8-2

8.1.7 Equipment removed or installed on a temporary basis, shall be marked with a “Temporary Removal and Installation Tag.” Temporary removal or installation is defined as equipment that will be replaced within 180 days of removal or installation. “Temporary Removal and Installation Tag” will need to reference the CenturyLink Design Engineer and phone number, job number (that has authorized the installation, removal or transfer of equipment), date removed, replacement date, service supplier (doing the work), and service supplier contact. This type of job shall comply with all CenturyLink technical standards (Job Packet, MOP, etc.).

8.1.8 For cabling that needs to be properly spared and the associated fuses removed, equipment designations do not have to be removed. All network elements locations associated with installed or removed equipment will be labeled with the Temporary Removal and Installation Tag. Recommended color is red background and black lettering. See 8.23, “Temporary Removal and Installation Tag.”

8.2 Color of Characters for Stamping and Labels

Use black ink on light surfaces and use white ink on dark surfaces. Vermilion (red) is to be used on caution notices. In NNS facility locations, circuit labeling that indicates a “priority” status will be indicated via black ink on a yellow surface.

8.3 Designation Conventions

8.3.1 Designate all frames, bays, shelves and cabinets, with frame type (BDFB, RR, etc.) and number on the front and rear. The procedure for numbering shelves within a bay, relay rack or equipment frame shall be consistent for all network elements utilized within CenturyLink (with the exception of Power). Refer also to TP 77351, Par 2.5.10.

• The recommended locations are: first choice - frame base, second choice -mid- frame to eye level left frame upright, or as the existing office convention dictates.

• The designations shall be readily visible.

8.3.2 Designate each shelf, unit, or position on front and rear or as instructed in the detailed installation specification and drawings/records. When a shelf/unit of equipment is designated by “Equipment Location” EQL such as plate number the lowest occupied plate number for the shelf/unit shall be referenced. General rule for designating units: they must have an electrical connection (power, fiber, ring or tone, synchronization timing, alarm, etc.). Cooling fans shall be identified and shown as such at the equipment and the fuse record sheet (FAN 01, FAN 02, etc.). Frame filler plates, and cableways should not be given a shelf number. Where stipulated by the Design Engineer, the supplier shall include the labeling of all relevant references to Common Language Location Identifier (CLLI) codes to ensure that the equipment being installed/removed is correct.



8-3

8.3.3 The recommended convention for numbering of shelves, units, and positions in the same frame is: lowest to highest, bottom to top, left to right as viewed from the front or as the existing office convention dictates.

8.3.4 The following number standard is required for the interface into other systems requiring a specific numbering convention (i.e., TIRKS). Shelf/panel/plate numbers shall consist of a two-digit, unique number, starting with SH-01 unless stipulated by CenturyLink PEG.

8.3.4.1 The designation “PNL” is only acceptable when the PEG configuration specifies it or the existing designation scheme for that bay is already established. Fuse panels shall be identified with a consecutive numbering scheme (SH-99, SH-98, etc.) with the highest numbered panel located in the uppermost relay rack position. Heat baffles, writing shelves, filler plates, cableways are not considered network elements, and shall not be designated.

8.3.4.2 Switch environments such as: 5ESS, DMS, AXE, ATM, etc., shall label all miscellaneous equipment shelves/units that are not documented in office drawings to show all far end termination locations (Distribution frame, Power, Timing, DSX, etc.). This shall be accomplished with designation tags, or a shelf label (or a portion thereof). Refer also to Par. 8.22 “Bay Equipment Labels”.

8.3.5 All circuit numbers associated with shelves, units, blocks, terminal strips, or panels shall be provided when indicated in the specifications or where they are part of the manufacturer’s or PEG standard design. DSX panels and distributing frame blocks shall be designated with relay rack location, shelf number, circuit description and circuit numbers.

8.3.6 Designate all equipment line-ups on aisle signs, end guards, columns, or equipment uprights on both ends of the aisle to indicate added frames, bays, and cabinets. Designations shall consist of frame type and number (RR, BDFB, MT, MIS, M, etc.). From the end guard you are designating the order in which the frames shall appear is; i.e., top - closest, bottom – farthest away. These designations shall be stamped or labeled.

8.3.7 Remove all designations or entries for removed equipment and circuits; i.e., fuse/breaker panels, distributing frames, power bays, equipment frames, cable racks, etc.

8.3.8 All far end identification shall at a minimum identify relay rack, shelf and circuit number.

8.4 Connectors, Connectable Cables, and Fiber Optic Cable (Singles, Duals, and Quads)

8.4.1 All connectable cables terminated at equipment shelves (that can be removed and improperly reconnected) shall be identified with a connector, circuit identification, or jack/port number.



8-4

Note 1: The preferred method of designation is an assigned and/or record label placed in the direct proximity of the point of termination and representative of the available connector and jack/port positions. Where connectable cables are formed and individually stitched to prevent reconnecting errors, connector numbering is optional. A label or fine point, permanent, black ink marker may be used to accomplish these designations on either the cable or the connector.

Note 2: For fiber optic cabling (singles, duals, and quads) that are embedded within the LPEC Eastern Rural Utility Service (RUS) Regions, (e.g., Pair Gain sites considered “ISP network elements”), direct cable labeling is permitted, but not preferred. When affixing adhesive labeling to these cable types, the Service Supplier is expected to minimize the handling of these cables to the extent that any potential damage is negligible.

Note 3: Circuit ID designation tags and physical labels should be placed a proper distance from the connector so as to not interfere with, or congest, the connector/receiver actions.

8.4.2 Alarm interface cables (e.g., X.25 and CO LAN) shall be identified at the alarm interface bay with a small fiber tag designated on both sides. One side will designate the far end location (equipment type, RR and shelf number). The tags reverse side will designate the near end location (including the Slot or Link number associated with the alarm interface.

Note: In no circumstances shall any designation tag be placed at the rear of the Dantel alarm unit. Refer also to Par. 2.7.1.1.

8.4.3 For timing/synchronization lead information, the installer will NOT attach a fiber tag at the rear of the central office timing source.

Note: This designation information is accomplished via Paragraph 8.22 and the designation label provided with the central office timing source.

8.4.3.1 Fiber Management Tray (FMT)/Fiber Distribution Panel (FDP) detachable assignment records shall be designated with frame, bay, or cabinet number and shelf number or mounting location. 8.5 Distributing and Protector Frames

Designate distributing frames with vertical numbers and shelf letters on first, last and every fifth vertical on both horizontal and vertical frames. The frames shall be designated on the block mounting bar of unequipped positions or on the terminal block/cover for equipped frames. See 8.21, “Distributing Frame Exhibits.”

8.5.1 Designate all connecting blocks and covers on distributing frames as required (Frame, Bay or Cabinet, Equipment Type, Shelf/Plate/Bank, Functional and Numeric).

8.5.2 Designate all new distribution frames with the proper frame name designation on all exposed sides of the frame.



8-5

8.5.3 Designate ground side of twist plug and trolley run.

8.5.4 Designate or label “Disconnect Alternating Current Before Opening” on trolley coupling or end cap.

8.5.5 Attach a warning sign to ladder after addition of appliance outlet.

8.5.6 Modular frames shall be designated front and rear with module number, shelf number, and individual block numbers. Frames that are not accessible from the rear do not require rear designations.

8.5.7 Designation boards at the top of the vertical side of the distribution frame shall be designated to show the equipment and/or cable circuit count.

8.6 Drawings and Assignment Records

Mark all assignment changes on drawings/records as applicable. Removable record/card sheets shall be designated with the bay location and shelf number.

8.7 AC Circuits

8.7.1 Designate all AC outlets and light switches with panel source and fuse/breaker number.

8.7.2 Designate all power service cabinets and power distribution panels with name, number, source and Voltage/Phase arrangement. Fuse/breaker assignments shall be identified on the panel designation card or next to the fuse/breaker.

8.7.3 Rectifiers powered by 480V, 3 phase AC power shall be designated on the access panel or door in red lettering “Warning Hazardous Voltage 480 Volts.” Note: This requirement is inapplicable to “plug & play” rectifiers since the interior is inaccessible to field service personnel while the unit is in service.

8.7.4 Designate all AC circuits connected at utility outlets, inverters, rectifiers, and power strips. These circuits shall be designated at the source (panel) and at the equipment.

8.7.5 Receptacles

Higher voltage receptacles (those greater than nominal single-phase 120 VAC) shall have the receptacle cover plate marked with the appropriate voltage (e.g., 208V AC, 240VAC, 277V AC). Stamp or label with three sixteenths of an inch or equivalent font characters in vermilion (red) ink.

8.7.6 Electrostatic Discharge (ESD) All framework connectors for ESD wrist straps shall be designated with the term “ESD” or shall be designated with the universal symbol for ESD.



8-6

8.8 Batteries and Battery Stands

8.8.1 Designate battery stands with string name (e.g., “A” – skipping “I” and “O” and designations per cell), nominal voltage, and associated CenturyLink Job number. Cell numbers shall be designated on the battery stand directly beneath the corresponding cell or on each cell (if the battery stand guardrails provide insufficient space or as documented by CenturyLink PEG documents). For monobloc (multiple cell) batteries in opaque cases, e.g., 12V VRLA batteries, cells should be designated with “1” at the grounded end which is usually, but now always, positive.

8.8.2 Designate the battery string install date at cell #1, the letters "TR" at the Temperature Reference/Pilot cell (flooded strings only) and individual cell replacement date(s) at the specific cell(s) (where applicable). These designations shall be on the cell itself.

8.8.3 Reused battery strings shall be designated per 8.8.1 and 8.8.2. In addition the words "reused string" and the original install date shall be designated on or below Cell #1.

8.8.4 Battery strings shall also be labeled per 8.24.1 and 8.24.2 of this document.

8.8.5 Any labeling provided or required by the manufacturer shall be done in accordance with their instructions.

8.8.6 Engine Start Batteries Batteries or stand shall be designated with installation date, voltage and string name as close as possible to the positive connection. Individual cells or blocks of cells shall be numbered from lowest to highest beginning at the positive connection.

8.8.7 UPS Battery Stands

Battery stands associated with battery back-up of UPS systems shall be clearly designated in vermilion: “WARNING HAZARDOUS VOLTAGE.”

8.8.8 Valve Regulated Lead Acid (VRLA) or other type batteries used in bulk power plant applications and placed on stands, racks or shelves shall have each string designated where it can be readily seen from the work space or aisle. Up or down arrows will be used as needed if confusion could occur given the smaller nature of these stands and racks. In addition, the nominal voltage shall be designated at least once on the stand, rack, half-rack or frame where it can be readily seen from the work space or aisle.

8.8.9 VRLA batteries used in any application shall have the install date placed on each block of cells.

8.9 DC Breakers, Fuses, Switches, and Shunts

Designate all fuse/breaker panels with row designations (letters and/or numbers).



8-7

Designate each fuse/breaker with Network Element location. If the unit is in the same frame a shelf number is sufficient. If the unit is external from the frame in which it is fused then the Frame/Bay/Cabinet and shelf number is required.

8.9.1 Designate fuse/breaker position number front and rear or on the point of cable termination.

8.9.1.1 GMT and 70 type fuse positions shall be designated by first, every 5th and last position.

8.9.1.2 Designate the amperage on the front of all fuse/breaker panel or install a fuse designation pin, disc, or paint / adhesive dot. Where this is not possible, the fuse record sheet or book assigned to the panel shall be designated.

8.9.1.3 Circuit breakers and switches shall be designated to show the "ON - OFF" “positions.

8.9.1.4 All designation pins for fuses that are not assigned, shall be removed or assigned “DNA” on the fuse assignment record. Exception: Where fuse designation pins are factory installed for guard fuse positions (BDFB, etc.) or where the manufacturer specifies specific fuse values for each individual position (ringing plants). This exception does not remove the requirement for accurate fuse assignment records.

8.9.2 Designate all fuse record book covers with associated bay location.

8.9.3 Fuse panel detachable assignment records (sheets) shall be designated with frame, bay, or cabinet number and shelf number or mounting location.

8.9.4 List all new, or added or changed (blue or black ink or approved label) and delete all removed circuits on the fuse/breaker panel, designation strip, fuse assignment card or fuse record book sheets. Update all fuse/breaker additions, changes, or removals on the office record sheets, books, or drawing(s)/record(s) with changes, additions or removals.

8.9.5 Excessive hand written changes or layers of designating tape are not acceptable and require replacement of the fuse record sheet (blue or black ink). More than 10 changes on a sheet are considered excessive.

8.9.6 Correction fluid (white out) is not permissible for changes. Correction tape is permissible.

8.9.7 Shunts shall have their amperage value and MV rating designated and visible.

8.9.8 All DC light switches will have their far end location and electrical potential labeled on the switch plate. (e.g., PBD 101.04, PNL-D, fuse 6, -48V DC). This requirement also applies to light fixtures powered from the DC plant (and/or from an inverter fed from the DC power plant as well).



8-8

8.10 DC Distribution Elements

8.10.1 All forms of DC distribution shall be clearly designated both front and rear as to frame, panel, row, plate, fuse / breaker position, voltage, and load so as to coincide with equipment and assignment drawings/records. BDFB fuse / breaker positions shall be numbered from the top down, with consecutive numbering for each LOAD. Fuse/breaker position numbers shall be considered adequate on the rear or the point of termination of each position and do not require tags where each fuse position number is designated on the rear or the point of termination. Power distribution cabinets used exclusively in switching environments may use a designation scheme of first, every fifth, and last or as required by the manufacturer.

8.10.2 Designate fuse/breaker panels with voltage designations front and rear.

8.10.3 Designate all locations associating alarm fuse with discharge fuse. 8.10.4 Designate fuse / breakers with far end frame number, equipment type, shelf number and fuse amperage rating. Example (RR 102.35 FS / SH-99, 30 AMPS).

8.10.5 Fuse panels assignment designations shall show a minimum of Frame / Bay / Cabinet, shelf / plate number and amperage for all assignments external to the frame where the fuse panel resides. Fuse panel assignment designations located in the same frame as the fuse panel, shall show shelf/plate number and amperage as a minimum. All fuse panels assignments shall be designated using an approved labeling system (i.e. Designation card or label, fuse assignment book, direct labeling).

8.11 Conductors, Leads, Bonding/Grounding Points

8.11.1 Identification tags shall be affixed to each end of all equipment bonding, battery, battery return and grounding cables. Both sides of a tag may be used for designations. Designation tags shall be attached to the cable using 9 ply cord. If the fiber tag is equipped with a small metallic ring, this ring shall be removed and discarded. The fiber tag will be attached using only 9 ply cord.

8.11.1.1 The information on the identification tags shall contain the near and far end termination information for the cable. In those cases where multiple conductors are terminated at the same location (e.g., charge/discharge bars), those conductors will be designated with an individual cable number (e.g., Cable 1, Cable 2, Cable 3, etc.). Battery and battery return leads shall be identified as to their source frame plate/shelf, and fuse/breaker position and amperage ratings.

8.11.1.2 Short lengths of cable which originate and terminate within the same bay or are entirely visible (both points of origination and termination from one location), and shall remain so for their entire expected life, are exempt from this rule and are not required to be designated.

8.11.1.3 Bonding and grounding cables size 6 AWG and larger may either consist



8-9

of green insulation composition or be run as bare wire. Note: for ACEG conductors run in electrical conduits, black-insulated conductors are acceptable as long as they are marked with a green indicator (typically green electrical tape) at all splice, junction and appearance points.

8.11.2 Place “Do Not Disconnect” tags on all removable grounding electrodes and all terminating locations of main ground reference conductors.

8.11.4 Battery return leads connected to bus bars within the BDFB/PBD shall have BDFB/BPBD fuse position and equipment far end location designated.

8.11.5 Battery return leads connected to bus bars located externally from the BDFB /PBD shall have BDFB/ PBD near end fuse position and equipment far end location designated (BDFB/PBD 0101.02 FS POS 22 LD-A ---- RR 0102.04 SH-99 LD-A).

8.11.6 Power distribution frames that are dedicated and within a switching environment, do not require designation tags, provided the fuse/breaker positions are properly designated front and rear.

8.11.7 Circuits fused from another frame fuse panel require a designation tag at the equipment/circuit end. The designation tag shall include the frame number, mounting location and fuse position.

8.11.8 Designate deliberate bond points made through surface contact (e.g., connector with lead attached), for Foreign Object Grounding (FOG) paths with “GRD” in 3/8 inch or 36 point font. Designations shall be placed so that they are visible from the floor. Incidental bond points between fittings that have a resistance of 0.1 Ohms or less do not need deliberate bonding cables or designations.



8-10

8.12 Mechanical Equipment and Rooms

All mechanical equipment and machines, such as engine-alternators, which contain moving parts and are capable of being activated automatically or remotely shall be designated with a warning label or placard.

8.12.1 The warning label shall be permanently attached in a conspicuous location and contain the information “Danger Auto Start.” Labels shall be placed at room entrance(s) and on the unit.

8.13 High Temperature Surfaces

8.13.1 Exposed surfaces with temperatures that can exceed 115˚ F shall be marked with warning labels.

8.13.2 Surfaces with temperatures that can exceed 130˚ F shall be guarded as well as marked with warning labels. Refer to Par. 8.31.

8.14 High Voltage Surfaces

8.14.1 Exposed surfaces with voltages greater than nominal 130 VDC shall be marked with CAUTION labels. Refer to Par. 8.24.5.

8.15 Rectifiers, Converters, Inverters, Power Supplies

8.15.1 Each shall be designated with a number.

8.15.2 Each shall be designated with the input voltage and fuse / breaker location in addition to any nameplate data placed by the manufacturer. 8.15.3 Each shall be designated with the nominal output wattage and nominal output current in addition to any nameplate data. Note: To determine the nominal output current, divide the rated wattage by the output voltage.

8.16 Bus bars and Grounding Bars

8.16.1 All bus and grounding bars shall be designated as to their potential and group designation in an area on or adjacent to the bar. Examples include Central Office Ground Bus (COGB), -48 V Bus, Load A/B, Office Principle Ground Point Bus (OPGPB), +130 V, RTN, CHG / DISCHG Bus, etc.]. Refer to TP 77385 for examples of the proper designation requirements. For NNS facilities, refer to TP 77355 for PANI ground bus arrangements.

Note: No designations for ”+48V” will be considered valid since, in effect, this would imply that a “96 volt” system exists. Historically systems of that type were reserved for ringing circuits that are now obsolete. The proper designation for a return bus on a nominal -48VDC plant would be “RTN”.

8.16.2 All MGB bars which are a part of the ground window shall be designated “GROUND WINDOW” once, adjacent to the bars and visible from the floor. The individual bars shall be designated for “ISOLATED” and “INTEGRATED” areas.



8-11

8.16.3 Remote battery return bars associated with power frames and BDFBs shall be designated with the potential and associated frame(s). Refer to CenturyLink TP 77385 Section 9.7 for further information.

8.17 Rolling Ladders

8.17.1 Designate the ground side of twist plugs and trolley run.

8.17.2 Designate or label “Disconnect Alternating Current Before Opening” on trolley couplings and end caps.

8.17.3 Attach a warning sign to the ladder under the step after the addition of an appliance outlet.

8.18 Cable Rack Systems

8.18.1 Switchboard and Power cable racks that have reached their allowable cable pile-up limit (See 5.8 “Cable Pile-up”), shall be designated “Embargoed” in the area(s) of violation. These designations shall be located on the outside edge of both cable rack stringers, and at an interval not to exceed 10 feet. Restricted cable racks should be banded with 4 strands of twine every 5 feet to ensure that additional cabling isn’t added. Routing cables on these restricted cable racks is prohibited.

Note: When embargoed cable racks are encountered, the Service Supplier will mark the associated office cable plan drawing to indicate the location(s) of any embargoed cable rack sections by using a “cross-hatch” designation over the cable rack location on the COE-FM drawing (e.g., ////////).

8.18.2 Fiber optic cable rack shall be labeled “FIBER OPTIC CABLES ONLY” at five foot intervals on both sides. This requirement applies specifically to existing gray ladder-type cable rack (no Kydex® panning; no cable rack horns or brackets) used in prior fiber optic cable distribution systems. Designations shall be placed so that they are visible from the floor for the entire length of the cable rack.

Note: Orange fiber optic cable racks and FiberGuide (troughs) do not require this stenciling. These orange fiber cable racks require approved Kydex® panning and cable brackets.

8.18.3 Power cable rack with protected cables (fused or breakered) shall be labeled "FUSED POWER CABLES ONLY" in central office locations at five foot intervals on both sides. Designations shall be placed so that they are visible from the floor for the entire length of the cable rack.

8.18.4 Power cable racks with cables that are not protected (either by fuse or breaker) in central office locations, shall be labeled "UNPROTECTED POWER CABLES ONLY" at five foot intervals on both sides. Designations shall be placed so that they are visible from the floor for the entire length of the cable rack.



8-12

8.19 Marking Records / Drawings

The following three color schemes shall be adhered to when updating design engineering records and drawings that are paper-generated via the NDS. All designation shall be legible. Use of approved abbreviations, and symbols is required. Mark all assignment changes on both copies of the drawing /records with the CenturyLink Design Engineer approved changes as applicable.

8.19.1 Red - Mark in red all equipment additions, relocations, assignment changes, and record title box changes representing equipment being added, reconfigured, modified, or reassigned. When the number of frames, plug-in components, units, etc., have been changed, also show the new quantities in red.

8.19.2 Yellow - Show in yellow all equipment being removed from a CenturyLink facility. Whenever frame numbers, quantities, assignments, etc., change, the old numbers, locations, or assignments are to be highlighted in yellow.

8.19.3 Green - Mark in green all “record only” changes. Central Office Equipment records which do not reflect equipment being added or remove, but which represent new information concerning existing COE configurations are record only changes and are marked in green.

8.19.4 One copy of the Marked Drawing /Record shall be returned to the CenturyLink Design Engineer and one copy shall be included in the job packet.

8.20 Miscellaneous stenciling and Font Size Tables

8.20.1. All designations shall be located on parts that will not be removed during normal maintenance. 8.20.2. Fuse/Breaker designations on the rear shall consist of a position number or similar scheme to help personnel locate the fuse/breaker from the rear. 8.20.3. Sizes may be adjusted to fit required information on a limited area of space. All designations shall be legible. 8.20.4. Circuit blocks shall be designated at a minimum of every other row. Punching designations shall be designated once at circuit #1's location and at any change in circuit type. Circuit designations shall be aligned with the terminal they designate. Terminal designations shall be 1/8 inch or 12 points maximum and may be adjusted down in size to allow for additional information. All designations shall be legible.



8-13

8.20.5 When equipment is retired in place pending reuse and/or removal, a designation label will be applied to the equipment indicating “DO NOT USE THIS EQUIPMENT” per Job No._____________ and “DATE TAG PLACED:”. Where power is removed from retired equipment, the installer shall place a “lock-out”/”tag-out” device at the source end (refer also to Par. 8.22.1, 8.28, 8.29, 9.1.12 and 9.7.1.1).

Sizes and Placement of Characters

Equipment Type Size Font Front (Top) Rear (Bottom)

Frame, Bay, or Cabinet Base, End Guard/Shield, Main Bus and Ground Bars

5/8, ¾, or 1 inch

60, 72 or 96

X X

Frame, Bay, or Cabinet Upright / Cable Duct, Virtual CLEC Frame Designation

3/8, 5/8, or ¾ inch

36, 60 or 72

X X

Mounting Plates / Shelf / Panel / Unit

3/8 inch 36 X X

Electronic Components / Connectors / Jack / Plug

1/8 or 3/16 inch

12 or 18

Fuse / Breaker Panels and Individually-Mounted Fuse / Breaker Blocks

3/16 inch 18 X Note 3

Modular Fuse Blocks, Individual Fuse / Breaker on a Panel

1/8 inch 12 X Note 3

Fuse Record Book Covers, Detachable Fuse Assignment Record Sheets

3/8 inch 36 X

Rectifiers, Converters, Inverters, etc. Group, Load, and Voltage

3/8, 5/8, ¾ inch

36, 60 or 72

X

Frame Blocks and Covers Group / Frame / Equipment Unit / Bank / Shelf / Etc. Block Layout

3/8 inch

3/8 inch

3/16 inch

1/8 inch

36

36

18

12

X

X

Note 6



8-14

Notes: 1. Manufacturer’s design or recommendations for their equipment shall take precedence over these recommendations. 2. Conversion table for “Inch” and “Font”:

Inch Font Inch Font

1/16 6 3/8 36

1/8 12 ½ 48

3/16 18 5/8 60

1/4 24 ¾ 72

5/16 30 1 96

3. Circuit blocks shall be designated at a minimum of every other row. Punching designations shall be designated once at circuit # 1’s location and at any change in circuit type. Circuit designations shall be aligned with the terminal they designate. Terminal designations shall be 1/8 inch or 12 points maximum and may be adjusted down in size to allow for additional information. All designations shall be legible.

8.20.6 When CLEC Collocation equipment is deactivated from the CenturyLink network via CLEC Hold, Decommissioning, or Abandonment, the Service Supplier will re-designate or remove the designations from the CenturyLink facilities (e.g., DSX-1, DSX-3, power, alarm, timing, distributing frame, etc.) using an approved labeling machine equipped with black lettering on white or clear background adhesive backing. Refer also to Par. 8.24, 14.17 and 16.6.2.



8-15

8.21 Distributing Frame Exhibits

P P1--:---:---:---P5--:---:---:---:---P10--:---:---:---:---P15-P16 N N1--:---:---:---N5--:---:---:---:---N10--:---:---:---:---N15-N16 M M1--:---:---:---M5--:---:---:---:---M10--:---:---:---:---M15-M16 L L1--:---:---:---L5--:---:---:---:---L10--:---:---:---:---L15-L16 K K1--:---:---:---K5--:---:---:---:---K10--:---:---:---:---K15-K16 J J1--:---:---:---J5--:---:---:---:---J10--:---:---:---:---J15-J16 H H1--:---:---:---H5--:---:---:---:---H10--:---:---:---:---H15-H16 G G1--:---:---:---G5--:---:---:---:---G10--:---:---:---:---G15-G16 F F1--:---:---:---F5--:---:---:---:---F10--:---:---:---:---F15-F16 E E1--:---:---:---E5--:---:---:---:---E10--:---:---:---:---E15-E16 D D1--:---:---:---D5--:---:---:---:---D10--:---:---:---:---D15-D16 C C1--:---:---:---C5--:---:---:---:---C10--:---:---:---:---C15-C16 B B1--:---:---:---B5--:---:---:---:---B10--:---:---:---:---B15-B16 A A1--:---:---:---A5--:---:---:---:---A10--:---:---:---:---A15-A16

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16

Note 1: Vertical designations would be number / letter (i.e. 1A, 4F, 6K, etc).



8-16

8.22 Bay Equipment Labels



8-17

8.22.1 Equipment Retired in Place

This Equipment is Retired In Place

Effective: / /



8-18

8.23 Temporary Removal and Installation Tag

RG 47-0144

TEMPORARY REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION TAG This equipment was temporally installed or removed from service on / /

CenturyLink Design Engineer: Phone ( ) -

BVAPP Number: BV Authorization #: Supplier Order Number:

Equipment to be replaced or installed to standards by: / /

Service Supplier Contact: Phone ( ) -

8.24 Labels

8.24.1 Discharge Body Static – Red Label This label is required on all battery stands, and is to be placed on all exposed sides near the center and at eye level.

Danger Discharge Body Static

Personnel doing work on battery cells shall discharge body static prior to touching battery or inter-cell connectors. To discharge “body static” touch any suitable equipment ground. If the battery stand is made of insulating material and a suitable equipment ground cannot be reached, then a grounded touch plate must be provided.



8-19

8.24.2 Battery Hazard Label – Gray Label This label is required on all battery stands, and is to be placed on all exposed sides near the center and at eye level.

DANGER EXPLOSIVE

Can cause blindness or severe injury. Protect eyes

when working around battery. Static electricity,

sparks, flames or cigarettes can cause explosion. Tools and loose connections can

cause sparks.

IMPORTANT

• Follow written instructions when servicing or charging

• Do not remove flame- arrestor vent caps

• Provide adequate ventilation when charging

ACID POISON

• Can cause severe burns • Contains sulfuric acid • In case of contact, flush

immediately and thoroughly with water, and obtain prompt medical attention when eyes are affected.



8-20

8.24.3 BDFB Embargo Label These labels shall be placed at or near eye level near the AMP/VOLT meter on BDFBs .

As of / / This BDFB has been EMBARGOED for new growth due to load!

8.24.4 BDFB Maximum Feeder Drain Labels

The Maximum continuous drain on each

feeder to this BDFB is 200 Amperes.

The Maximum continuous drain on each

feeder to this BDFB is

Amperes. 8.24.5 High Voltage Caution Label

CAUTION: HIGH VOLTAGE



8-21

8.24.6 Power Restoral Procedure – Ericsson (formerly Telcordia Technologies) Products

WARNING: Ericsson Switches When a breaker Designated “PDF” is verified to be in the “off / tripped”

position do not reset until NROC (800-830-0722) has been contacted for assistance with Power Restoral

Procedures. Do not reset breakers / replace fuses designated “PDF” until all fuses have been removed from associated bus at

the “PDF” frame [AXE] – PDF [STP] – PDF

Contact NROC (800) 830-0722

8.24.7 Power Restore Procedure – Lucent Products

WARNING: Lucent Switches

When a breaker that is Designated “PCDF/PD/LPDU” is verified to be in the “off / tripped” position do not

reset until NROC (800-830-0722) has been contacted for assistance

with Power Restoration Procedures. Do not reset breakers / replace fuses designated “PCDF/PD”, etc. until all

fuses have been removed from associated bus at the “PDC” frame

[5ESS] – PDF (etc.) See: 235-105-220

Procedure: Chapter 14 Contact NROC (800) 830-0722

CENTURYLINK Tech Pub 77350 Chapter 8

Issue O, May 2016 Equipment Designations

8-22

8.24.8 Power Restore Procedure – Nortel Products

WARNING: Nortel Switch Products When a breaker Designated “PDC” is

verified to be “off / tripped”, do not reset until NROC (800 830-0722) has been contacted for assistance with Power

Restoration Procedures. Do not reset breakers / replace fuses

designated “PDC” until all fuses have been removed from associated bus at the

“PDC” frame [DMS 100/200/250/500]

See: NTP 297-8001-545 (Local Switches) or NTP 297-8021-545 (Tandem Switches)

Procedure: Chapter 2 [DMS 10]

See: NTP 297-3401-511 Procedure: EP 0006

8.24.9 Job Packet Storage Labels



8-23

8.25 Collocation Decommission Tag



8-24

8.26 Alarm/OSS Testing Incompletion Tag



8-25

8.27 Lockout/Tag out Label (Enlarged for illustration – Refer also to Par. 9.1.12 and 9.7.11



8-26

8.28 Equipment “Removal from Service” Tag (Refer also to Par. 3.10.9)

RG 43-0007

DO NOT USE THIS EQUIPMENT

THIS EQUIPMENT HAS BEEN

REMOVED FROM THE

CORPORATE RECORDS

THIS EQUIPMENT IS

SCHEDULED FOR REMOVAL

REFER ALL QUESTIONS TO: ENGINEER:____________________

TEL. NO.:______________________

Job No: _______________________ DATE TAG PLACED: ____________

RG 43-0007 (06-04)



8-27

8.29 Building Column Designations

8.29.1 Building columns in CenturyLink central offices will be designated per guidelines established by the CenturyLink Real Estate organization. Refer to Par. 8.29.2. The stenciling effort will be performed by personnel contracted or approved by the Real Estate group specifically for this purpose and will not be the responsibility of installation services contractors or CenturyLink Technical Installation (QTI) personnel.

8.29.2 Column designations in existing locations and new building additions will be applied with input from the CenturyLink Common Systems Power (& Space) Environment and Central Office (CSPEC) and Design Engineering groups the Network Design System (NDS) as follows:

• All column designations will be consistent with the intent of the Planning and Design Engineer(s) responsible for that central office location. Column designations and NDS drawings shall match.

• The identification markings shall consist of a building column paint applied neatly to all applicable sides of the column (even columns embedded within walls). Due to peeling over time, P-Touch and other labeling methods are not the preferred method of designating columns.

• Column designation characters should be 4 inches in size and stenciled in black with a white background. They should be visible from the floor on all sides. They typically reside 6 feet from the finished floor.

8.30 Equipment “Hot Surface” Tag (Refer also to Par. 8.13)

CAUTION:

HOT SURFACE



8-28

8.31 National Fire Protection Association “Very Early Warning Fire Detection Alarm System” Tag (Refer also to Par. 2.6 and Par. 15.10)

8.32 Fire Code Power Room Door Warning Placard



8-29

8.33 CenturyLink Pair Gain Site “WARNING” Tag


Chapter 9 Power

TOC 9-i


9. Power .................................................................................................................................9-1

9.1 AC Circuits ........................................................................................................9-1 9.2 Primary & Secondary Distribution ................................................................9-7 9.3 Battery Primary Conductors ..........................................................................9-9 9.4 Bus Bars ...........................................................................................................9-11 9.5 Cabinets ..........................................................................................................9-12 9.6 Connecting .....................................................................................................9-12 9.7 Fuse Bays, BDFBs, BDCBB POWER BOARDs, etc. ...................................9-15 9.8 Fuse Contact Preparation and Protection ..................................................9-17 9.9 Knife Switches, Fuses and Fuse Mountings ...............................................9-17 9.10 Standby Engines .............................................................................................9-17 9.11 Voltage Distribution Requirements ..............................................................9-18 9.12 Wire Information Table ..................................................................................9-19


Chapter 9 Power

9-1

9. Power Reference: 1. CenturyLink Technical Publication 77385, “Power Equipment and Engineering Standards.”

Notes:

• All connectors, wiring, conduit, fixtures, etc. installed in CenturyLink locations shall meet the requirements of the National Electric Code (NEC), National Electrical Manufacturer's Association (NEMA), Underwriters' Laboratories (UL), or Canadian Standards Association (CSA).

• Service Suppliers engaged in the installation, removal, or modification of live power equipment shall protect exposed live conductors, bus bars, adjacent equipment, etc. with power insulating blankets. Materials other than power insulating blankets shall not be used. Refer to cautionary notes in 2.4.8.

• No work shall be performed on LIVE AC Circuits by anyone other than a qualified Electrician. Since most AC circuits and some DC circuits can be worked on with the energy removed, the MOP shall contain the reason for working on any live AC circuits. Work on live circuits shall not proceed without the specific approval of the authorized CenturyLink person. For AC circuits that can be de-energized, lock-out / tag-out procedures must be followed. National Network Services facilities do not permit contracted suppliers to energize/operate any AC/DC breakers/fuses. The only exception is when fuse panel shelf covers are not in place (refer to 00243 for clarification).

• The building location Single Line AC drawing shall be updated with any installation of major AC components. Identification shall be placed on added AC components to agree with the identification on the Single Line AC drawing. Major components are defined as panels, switchboards and other distribution equipment from which individual circuits are derived.

• The real estate document “Building Equipment Design Guidelines” for electric (division 16) shall also be adhered to.

• The removal of a fuse or the opening of a breaker for the purposes of de-energizing a DC circuit shall be done by a CenturyLink employee. Prior to de-energizing, a current probe or clamp on ammeter capable of reading DC current shall be used to identify zero current flow. Only one LOAD of current to any one element shall be de-energized at one time.

Chapter 9 Power


9-2

9.1 AC Circuits

Note: AC circuits serving an “Isolated” ground plane shall not be extended to serve an “Integrated” ground plane.

9.1.1 Wire Type and Color

9.1.1.1 AC wire for distribution shall be THWN, THW, or THHN type.

9.1.1.2 Exposed Alternating Current Equipment Grounding (ACEG) conductors shall be green in color, or taped green where they are run exposed.

9.1.1.3 Green conductors shall not be used for any purpose other than an ACEG conductor, interior ring ground, or Central Office grounding conductors, unless the manufacturer has used it in intra-bay or intra-shelf wiring (which is not preferred)..

9.1.1.4 Neutral conductors shall be white or gray, or taped gray/white at all appearances.

9.1.1.5 Hot or phase conductors shall conform to the following color configurations:

Typical Power Wiring Color Code:

Nominal Voltage

Phase/Line/Leg Color

240/120 L‐1

Black 208/120 Y Ø‐A

240/120 Δ

240/120 L‐2 Red 208/120 Y

Ø‐B

240 Δ 208/120 Y

Ø‐C Blue

240/120 Δ 240/208 Δ

Ø‐B Orange

480/277 Y 480/277 Y Ø‐A Brown 480/277 Y Ø‐C Yellow

Grounding Green or Green w/yellow stripe or bare Copper

120/208/240 Neutral White or

Gray 277/480


Chapter 9 Power

9-3

9.1.2 AC Connecting Methods

9.1.2.1 Compression connections are preferred for AC termination.

9.1.2.2 Mechanical and single hole connectors are permitted where allowed by the National Electrical Code (NEC) and are readily accessible for inspection, repairs and maintenance. They may not be used when the conductors terminate in vibrating machinery (generators, etc).

9.1.2.3 Connectors shall be the proper size specified by the manufacturer for the wire gauge and type, copper or tin-plated copper and the correct hole size for mounting hardware.

9.1.2.4 Connections of ACEG conductors shall not be made by wrapping the conductor under a mounting screw/bolt. A two-hole connector, ground bar or terminal strip shall be used. The exception is when connecting the ACEG to a common NEMA configuration outlet box, switch and/or receptacle.

9.1.3 Wire Nut Connections

9.1.3.1 Shall be placed so as to be accessible for maintenance and inspection.

9.1.3.2 Shall be made in an approved enclosure; i.e., junction box, conduit box, or pull box.

9.1.3.3 Splices shall not be made in the open areas of frame bases, vertical cable ducts, or end guards unless they are a raceway approved for splicing.

9.1.3.4 Shall be the correct size for the wire gauge and number of conductors being joined.

9.1.4 Enclosures, Cabinets, Boxes and Panels (Commercial and Emergency Service) Protective metallic coverings (such as conduit, armor, lead covering, raceways, boxes, fittings, cabinets and fixtures) shall be grounded. Underwriters Laboratory (UL) approval of these coverings and devices assure that they will extend ground to one another when mechanical connections are made up tight. Ground is provided to the house service cabinet and ground continuity is extended to the power consuming device through these enclosures.

9.1.4.1 CenturyLink requires that a separate AC Equipment Grounding Conductor (ACEG) is extended in all raceways of all circuits.

9.1.4.2 The ACEG shall be enclosed in the same conduit or raceway with the phase and neutral conductors.

9.1.4.3 All enclosure covers, service panel covers or doors removed during installation shall be replaced at the end of each working day.


Chapter 9 Power

9-4

9.1.4.4 All AC enclosures, where knock outs or circuit breakers have been removed, shall be equipped with appropriate plugs, caps, or covers.

9.1.4.5. All unused, punched knockouts or holes in boxes and cabinets shall be closed. 9.1.5 Conduit

9.1.5.1 All wall mounted conduits shall be run per job drawing / record, securely fastened at a maximum interval of ten feet and within three feet of each outlet box, junction box, device box, cabinet, conduit body or other tubing.

9.1.5.2 Conduit shall be attached to the ceiling, suspended as close as possible and placed so as not to block future cabling, ladders, etc.

9.1.5.3 All rigid, Electrical Metallic Tubing (EMT), and liquid tight flexible metallic conduit runs shall be made with compression or threaded type fittings, couplings, and junction boxes. Set screw or stake type fittings and couplings shall not be used in CenturyLink locations on conduit sizes 1-1/4”and smaller. Exception: Screw type fittings and couplings may be used on armored cable and flexible metallic conduit, and on conduit larger than 1-1/4” diameter.

9.1.5.4 Poly Vinyl Chloride (PVC) conduit is not allowed for running AC circuits, alarm /monitoring leads, or other miscellaneous wiring applications. Note: For NNS sites, an exception is permitted for conductors run underground. PVC is permitted to extend into the building to the first “pull” or junction box, switch gear/panel box, or (for alarm/monitoring leads), the nearest rack.

9.1.5.5 Conduit, flex conduit, or armored cable may not be run in cable rack or on hangers with switchboard, fiber or power cable.

9.1.5.6 Metal flex conduit or armored cable shall not be run exposed for a distance exceeding three feet and shall never be used in a power room environment. Insulated coated armored cable or liquid tight flexible metallic conduit may be run in excess of three feet when properly supported. Liquid tight flexible metallic conduit shall never be run on a cable rack with switchboard or other power cable. These cables may be secured to auxiliary framing (but not cable rack stringers) using 9 ply cord. Armored cable and flexible conduit run outside of the power equipment application must be placed in accordance with TP 77351 Chapter 7B.6 and Section 4.2 on page 4-3, P. 8-8 (p. 8.4) and Sect. 1.3. Flexible MC cable is allowed to be used under raised floors (if the floor is used as a plenum; the flexible MC must be sealed.

Note: Liquid tight flexible metallic conduit should never be run in excessive lengths in applications where rigid, metallic EMT conduit should be used.

9.1.5.7 No wire splices are permitted within conduits. Make splices only in authorized boxes, fittings, wireways, etc. See 9.1.3, “Wire Nut Connections.”

9.1.5.8 Conduit shall, where possible, be run parallel and adjacent to auxiliary framing or cable rack.


Chapter 9 Power

9-5

9.1.5.9 All bends made to EMT or rigid conduits shall be made with a tool specifically designed for that purpose. The conduit bends shall not contain kinks or other imperfections.

9.1.6 Branch Circuits Note: Use UL approved spring clips, wire nuts, solderless connectors, etc. to make AC branch circuit connections.

9.1.6.1 When adding branch circuits from the distribution panel or extending existing circuits, verify that no local continuity exists between the added neutral (white/gray wire) and the ACEG (green or bare wire) before the connection is made.

9.1.6.2 Lighting circuits and appliance outlet circuits shall not be supplied by the same branch circuit. However, conductors for both types of circuits may be run in the same conduit/raceway providing the conduit/raceway is properly sized for multiple circuits. Circuits from protected sources (i.e. inverters) are to be separately identified per NEC 200.6(D) to separately identify the neutral wire.

9.1.6.3 Lighting circuits supplied by polyphase service shall be assigned in such a manner as to balance the load on the different phases/legs as closely as possible. One neutral conductor of the same size as the phase conductor(s) shall be run with each phase conductor set.

9.1.6.4 All AC circuits shall have a separate ACEG (green wire) run with phase conductors.

9.1.7 Appliance and Utility Outlets

All outlets shall be of the standard type that connects its grounding terminal to its frame. Isolated ground or “Orange” outlets are not allowed going forward in CenturyLink locations. The only exception to this requirement is the outlet assemblies already embedded within the existing plant footprint (Refer also to Par. 3.3.3).

9.1.7.1 Grounding and polarity verification of outlets is required.

9.1.7.2 When removals involve AC, as with appliance/base outlets, utility outlets, or permanently mounted power strips, all remaining AC conductors shall be properly terminated.

9.1.7.3 In Stored Program Control Systems (SPCS) switching equipment, the appliance outlets will be provided as an integral part of the SPCS. In no instance shall appliance outlets be added to any SPCS equipment without meeting all interface and grounding requirements of that SPCS equipment.

9.1.7.4 Base mounted AC appliance outlets are required in every new CenturyLink network facility lineups. Refer to TP 77351 Chapter 2.5.13.3.

9.1.7.5 Outlets shall have their ground terminal referenced to the frame in which they are mounted.


Chapter 9 Power

9-6

9.1.8 Multiwire Circuits

All multiwire (two or more ungrounded conductors) branch circuits shall be wired with a continuous grounded conductor (neutral), except for rectifiers fed by 208V or 240V single-phase ”…the continuity of a grounded conductor shall not be dependent upon device connections, such as lamp holders, receptacles, etc., where the removal of such device would interrupt the continuity.” [NEC 300.13(B)].

9.1.9 Flexible Cordage

9.1.9.1 Excess flexible cordage shall be bundled, secured, and stored in a manner that prevents accidental disconnection or snagging.

9.1.9.2 Flexible cordage shall not be used to extend “base outlet” AC supply to permanently mounted equipment. A dedicated circuit is required for this type of installation.

9.1.9.3 Exception: When temporary AC power is required to rewire or remove an existing dedicated circuit, Ground Fault Circuit Interrupter (GFCI)-protected flexible cordage of the proper type and gauge may be temporarily used to supply power to permanently mounted equipment. (See 9.1 “AC Circuits.”)

9.1.10 Receptacles

Higher voltage receptacles shall have the receptacle cover plate marked with the appropriate voltage (e.g., 208V AC, 240V AC, 277V AC, etc.). Stamp with three sixteenths of an inch or equivalent font characters in vermilion (red) ink. Receptacles protected at over 20 amps shall have the protection size stamped as above.

9.1.11 Dedicated Circuits

Frame mounted equipment (modems, permanently mounted test equipment, etc.) that require AC utility outlets or power strips, shall have a dedicated circuit. This circuit shall be designated at both ends. Protected AC circuits (fed from an inverter or UPS) shall be utilized for this purpose if available in the central office. Dedicated AC circuits should be in a separate conduit from the equipment to the AC source. Where this is not possible, such as limited surface opening space on the panel or only gutter access to the panel is provided, this circuit can share the same conduit or gutter with existing outlet circuits if all NEC code requirements (conductor fill, etc.) are met. A dedicated circuit that is in a shared enclosure, junction, or pull box shall be designated at each enclosure, junction, or pull box.

9.1.12 Work Performed On Live Circuits - Lock Out/Tag Out

All persons that intend to work on or around energized circuits or circuits that could become energized shall be familiar with and adhere to the CenturyLink practices described in the safety and loss prevention manual that applies to lockout / tagout. This practice is consistent with OSHA requirements. Refer also to Par. 8.28 and 9.7.1.1.


Chapter 9 Power

9-7

9.1.13 Temporary AC Circuits

When work requirements dictate the necessity to power permanently mounted equipment with temporary AC power, flexible cordage, such as type SJ00-junior hard service cord, may be used. However, suitable disconnecting switches at plug connectors shall be installed to permit the disconnection of all conductors of each temporary circuit simultaneously (NEC 305-3). For CenturyLink purposes, temporary AC power refers to any wiring configuration installed to supply AC power that will be disassembled and removed prior to the actual completion of a job and includes extension cords. All such circuits shall be Ground Fault Interrupter (GFI) type and run in a manner that properly supports and protects the temporary circuit and personnel and does not present a safety hazard.

9.1.14 Frame and Aisle Lighting

Frame and aisle lighting shall conform to standard design configuration, or follow approved existing office convention. The Service Supplier shall follow the switch manufacturer’s requirements as determined by the job site situation.

9.1.15 The operating temperature of all AC and DC wiring in UPS equipment will not be greater than 20°F above the ambient temperature, or 115 degrees Fahrenheit, whichever is higher.

9.1.16 High Temperature Surfaces

9.1.16.1 Exposed surfaces with temperatures that can be greater than 115° Fahrenheit shall be marked with warning labels.

9.1.16.2 Surfaces that can reach temperatures greater than 130° Fahrenheit shall be guarded as well as marked with warning labels.

9.2 Primary & Secondary Distribution

9.2.1 Run all leads in continuous lengths per job specification. The use of “in-line” drop splices or H-tap connections does constitute “continuous length” runs. Installation work at a Power Board or BDFB shall be completed before the total job has reached 70% complete.

9.2.2 DC wire for distribution and grounding shall be RHW, or XHHW (in standard Class B stranding or flexible Class I stranding) halogenated or non-halogenated wire. This requirement applies to all DC power conductors that are 14 AWG and larger. The color of –48V & RTN (DC) power leads is typically black. Grounding conductors shall be green with a yellow tracer or bare.

Note: All XHHW wire does not require a cotton braid or to be fiber-wrapped (due to “cold flow”) at lacing points on cable rack straps. Also, it is not required that this cable be tinned when it is run outside the power room, since there are no halogenic or sulfuric compounds to oxidize and corrode the copper. Unprotected power leads must be tinned.


Chapter 9 Power

9-8

9.2.3 All battery and battery return cables shall be run closely coupled and in pairs (except for at the termination ends, and for return conductors running past remote ground windows, which must be paired back on themselves). Power cables (Battery and Battery Return) run on panned racks shall be paired and secured together at 24- inch intervals. (“Paired” is defined as placing these cables above/below or at the side of each other and securing with a 9 ply cord lock stitch such as would be done when sewing on power cable rack with existing conductors.)

9.2.4 Where space does not permit the addition of a separate, dedicated power cable rack, power cables with protection devices rated at 70 amp or less and using cables 4/0 AWG, may be run on cable racks utilized for switchboard cabling if no other option exists. Any power cable larger than 4/0 AWG regardless of amperage size shall be run on dedicated FUSED POWER CABLE ONLY cable racks (TP 77385). The placement of any type of cable used for anything other than power on FUSED POWER CABLE ONLY racks is strictly prohibited. The issuance of Letters of Deviation waiving any of these requirements in a central office going forward shall be considered invalid. Also refer to Chapter 5, Par. 5.6.

9.2.5 Primary DC power distribution cable shall be run on a dedicated DC power cable rack. Primary DC power distribution is defined as leads from the power plant to the BDFB or the power distribution frame dedicated to a switch. Secondary DC power distribution is defined as power from the BDFB to the equipment. Primary and secondary power leads are not to be segregated and can be run commingled on the same dedicated power cable rack.

9.2.6 When secondary power cable is tapped down for entry into equipment frames, taps shall be placed on the cable rack between cable rack straps, and staggered above or within six feet of either side of the frame, bay, or cabinet.

9.2.7 All tap connections shall be accessible for inspection. Connections that are taped and have covers applied shall be considered accessible. Heat shrinkable tubing, other than clear, is not considered accessible.

9.2.8 Main conductors and feeders in the plant should be sized for the ultimate capacity of the plant (see TP 77385).

9.2.9 Un-protected cables from chargers to batteries and from batteries to discharge panels or bus assemblies shall be on a separate cable rack from all other cables. Power conductors that run from the battery string to the power board are considered “Un-protected leads.”


Chapter 9 Power

9-9

Note: In power rooms untinned wire will not be used in applications where “Un-protected leads” are required. Cabling in those applications must be tinned and is usually rated by the manufacturer as “Class I flex” power cable. However, untinned wire can be run in the power room for –48V distribution from the power board to any subsequent distribution location. In that application(s) the installer is required to “dead-end” these “hot” power leads on the cable rack above the power board and H-tap down the associated Class I flex “drops” that terminate directly to the power board. The return conductors do not generally tap down, but are run directly to the return buss bar assembly.

9.3 Battery Primary Conductors

Battery distribution circuits protected at 100 AMPs or greater may require a means to monitor the load. Refer also to TP 77385.

9.3.1 On new installations of primary DC (Un-protected) power cable in a central office, the cable shall not share a cable rack with any other type cable and shall be run on dedicated DC power cable rack.

9.3.2 All battery and battery return cables shall be run closely coupled and in pairs. with the following exceptions:

9.3.2.1 This "pairing" requirement does not apply to cabling between the power plant and batteries and/or primary distribution board, or the cable within a few feet of the return bus of a secondary distribution center — e.g. BDFB.

9.3.2.2 It also is not required for Outside Plant applications — cabinets and Customer Premise — where the DC plant size does not exceed 100 Amperes.)

9.3.2.3 In cases of a remote ground window where the served equipment is not on the same floor as the remote ground window the battery feed leads do not have to be paired with the battery return leads all the way to the ground window. For the portion of the run where the battery feed and the battery return leads are not paired, the battery return lead shall be paired back on itself, (this includes going through the same cable hole). The total impedance of the battery feed and the total impedance of the battery return must be equal (i.e., the voltage drop must be divided equally between the battery feed and the battery return — 0.5 V one-way drop for both the feed and return). Refer to CenturyLink Pub 77355 for ground window guidelines as required.

9.3.2.4 Between the bays and/or battery stands, internal to the power plant, paired battery and return are preferred. However, unpaired leads are allowed internal to the power plant under the following conditions:

- They are run as closely as possible;

- No other cables are placed between them; and

- No non-referenced (non-grounded) equipment is within ten (10) feet.


Chapter 9 Power

9-10

9.3.2.5 The battery return leads are not to be confused with the grounding conductors and are exempt from the green color requirement. They are not to be marked or otherwise identified with the color green. Nor should they be colored red unless that is the color from the manufacturer in a winning harness.

9.3.2.6 Occasionally it is required to run DC conductors inside of a conduit. When this is required, both the battery and battery return shall be paired in the same conduit.

9.4 Bus Bars

9.4.1 Bus bars shall be free of sharp edges, burrs, corrosion, etc. and shall be copper or tin-plated copper.

9.4.2 Bus bars shall be properly supported per drawings/records and insulated from surrounding metal work.

9.4.3 Coating and Plating

A metallic coating or plating is sometimes used on bus bars to reduce the resistance of the connecting joints. These contact surfaces should be cleaned with a clean, dry cloth to remove grease and other foreign matter, but should not be sanded or the surface otherwise scratched. Non-plated copper bars shall have connection points cleaned. See 9.4.6, “Bolts, Screws, Nuts and Washers,” and Section 9.6,“Connecting.”

9.4.4 Aluminum Bus Bars

9.4.4.1 Aluminum bus bars are not authorized for new installation. Where aluminum bars exist, contact the CenturyLink Design Engineer for approved connecting procedures.

9.4.4.2 Existing aluminum bus bars shall not be tapped for fastening terminal lugs or for fastening bar to bar. Use through bolts, clamp joints or threaded inserts.

9.4.5 Bus Bar Clamps

Install a pal nut or locknut on each bus bar clamp bolt. Verify that regular nuts are tight before applying the pal nuts or locknuts.

9.4.6 Bolts, Screws, Nuts and Washers

Ferrous bolts, screws, nuts, washers, bus bar supports and clips used in fastening copper to copper, or combinations of metals shall be zinc or cadmium plated; however, copper, copper plated, tin-plated copper and stainless steel parts may be used when furnished.


Chapter 9 Power

9-11

9.4.7 Protective Enclosures

Bus bars which are located external to an equipment framework enclosure, and have a potential different than the surrounding or supporting metal work shall be protected from short circuits by means of an insulated removable cover. The intent of this requirement is to prohibit the practice of using tape as the protecting medium on bus bars and to allow protection to be removed and reinstalled for growth and/or maintenance activities.

9.4.7.1 Bus bars requiring protective covers:

• All battery bus bars and splice plates not located within the power room or within a framework enclosure.

• Battery return splice plates where the potential of the plates are associated with an isolated ground plane, but are physically located and/or supported from ironwork associated with the integrated ground plane.

9.4.8 Bus bars that do not require protective covers:

9.4.8.1 All bus bars or splice plates located on a battery stand or in a power room, unless they present a safety or service hazard.

9.4.8.2 Battery return distribution bars located above a BDFB. Even if the power source feeding the BDFB is used to power a SPCS, the BDFB should appear subsequent to the Ground Window; therefore, contact between the return bus bar and surrounding metalwork would not constitute a single point ground violation.

9.4.8.3 Bus bars used as the Main Grounding Bus (MGB). This is the point of interface between the two ground planes (commonly referred to as the Ground Window). Therefore, accidental and / or additional contact with either ground member would have minimal effect.

9.4.8.4 Bus bars that are used as a grouping point to bond integrated ground members together or to the MGB when required.

9.4.8.5 Central Office (COGB), Principal Ground Point (PGP) and Office Principle Ground Point (OPGP) bars.

9.4.9 Separation of Bus Bars from Surrounding Objects

9.4.9.1 All Bus Bars shall be a minimum of 3 inches from any metal objects. Where this cannot be avoided, insulation must be provided between the Bus Bar and the metallic object. All Bus Bars shall be installed as to afford ready access. The only exclusion permitted pertains to factory installed bus bar assemblies located within the DC plant or BDFB and/or P BD locations.

9.4.9.2 All Bus Bars shall be installed as to afford ready access to the connecting surface (minimum of 4 inches of clearance).


Chapter 9 Power

9-12

9.5 Cabinets

Isolated cabinets such as motor starters, self-contained power distribution service cabinets, generator control bays, etc., shall be secured to the floor with a minimum of four approved 12mm, torque indicating, expansion anchors. See Paragraph 3.21,”Floor Anchors and Installation Instructions.”

9.6 Connecting

Electrical resistance shall be kept as low as practical. 9.6.1 Contact surfaces shall be cleaned so that direct metal to metal contact is made. Non conductive coatings (such as paint, lacquer and enamel) on equipment shall be completely removed under the entire contact surface to assure good electrical continuity. Copper bars may require the use of low abrasive pads to remove oxidation.

9.6.2 Plated surfaces, such as silver or lead plated copper, etc., are plated to prevent oxidation and reduce contact resistance and, therefore, should never be sanded or abraded. If cleaning is required, wipe with a dry cloth.

9.6.3 Mating surfaces shall be flat to ensure maximum cross-sectional area contact.

9.6.4 A non-oxidizing agent shall be applied to inhibit corrosion on all battery, battery return, and grounding connections, i.e., at all contact points, bolts, washers, nuts, "H" taps, "C" taps, lugs and other items.

9.6.5 Pressure or clamping devices shall be tight.

9.6.6 DC power, return, and bonding/grounding lead connections shall have lock washers installed to ensure secure connections. Use shake proof (star) lock washers under mounting screws and split ring lock washers with bolts and nuts, except where double or locking nuts are standard. Lock washers shall not be placed between the connecting terminal and the contact surface. Connections that require annual re- torque routines do not meet CenturyLink Standards and are not acceptable. Battery intercell connectors are exempt from this requirement since they require annual re-torque. For those kits that are not equipped with lockwashers (Refer to Par. 10.2.12.2).


Chapter 9 Power

9-13

9.6.6.1 Connecting hardware shall be torque per the following table: Generic torque values for U.S. (coarse thread) hardware stacks consisting of a hex head cap screw (bolt), two flat washers, hex nut, and a spring lock washer.

Plated Steel* Silicon Bronze Stainless Steel

DIA TPI in-lb ft-lb in-lb ft-lb in-lb ft-lb

1/4" 20 96 8 144 12 96 8

5/16" 18 120 10 180 15 120 10

3/8" 16 180 15 240 20 180 15

1/2" 13 300 25 480 40 300 25

5/8" 11 480 40 660 55 480 40

*ASTM A449 / SAE Grade 5 or equivalent.

Note: Some installation suppliers provide Belleville spring washers as a tensioning and locking mechanism for connecting hardware. This conical spring washer provides even pressure across a wider contact patch than can be achieved with a standard hardware stack. When Belleville spring washers are installed, they shall be torqued per the installation supplier’s and/or equipment manufacturer’s specifications.

9.6.7 General Connecting Methods

Attach only one lead to a punching, lug or connector that is designed to accommodate one lead.

9.6.7.1 Attach only one connector with the same mounting screw(s) or bolt(s) unless specified in the associated equipment configuration. The “back-to-back” mounting of a single -48V and RTN LD-A and LD-B leads (from a common network element or shelf) utilizing common terminating material on opposite sides of an RTN Bus Bar assembly is prohibited (refer also to Par. 9.6.8.3). Frame ground connectors, chassis, shield, and equipment bonds shall not be stacked one on top of the other under the same mounting hardware.


Chapter 9 Power

9-14

9.6.7.2 Any connector fabricated with two holes shall be secured using both holes.

9.6.7.3 On BDFB and Power Boards all alarm wiring for power fuses and associated alarm fuses shall be connected initially whether the locations are to be fused or to be spared.

9.6.7.4 Stranded cables shall retain all of their strands at the point of termination.

9.6.7.5 All connectors with a potential other than ground shall be protected if they extend out beyond a protective cover and if they are within 3 inches of any differing potential. Suitable protection shall be clear heat shrinkable tubing or one wrap of sheet fiber paper.

9.6.8 Crimp/Compression Connections DC power connections for supply and return shall use irreversible crimp-type copper connections, wire wraps, or latching "plugs". Aluminum connectors shall not be used, and set-screw connections are not allowed. DC power connections to non service- affecting equipment (e.g., indicating lights, alarm equipment) are exempt from this requirement (with the exception of NNS facilities where alarm equipment is considered “critical”).

9.6.8.1 Internal to the supplier's equipment, power connections types are the prerogative of the equipment manufacturer.

9.6.8.2 DC power connections between the source fuse panel and the shelf shall meet the requirements of Par. 9.6.8 above (e.g.; can be a one-hole or two-hole crimp, wire wrapped, or latching “plug”) depending on equipment design.

9.6.8.3 All connections to a battery return bus bar must be a two-hole crimp only. These connections should be stacked (one above and one below the return bus bar) to conserve space whenever it is feasible to do so without jeopardizing network operation (refer also to Par. 9.6.7.1). Exceptions to the “two-hole” requirement are allowed for battery return bus bars in DC plants rated at 50 Amperes or less wire wrap or single-hole lugs for monitors, displays related to the BDFB or PBD the bus serves when the wire is smaller than 14 AWG..

9.6.8.4 All connections (nuts and bolts) made to battery posts, terminal plates, and inter cell connectors shall be made with stainless steel (preferred), lead, or lead-coated copper. Lead-plated compression-type lugs are not required to have inspection holes. However, all other compression type lugs are required to have inspection holes.

9.6.8.5 On flooded batteries, inter-cell connectors, inter-tier connectors, inter-row connectors, terminal plates, and all connector lugs connected directly to the battery posts shall be lead or lead-coated copper. There shall be NO exceptions to this. Tin- plated copper compression type lugs can be used when connecting to the terminal plates, however they cannot be used to connect directly to the battery posts. There will be no connectors varnished, lacquered or painted, during or after installation.


Chapter 9 Power

9-15

9.6.8.6 For battery connectors, heat shrink tubing will only be applied at the factory during initial manufacture. Heat shrink tubing that does not provide a hermetically sealed connection will not be allowed. Only clear heat shrink tubing may be used.

The integrity/quality of a crimp connection is dependent upon the following:

9.6.8.7 The correct size connector for the particular wire size(s) involved.

9.6.8.8 Insulation removed so that the wire extends the full length of the barrel or groove.

9.6.8.9 Preparation of the wire end and connector as required.

9.6.8.10 The use of a non-oxidizing agent on the wire and in the connector as required.

9.6.8.11 Full insertion of the wire into the connector. The wire shall be inserted to within 1/8 inch of the inspection hole for wire sizes 2 AWG and smaller and within 1/4 inch for wire sizes 1/0 AWG and larger.

9.6.8.12 Compress the connector the correct amount and in the proper sequence using the lug manufacturer's recommended tool and die set.

9.6.9 Power/Grounding Connections

9.6.9.1 Mechanical connectors shall not be used in DC power distribution and grounding systems. Exceptions to this requirement are detailed in CenturyLink Standard Configuration documents.

9.6.9.2 All electrical connections shall be smooth and treated with a non-oxidizing agent.

9.6.9.3 Parallel taps for branching or frame entry on power and grounding conductors shall be equal to or smaller than the feeder conductor being tapped.

9.6.9.4 Battery and battery return connections made with H-taps require the connection to be taped, a cover applied, and secured with 9 ply cord.

9.7 Fuse Bays, BDFBs, BDCBBs, Power Boards, etc.

9.7.1 All fuses and circuit breakers shall be of the proper type and capacity specified in job drawings/records and shall be in compliance with manufacturers' design specifications. Cable ampacity shall equal or exceed the protecting device size. When manufacturers specify multiple loads (A&B, etc.) they shall be fused from different power board feeders. Fuses shall be installed or breakers energized at the completion of the job to identify the correct polarity of the connection at the fuse panel, and test records shall be provided. For facility locations utilizing Battery Distribution Control Breaker Boards/Bays (BDCBBs), the recommended manufacturer vintage/type of breaker MUST be installed per that specific model of BDCBB. When installing breakers greater than 60 amperes, the manufacturer’s spacing requirements shall be adhered to.


Chapter 9 Power

9-16

9.7.1.1 Lock Out/Tag Out warning labels shall be used on all DC circuits that are connected to the distribution source and are not energized at the time of termination. Refer also to Par. 8.27 and 9.1.12.

9.7.2 All cartridge, knife type fuses, and fuse reducers being installed shall be cleaned and lubricated with a non-oxidizing agent.

9.7.3 A non-oxidizing agent shall be applied to inhibit corrosion on all battery, battery return, and grounding connections.

9.7.4 Dummy fuses shall be installed where fuse holders depend on the dummy fuse as tensioning agents. Dummy fuses are no longer required at all unassigned fuse locations.

9.7.5 Alarm fuses shall be installed or an alternate system provided to indicate when a feeder fuse has opened. All BDFBs and PBDs that use TPS distribution fusing must use alarm fuses rated .18A (GMT-type).

9.7.6 Fuse reducers shall not be used in “dead front” fuse panels. Dead front is defined as having no exposed electrical potential. Fuse reducers shall not be used to reduce the fuse size more than once (double reducers).

9.7.7 All unassigned circuit fuses, their designations/pins, and associated alarm fuses shall be removed. Dedicated alarm fuse designation pins may remain in place. See Chapter 8 “Breakers, Fuses, Switches, and Shunts.”

9.7.8 All “live front” power distribution bays designed to have front protective covers, shall have those covers installed. Live front is defined as having exposed electrical potential.

9.7.9 All unequipped fuse/breaker block positions or panels shall have blank panels installed,. No holes shall be permitted.

9.7.10 The largest fuse permitted in a BDFB is 100 Amps, and only if the BDFB will accept that size of fuse (in some cases, use of these larger fuses may require sparing of the next and/or previous position due to heat per the manufacturer requirements).

9.7.11 No cable larger than a 1/0 AWG shall be terminated to a BDFB fuse position. Larger distribution cables shall be tapped down to a maximum of a 1/0 AWG before entering the BDFB. For miscellaneous-mounted fuse panels in relay racks, no cable larger than a 4 AWG shall be terminated on the rear entry of the panel (unless the source amperage and/or manufacturer’s specifications warrants a larger size).

9.7.12 BDFB fuse positions shall be cabled, installed and assigned from the bottom up in top-fed BDFB’s. Once installed, the fuse positions are numbered from the top down per TP 77385 Fig. 9-13.


Chapter 9 Power

9-17

9.7.13 When power cables are tapped down in size for entry (see 9.7 “Fuse Bays, BDFBs, POWER BOARDs, etc.”), taps shall be placed within six feet of the entry point into the BDFB (15’ for PBDs). Taps shall be staggered to prevent pileups (reducing splices do not have to be staggered). 9.7.14 All tap connections shall be accessible for inspection. Connections that are taped and have covers applied shall be considered to be accessible. Heat shrinkable tubing, other than clear, is not considered to be accessible.

9.7.15 Equipment shall not be powered from BDFBs not located on the same floor or from BDFB’s supplied by different power plants.

9.7.16 Equipment loads on a BDFB feeder, shall never exceed 50% of their fused value.

9.7.17 Use only DC type fuses and breakers for DC circuits, and only AC type fuses and breakers for AC circuits.

9.7.18 No circuits shall be energized without both ends of the circuit identified and connected.

9.7.19 When 500V-rated insulation (minimum) is not used on conductive members of differing potentials, those conductors must be separated by at least 2 inches of air space (Refer also to Par. 11.5.1.1 and TP 77355).

9.8 Fuse Contact Preparation and Protection

9.8.1 Fuse ferrules, blades, and contact area of their associated clips shall be coated with a thin film of a non-oxidizing agent.

9.9 Knife Switches, Fuses and Fuse Mountings

Power shall be disconnected whenever possible from switches, fuses, clips or connections before they are worked on. If the potential cannot be removed, protect adjacent parts of opposite polarity with insulating materials.

9.10 Standby Engines

9.10.1 The CenturyLink Design Engineer shall specify, prior to the start of installation, the electrical, intake, exhaust, fuel, and floor grade requirements based on the engine manufacturer's recommendations for the particular engine being installed.

9.10.2 Fuel systems shall be free of copper or galvanized metal.

9.10.3 Engine areas shall be labeled to provide warnings of hazardous conditions, as follows:

9.10.3.1 Noise: “Ear Protection Required” on or at Entrance and Exit doors.

Chapter 9 Power


9-18

9.10.3.2 Voltage: “Danger High Voltage.” AC Service Panels, Transfer Switch, Distribution Panel, Served Equipment (rectifiers etc.).

9.10.3.3 Fuel: “Danger NO SMOKING or Open Flame“ on or at Engine room and fuel storage systems and cabinets.

9.10.3.4 Temperature: “Danger HOT” on or at Engine exhaust system. 9.10.4 New standby engine-alternator installations and modifications to existing ones shall comply with TP 77385 and all current PEG. This includes “temporary” installations of any kind. All onsite testing, including connections to the site systems, shall have an authorized CenturyLink representative in attendance. The MOP for the job shall reflect the date for the work to start, to complete and include reference to having a CenturyLink person on site.

9.10.5 Cutovers/Turn-ups shall not occur unless all alarms are connected and tested. 9.11 Voltage Distribution Requirements

The requirements for distribution voltage drop and recommended current/amperage drains to use for sizing are specified in TP 77385 Figures 9-1 through 9-7. These Figures and the associated bulleted items are designed around nominal -48 V battery/rectifier plants (nominal -48V is the DC voltage that CenturyLink™ provides to all CLECs and to most CenturyLink equipment). For nominal 24 V output battery plants, cut the voltage drops in half. For nominal 130 V output battery plants, double the allowable voltage drops. For converter plants without batteries attached to the output bus, the voltage drops can be much greater (follow the NEC® note of maximum 5% voltage drop from the converter plant to the using equipment overall, with no more than 3% in any one branch).

Chapter 9 Power


9-19

9.12 Wire Information Table

The cable is sized by the Design Engineer for ampacity and voltage drop. The Service Supplier is responsible for verifying that the circuit protection device is sized correctly for the cable.

WIRE INFORMATION

WIRE SIZE

AMPS* CIRCULAR

MILLS WEIGHT

PER FT DIA. OVER

INSULATION BEND

RADIUS

14 AWG

15

4,110

0.026#

0.19"

1.71"

12 AWG

20

6,530

0.035#

0.21"

1.89"

10 AWG

30

10,380

0.049#

0.24"

2.16"

8 AWG

40

16,510

0.084#

0.31"

2.79"

6 AWG

55

26,240

0.126#

0.40"

3.60"

4 AWG

70

41,740

0.190#

0.45"

4.05"

2 AWG

95

66,360

0.275#

0.51"

4.59"

1/0

150

105,600

0.443#

0.63"

5.67"

2/0

175

133,100

0.540#

0.68"

6.12"

4/0

230

211,600

0.814#

0.75"

6.75"

350 KCM

310

350,000

1.310#

0.98"

8.82"

500 KCM

380

500,000

1.815#

1.12"

10.08"

750 KCM

475

750,000

2.700#

1.34"

12.06"

1/0 FLEX

150

111,100

0.510#

0.66"

5.94"

2/0 FLEX

175

131,300

0.630#

0.72"

6.48"

4/0 FLEX

230

222,200

0.890#

0.84"

7.56" 350 KCM FLEX

310

373,700

1.490#

1.07"

9.63" 350 KCM FLEX

380

535,300

2.000#

1.24"

11.16" 750 KCM FLEX

475

777,700

2.900#

1.54"

13.86"


Chapter 10 Storage Batteries

TOC 10-i


10. Storage Batteries ........................................................................................................10-1

10.1 Cautions...........................................................................................................10-1 10.2 General Requirements and Procedures .......................................................10-2 10.3 Initial Battery Charge Procedures for Flooded Cells .................................10-4 10.4 Flooded Lead Acid Type Battery Charging ................................................10-5 10.5 Initial Charge and Turnover Requirements for Flooded Cells ................10-6 10.6 Initial Charge Procedures for Valve Regulated Lead Acid Cells ............10-8 10.7 Charge Procedures for Valve Regulated Lead Acid Cells Stored for Reuse Applications ...................................................................................10-8 10.8 Electrolyte Spills .............................................................................................10-8 10.9 Installation/Removal Requirements for Lithium-based Batteries ..........10-9 10.10 Installation Requirements for Nickel-based Batteries ..............................10-9



10-1

10. Storage Batteries

See CenturyLink Technical Publication 77385, “Power Equipment and Engineering Standards.”

10.1 Cautions

10.1.1 Battery gases, which are present during a charge or which remain near the cell at the completion of a charge, can exist in sufficient concentration to explode. The Service Supplier shall ensure that sufficient ventilation is provided. The Service Supplier shall post, in a conspicuous location(s) near the batteries, one or more warning signs, lettered in large vermilion/red characters as follows:

***WARNING*** Battery gases are explosive.

No sparks or open flame near cells.

10.1.2 Flame arrestors shall be in place at all times except for as stated in 10.1.7. All flame arrestors shall be equipped with dust covers and remain in place at all times. If they are removed to allow access to the electrolyte, they must be replaced upon completion of the work operation. Cells equipped with thermometers shall have the dust cover drilled to accommodate the installation of the thermometer.

10.1.3 Prior to working on a battery cell, discharge static from yourself and any object before touching the cell. Static can be discharged by touching a grounded surface.

10.1.4 After the end of initial or boost charge, the battery must be on float or open circuit for more than 48 hours before any cell connections can be made. The same applies to work near the cells, (other than voltage readings) and to the use of open flames near the cells (which are never allowed).

10.1.5 For personal protection and protection of clothing, use chemical safety goggles, rubber gloves, coveralls and/or aprons as required.

10.1.6 Do not lift cells by means of intercell connectors or cell posts.

10.1.7 Flooded batteries shall not be sealed air tight for transportation or for any other reason, the manufacturer’s shipping caps/detail should be used to allow gas buildup to escape.



10-2

10.2 General Requirements and Procedures

Note: Manufacturer’s requirements and procedures shall be followed for all installations of batteries.

NOTE: An authorized CenturyLink representative shall be present during the following, or the installation cannot proceed:

1) Delivery of flooded cells to the site.

2) Start and end of initial charging.

3) Connecting or disconnecting string(s) at the bus bar(s).

4) Connecting or disconnecting cell(s) in string(s) that are connected to the plant.

10.2.1 The installer shall insure that the following items are on site and accessible prior to the start of any work involving batteries:

• Goggles or Face Shields

• Nitrile Rubber Gloves

• Rubber Apron

• Eye Wash Kit

• Spill Cleanup Kit*

*The Service Supplier is required to furnish and use their spill kits. See “Chapter 12”, “Central Office Equipment Removals and Installs; and the Proper Handling of Hazardous Materials” and/or the CenturyLink Environmental Manager in your area for required contents of spill kits.

10.2.2 When permanently installing new or reused batteries, cells from different manufacturers shall not be placed in the same string (with the exception that LCT-1680. cells may be used in place of discontinued TCC-1680 cells, and KS-spec cells of the same spec and list number may be used in the same string). Batteries of different manufacturers may, however, be placed in parallel; i.e., String A, String B, etc.

10.2.3 When replacing cells in a string, the replacing cells shall have the same ampere-hour capacity (with the exception of L-15 round cells which are allowed to be used with L-1 round cells even though the Ampere/Hour capacity is slightly different), the same number of plates, and shall be of the same technology.

10.2.4 Clean battery case with distilled or de-ionized water only. Clean and neutralize battery posts using a mixture containing bicarbonate of sodium (one pound/gal. of distilled/deionized water).

10.2.5 Petroleum-based lubricants for moving batteries are prohibited. The only approved product(s) are water-based lubricants or products specifically listed in the battery manufacturer’s manual.



10-3

10.2.6 Flooded Lead Acid cells may be tipped as much as 15 degrees, for periods not to exceed 20 minutes, in order to get through windows or past other obstructions, provided the vented shipping plugs are in place. All other cells containing electrolyte shall not be tipped to a point that their electrolyte leaks from cell.

10.2.7 All moving / installation within the CenturyLink building or sites shall be done by the installation service supplier company.

10.2.8 Distilled or de-ionized water shall be used to replenish the cells.

10.2.9 Battery Storage Report 10.2.9.1 Storage Battery Report, Form RG 47-0001 shall be maintained on each battery throughout the installation and charging phases for battery installations.

10.2.9.2 Completed battery report(s) shall be turned over to the CenturyLink representative at the completion of the job. A copy of these records shall be left in the job packet and a copy retained with the battery string at the job site. The Service Supplier and Design Engineer shall ensure that a representative of CenturyLink NROC (Power Maintenance Engineer) or COO (Power Technician) reviews the battery report.

10.2.10 Temperature Reference Cell(s) (TR)

10.2.10.1 One cell in each newly installed flooded string shall be chosen as the TR cell. It shall be the cell on the upper tier with the lowest voltage reading at the end of the initial charge. It shall be recorded in the battery report forms. The TR cell shall not be a cell on the end of a battery string.

10.2.10.2 Remove shipping compound from all contact surfaces and apply a thin coating of non-oxidizing agent as specified by the manufacturer before installation.

10.2.10.3 Temperature variation across a battery string shall not exceed 5 degrees Fahrenheit. Recommended temperature is 77 degrees Fahrenheit. Facilities that fail to meet this standard need consideration in adjusting float voltage and calculation of battery reserve time. Contact the Power Design Engineer or NROC Power Maintenance Engineer.

10.2.11 Inter-cell Connections

10.2.11.1 The rounded side of the stainless steel washers shall be placed against the surface of the lead-plated straps to prevent cut through of the lead plating. See Chapter 7, “Connecting.”

10.2.11.2 Bolts on battery straps shall be installed (hex nuts positioned outward) to allow torque wrench access in meeting the battery manufacturer’s torque requirements. When these requirements are met, the Service Supplier shall mark these bolts as “torqued” by using a black indelible pen to make a mark across the nut and bolt.



10-4

10.2.11.3 Lead bolts shall not be used.

10.2.11.4 Inter-cell cables shall be of equal length and shall not extend into an aisle way in such a manner as to be subject to damage.

10.2.12 Inter-tier connections

10.2.12.1 Cables shall be routed so as not to place undue strain on battery posts. 180 degree sharp bends are not permitted.

10.2.12.2 Cables shall be of equal length.

10.2.12.3 Cables shall be secured to the battery stand at a minimum of one location. 10.3 Initial Battery Charge Procedures for Flooded Cells

Note: The manufacturers’ requirements and procedures shall be followed for all

charging of flooded cells.

10.3.1 An initial charge shall be given to all flooded lead-acid cells prior to turnover to CenturyLink (except for engine-start batteries). Verify that shipping plugs are removed and flame arrestors and dust covers are in place before charging cells.

10.3.2 A portable battery charger and protective fuse box should be used for charging batteries. In the event a portable charger is not available, then a job site rectifier (if readily available) can be used.

10.3.3 The charge voltage maximum limit is between 2.38 and 2.50 volts per cell average; and the battery manufacturer’s charging rates, voltages, times, and limits should generally be used.

10.3.4 In order to ensure the proper battery charging, the charging device shall be at least 1/100th of the battery Ampere-hour rating. Example: 4000 amp hour batteries would require a minimum of a 40 amp charger per string.

10.3.5 Immediately prior to the start of initial charge, measure the cell temperature of each cell and determine the total length of initial charge requirement by referring to the manufacturers' specification. If no manufacturer recommendation can be found, refer to the corresponding cell temperature column and time on open circuit column from 10.4 “Flooded Lead Acid Type Battery Charging”.

10.3.6 While on initial charge, the electrolyte level may rise above the maximum level line. If it does, do not be alarmed. The electrolyte level in rectangular cells is preadjusted by the manufacturer to be between the level lines when the cells are floated between 2.17 and 2.22 volts per cell (or as determined by power plant configuration, as specified in the Appendix of CenturyLink Technical Publication 77385) but generally set an average of 2.20V per cell when possible).

Note: High gravity UPS batteries and engine start batteries will float at higher average voltages per cell (use the manufacturer’s recommendation).



10-5

10.3.7 Do not remove any electrolyte from the battery cells. If the level rises in any cell to the point where overflow may occur, immediately contact CenturyLink technical support, the CenturyLink engineer or authorized CenturyLink local representatives for further instructions.

10.3.8 Battery manufacturers perform an initial forming charge at the factory before shipping flooded batteries (this is not the same as the full initial charge done upon installation – which is still required). The results of this initial charge are used to provide a “voltage match” which insures uniformity of individual cell voltages across an installed string. Upon shipment, a manufacturer color code is used to designate the cells and their boxes. Normally, all 24 cells within a string should have the same color (this is not always possible for single cell replacements). If the manufacturer ships different colors within a set of 24, they should be contacted about the issue to determine whether new cells are needed, or if the string can be installed with different color codes. Any responses from the Manufacturer shall be listed in the Job Log (RG 41- 0046).

Note: If a manufacturer does not provide a color code (one manufacturer currently does not), it can be assumed that the cell voltage matching requirement is met.

10.4 Flooded Lead Acid Type Battery Charging

Note: The manufacturers' requirements and procedures shall take precedence over this

table.

Total Hours of Charge at 2.38 - 2.50 Volts per Cell

Time on Open Circuit Less than or equal to four months

Greater than four months and less than or equal to six months

81°F and Above 100 Hours

150 Hours

65°-80°F 150 Hours

200 Hours

64°F and Less 200 Hours

250 Hours

10.4.1 The time on open circuit is to be determined from the “charge by” date on the shipping container. The “charge by” date is that date when battery has been on open circuit for six months. The Service Supplier shall notify the Design Engineer if this time period has been exceeded.

10.4.2 Cell temperature is measured at the open circuit voltage before initial charging begins.

10.4.3 Total charging time shall not exceed 250 hours. The Service Supplier shall notify the Design Engineer if this time period has been exceeded.



10-6

10.4.4 Battery Charging Procedure:

Upon Receipt of Batteries:

1. Obtain correct Battery Record Form (RG 47-0001). 2. Record Serial Number of each cell.

3. Record open cell voltage of each cell.

4. Record physical condition of each cell.

At the Start of Initial Charge:

1. Charging will begin after the first cell reaches -2.38 volts without any cell exceeding - 2.50 volts. The output of the charger shall not exceed -60 volts.

2. During normal work days, record the voltage of each cell on Form RG 47-0001. 3. Charge the battery string for 100 – 250 hours.

At the Completion of Initial Charge:

1. The battery string voltage shall be between -57.12 and -60 volts (for a nominal -48V plant) or 28.56 to 30 Volts (for a nominal 24V plant).

2. Reduce the charge to the “float voltage” (preferably -52.80V or 26.40 for nominal 48V and 24V plants using 1.215 specific gravity long duration cells) of the existing power plant.

3. Wait 24 hours after reducing to float and recheck the average cell voltage (each nominal 1.215 specific gravity cell should measure between –2.14V and –2.27V per cell).

4. Contact the Local Power or Central Office Technician for acceptance.

Notes:

1. Charge procedures recommended in manufacturer's literature may be used in place of these.

2. Towards the end of initial charge (approximately 100 hours or more),

individual cell readings for any single cell should remain constant for 3 successive hourly readings of that cell (that should be true of every cell).

10.5 Initial Charge and Turnover Requirements for Flooded Cells

10.5.1 Before stopping the initial charge, record the following:

• Total hours of charge.

• Presence or absence of crystals for each cell.

10.5.2 Cells/battery shall not be handled, other than voltage readings, during boost /initial charge or for 48 hours thereafter.



10-7

10.5.3 After a satisfactory initial charge, there should be no lead-sulfate crystals or gray coloration present on the positive plates or straps when examined with a nonmetallic flashlight. Normally only the positive strap will be accessible for examination. In some arrangements the edges of the positive plates will also be visible. The visible positive elements shall be black or dark brown and totally free of any diamond-like crystals or gray coloration. The disappearance of crystals normally occurs in three distinct phases:

• Phase 1: Black and crystalline

• Phase 2: Gray and lightly crystalline

• Phase 3: Black or dark brown and crystal free

10.5.4 The disappearance of crystals or gray coloration occurs from top to bottom during initial charge. To ensure total absence of crystals or gray coloration, inspection for crystals should be concentrated at the bottom of the positive plate vertical columns. Crystals can readily be seen on the positive plate. Use a flashlight held close to the jar wall at an angle of approximately 45 degrees to inspect for crystals. The lead-sulfate crystals will appear as sparkling diamond-like reflecting particles or as a gray coloration on the normally black positive plates

10.5.5 Cells which are not free of crystals after the initial charge may be shorted. If some cells are still crystalline after initial charge, it is recommended that the battery string be continued on boost charge at -2.38 to -2.50 volts for a total charge time not to exceed 250 hours FOR BOTH CHARGES. If charging fails to clear the crystals within 250 hours, the cells should be referred to the CenturyLink Power Design Engineer.

10.5.6 For cells shipped dry, follow the same requirements for the end of the initial charge as outlined above.

10.5.7 The float voltage for nominal 1.125 specific gravity cells shall be either -2.17 or - 2.20 Volts per cell average (in rare cases approved by the Power Maintenance Engineer, it can be set between those levels), depending on power plant configuration. Some older nominal -48 VDC power plants cannot easily have the float voltage raised to -52.8 V due to HVSD settings and other considerations. Nominal -48 VDC or 24 VDC power plants that will not function with a float voltage of -2.20 volts per cell are generally configured at the traditional -2.17 volts per cell , but may be configured at a slightly higher average voltage if the plant will allow.

10.5.8 Specific Gravity = 1.215 ±0.010 (high gravity UPS and engine-start batteries will have gravities such as 1.250, 1.280, 1.30, etc .

10.5.9 Electrolyte Level Adjustment

Electrolyte levels should be adjusted after the cells have been on two weeks of continuous float to maintain specific gravity of 1.215 ±0.010 (the± 0.10 applies to other specific gravities as well).



10-8

10.6 Initial Charge Procedures for Valve Regulated Lead Acid Cells

Note: The manufacturer's requirements and procedures shall be followed when

installing and charging VRLA batteries. As a general rule, VRLA batteries should not be charged above normal float voltages for initial charge, boost charge, or any other reason. Any questions not answered by the manufacturer or documentation shall be referred to the CenturyLink Power Design Engineer or CenturyLink NROC Power Maintenance Engineer.

10.6.1 The float voltage shall be between -2.25 to -2.28 volts per cell unless otherwise required by the manufacturer.

10.6.2 All VRLA battery installations shall be -48v nominal or +/-24v nominal.

Caution: Served equipment must be able to tolerate voltages up to -54.8 volts

(+2.0 volts).

10.6.3 Provide ventilation to avoid buildup of explosive hydrogen gas. 10.7 Charge Procedures for Lead Acid Cells Stored for Reuse Applications

10.7.1 Lead-acid batteries shall not be stored longer than 6 months without a freshening charge (48 hrs at 2.37 V/cell for flooded cells, and 48 hours at 2.33 V/cell for VRLA batteries). If they are stored longer than 6 months, or the time of storage since the last charge is unknown, take voltage readings. If the voltage of a cell (or average per cell in the case of a monoblock) is less than 2.01 for VRLA cells or 1.93 for a flooded cell, the battery is probably bad, and the procedures of Section 12.4 should be followed for disposal. Special exceptions should be discussed with the CenturyLink Power Maintenance Engineer and the battery manufacturer.

10.8 Electrolyte Spills Reference: Chapter 12, “Hazardous Material Handling.”

Whenever a spill of electrolyte occurs, the Service Supplier shall:

10.8.1 Take steps to stop the flow of electrolyte.

10.8.2 Contain the flow of electrolyte by using a spill kit.

10.8.3 Take steps to neutralize any electrolyte coming in contact with the body.

10.8.4 Seek medical attention if necessary.

10.8.5 Report the incident immediately to UNICALL at 1-800-654-2525 when the spill has been contained.



10-9

10.9 Installation/Removal Requirements for Lithium-based Batteries

10.9.1 Lithium-based batteries do not generally need an initial charge unless specified by the manufacturer.

10.9.2 Ensure that any alarms available from the batteries are hooked up and working to either the plant, or an external alarm device. If they report to the plant, ensure that the plant forwards those alarms (can be part of a generic major or minor) to an external alarm reporting device.

10.9.3 Follow the manufacturer recommendations for storage (may require insertion of a storage plug, protection of terminals, turning off a switch, etc.).

10.9.4 If the internal LVD has operated (no charge current will flow into the battery, and the voltage is 39.5 V or less on a nominal -48 V battery) due to an excessively long storage time, contact the manufacturer for reset procedures (may require shipment back to the manufacturer in some cases).

10.9.5 Lithium-based batteries do not require ventilation or spill containment.

10.9.6 Ensure that the batteries are strapped down in their tray or otherwise securely mounted to the relay rack (for those batteries with mounting ears) in heavy seismic zone COs.

10.10 Installation Requirements for Nickel-based Batteries

10.10.1 Follow manufacturer recommendations for initial charging of Ni-Cad and NiMH batteries, if such charging is recommended by the manufacturer.

10.10.2 Ensure that the permanent rectifier/charger for NiMH batteries is designed for those batteries per the manufacturer recommendations.

10.10.3 For flooded Ni-Cad batteries, ensure that a spill kit designed for alkaline batteries is available on site. Such a spill kit will contain an acidic neutralizer, as opposed to the alkaline baking soda used for lead-acid batteries. Place a sign on the room door and near the batteries stating that baking soda is not to be used for neutralization of alkaline batteries.

10.10.4 Note that storage times without freshening charges for Nickel-based batteries are half of what they are for lead-acid batteries. This means that the maximum storage interval at 77 degrees Fahrenheit without a freshening charge is 3 months. Follow manufacturer recommendations for freshening charges.

10.10.5 Perform a baseline conductance test with a Midtronics test set on NiMH batteries approximately 1 week after they have been installed and placed on float charge. Write down the values, the date the test was performed, the instrument it was performed with, and place the data in the battery log book of the site.

10.10.6 Number the batteries and strings as would be done for lead-acid batteries.

10.10.7 Write the installation date on each battery.


Chapter 11 Bonding and Grounding

TOC 11-i


11. Bonding and Grounding ...............................................................................11-1

11.1 General Requirements .......................................................................11-1 11.2 Central Office and Facility Main Ground Systems .......................11-2 11.3 Grounding Frames, Bays and Cabinets ..........................................11-2 11.4 Equipment Chassis Shield and Quiet Grounding

Connections ........................................................................................11-3 11.5 Isolated and Integrated (Non-Isolated) Grounding Systems .....11-4 11.6 Circuit Pack Storage Cabinets ......................................................... 11-4 11.7 Foreign Object Grounding ...............................................................11-4 11.8 Raised Floor Environments ..............................................................11-5 11.9 Radio Site Ground System ................................................................11-6 11.10 Standby Engines and Engine Room Equipment .......................... 11-7



11-1

11. Bonding and Grounding

Note: It is required that a current copy of CenturyLink TP 77355, “Grounding Central Office and Remote Equipment Environments,” be present on site and available for use on any job that includes grounding. Any issues not addressed in this chapter are to be found and followed in Tech Pub 77355. Note that there are two primary grounding schemes in use in CenturyLink buildings: Bell System isolated-integrated, and independent telco PANI. Both are valid systems and the one in use in that building already should be followed. Tech Pub 77355 provides much greater detail on each of these systems.

The PEG standard configurations/models of some specific types of equipment and CenturyLink Drawing Standards may supersede some requirements identified in this chapter.


11.1.1 All grounding conductors shall be run exposed and supported to existing cable rack, hangers, or suitable framework using nylon/plastic tie wraps or 9 ply cord.

11.1.2 Grounding conductors 1/0 AWG and smaller may be secured directly to the side of cable racks, or run along walls and secured at 18” intervals.

11.1.3 Grounding conductors larger than 1/0 AWG shall be suspended on and secured to cable hangers or run along walls and secured at 18” intervals. Cable hangers shall be placed at eighteen-inch intervals.

11.1.4 Grounding conductors shall not be run within cable racks or attached to AC conduit.

11.1.5 Grounding conductors, bonds and taps to ground conductors shall be preferably arranged to flow fault currents in the direction of the OPGPB, MGB PANI Bar, or ground source. This rule does not apply to buss bar assemblies.

11.1.5.1 180 degree bends in grounding conductors are not permitted.

11-2



5

11.1.7 In general, all low frequency (< 1 MHz) shielded wires within the CO should only be grounded at the termination end going forward. Some older timing cables may be grounded at the source end, but it is required going forward to ground them at the termination end (when the GPS timing receiver and the timing distribution shelf are integrated) to prevent lightning propagation into the office in sites with outdoor GPS antennas. For cables running between the isolated and integrated planes, the termination end is in the isolated plane.

11.1.8 All chassis, shield, and equipment ground bonds may be made using a solderless wrapped connection, a soldered connection, or single hole ring type crimped connector mounted to a properly prepared surface of the frame, bay, or cabinet with suitable hardware and shakeproof lock washer. The placement of the lock washer shall be between the head of the securing device and the connector, not between the connector and the contact surface.

11.1.9 Frame ground connectors, chassis, shield, and equipment bonds shall not be stacked one on top of the other under the same mounting hardware.

11.1.10 A grounding conductor should not be secured or supported by metallic clamps which completely encircle the conductor ( see girdling section 9.2.1 in Tech pub 77355).

11.1.11 Attachments to raceways shall only be made per the 2014 NEC Article 300.11B.

11.1.12 DC grounding conductors shall be run so that they are visible from the floor.

11.1.13 DC grounding conductors shall be run so that they may be accessible throughout their expected life. 11.2 Central Office and Facility Main Ground Systems

11.2.1 Refer to Tech Pub 77355, primarily Chapters 3, 5, and 9 for the design requirements of CO Ground systems.

11.2.2 Any PVC sleeves used for running grounding cables through floors shall extend four inches above and two inches below floor levels and be properly firestopped. See Chapter 4,” Cable Holes, Penetrations, and Fire/Smoke Protection.”

11.3 Grounding Frames, Bays and Cabinets

11.3.1 See CenturyLink Tech Pub 77355 for additional information and requirements.

11.3.2 All ground connections shall be secure.

11-3



11.3.3 All contact surfaces shall be cleaned and treated with a non-oxidizing agent.

11.3.4 Frame, bay, and/or stand extension supports (extenders) shall be bonded to the frame with a minimum 6 AWG conductor that shall not contain bends exceeding 90 degrees.

11.3.5 Frame support pipes shall not be used for frame grounds. If necessary, the installer shall contact the Design Engineer to arrange for the necessary material to provide a proper 2 AWG stranded, insulated, copper conductor, supported on hangers, extending the full length of the line-up.

11.3.6 Frame, bay and/or stand extension supports (extenders) shall be bonded to the frame with a minimum 6 AWG conductor that shall not contain bends exceeding 90 degrees. 11.4 Equipment Chassis Shield and Quiet Grounding Connections

11.4.1 Chassis and shield grounds may be made using single-hole crimped compression connectors or by wire wrapping to an approved wire-wrap terminal. If a manufacturer provides a termination for a chassis, shield, or quiet ground, that bond shall be made. NEBS tested self-tapping screws and/or tooth- type lock washers are also approved for chassis grounding connections.

11.4.2 In general, all low frequency (< 1 MHz) shielded wires within the CO should only be grounded at the termination end. Some older timing cables may be grounded at the source end, but it is required to ground them at the termination end (when the GPS timing receiver and the timing distribution shelf are integrated) to prevent lightning propagation into the office in sites with outdoor GPS antennas. For cables running between the isolated and integrated planes, the termination end is in the isolated plane. 11.5 Isolated and Integrated (Non-Isolated) Grounding Systems

11.5.1 See chapter 8 and section 9.9 of Tech Pub 77355 for specific design requirements for isolated ground planes.

11.5.1.1 A two-inch air separation or approved insulator is required between a member associated with any integrated (or non-isolated) ground system and a member of any isolated ground system.

11.5.2 All frames, bays, and cabinets installed in an isolated ground plane shall have a low voltage (resistance) and a high voltage (breakdown) test applied prior to the installation of the frame ground conductor or any other cabling to assure that the frame is truly insulated. The results must appear in the test record documentation required to be turned over to the B&C representative at the completion of the job. Refer also to Chapter 13, Par. 13.4.6 and Chapter 14.12 RG 47-0157 - Cable Test Record.

11-4



11.5.2.1 Two wraps of sheet fiber paper/protective tubing or other approved insulator shall be used to isolate conduit and other members of the isolated ground plane from different grounding systems. Isolation material shall extend 2 inches on either side of the point of incidence.

11.5.3 Isolated Conduit and Alternating Current Equipment Ground (ACEG)

11.5.3.1 The continuity of metallic conduit providing AC service to an isolated ground plane shall not be broken by an air gap or insulating coupling.

11.5.3.2 In a traditional RBOC isolated-integrated ground plane system that includes a ground window, the continuity of metallic conduit used for the routing of DC alarms and low voltage lighting control lead(s) into an isolated ground plane environment shall be broken by an air gap or insulating coupling when the conduit is not routed through the ground window and bonded to the main ground bus of that ground window.

11.6 Circuit Pack Storage Cabinets

11.6.1 Circuit pack storage cabinets located or placed in lineups with SPCS equipment shall be insulated from the integrated environment and bonded to the isolated ground.

11.6.2 Circuit pack storage cabinets that do not meet Paragraph 11.6.1 restrictions, that are located within six feet of an isolated ground plane, shall be bonded to the Foreign Object Ground (FOG) system that goes to either the integrated side of the ground window in an isolated-integrated office, or to the N section of a PANI bar in those types of offices.

11.6.3 Circuit pack storage cabinets that do not meet the requirements of Paragraph 11.6.1 or 11.6.2 shall be grounded to the central office grounding system. 11.7 Foreign Object Grounding

Metallic Members of the integrated ground plane located within six feet of metallic members of the isolated ground plane shall be bonded to the Integrated portion of the Ground Window/Single Point Ground (SPG, MGB) in isolated-integrated offices, or to the N (non-isolated) section of the PANI MGB or FGB in offices with a PANI grounding system. Steps shall be taken to ensure that there is electrical continuity between members of the nearby metal mass, verifiable by a reading of less than 0.1-ohm resistance, measured between metallic members. If the reading is greater than 0.1 ohm across junctions, then the metal objects shall be deliberately bonded.

11-5



11.7.1 In areas adjacent to, and within 6 feet of, Isolated Ground Plane Systems the Service Supplier shall ensure that Foreign Object Ground paths are not disturbed. If equipment and ironwork that is Foreign Object Grounded is removed, the Service Supplier shall ensure that ground paths are properly reestablished to remaining equipment and ironwork.

11.7.2 Metallic objects that are commonly found within the six-foot radius of an Isolated ground plane are listed, but not limited to: tip and ring cable racks, power cable racks, cable rack screening and panning, auxiliary framing including support rods and earthquake bracing, conduits, AC service panels, lighting fixtures, HVAC ducts, alarm panels, desks and cabinets, facility and radio equipment frames.

11.7.3 Care shall be taken to limit environmental contamination caused by dust, drilling, and or paint removal. Whenever possible, this work shall be performed outside the equipment area or before the installation of isolated ground plane equipment. If the work shall be done near the switch or other working equipment, then steps shall be taken to collect all dust, paint chips, and metal bits. The use of a HEPA vacuum cleaner and proper equipment protection such as canvas tarps, insulating blankets, or masonite is required.

11.7.4 Where frames or lineups are added to new or existing isolated ground plane environments, the Service Supplier is required to provide the foreign object grounding. Some isolated ground plane environments may not have existing foreign object grounding. In these instances, the Service Supplier is required to extend a stranded insulated conductor from the area above the isolated to the integrated portion of the ground window (or the N section of the nearest PANI bar), and bond metallic members within six feet of the added equipment.

11.7.5 Objects in the integrated ground plane may be extended individually to the integrated portion of the ground window (or the N section of the nearest PANI bar) or may be collectively referenced through a foreign object ground bar which is connected to the integrated portion of the ground window (or the N section of the nearest PANI bar) with a minimum 2 AWG stranded insulated conductor. It shall be permissible to branch 6 AWG conductors from the 2 AWG conductor to bond individual items. 11.8 Raised Floor Environments This section generally refers to floor supported equipment cabinets on a raised floor air plenum, each cabinet equipped with one or more integral regulated power supply units served by a cord connected to AC service.

11-6



11.8.1 Raised floor area cabinets (i.e., processor boxes, expansion cabinets, peripherals, communications cabinets, a floor mounted AC distribution centers[PDUs], and floor mounted air handling equipment) [CRAC units]) shall be grounded to the raised floor grid using a flat braided strap to the nearest floor grid-work structure. This arrangement provides the necessary high frequency return path and minimizes the difference of potential throughout the complex. The raised floor grid shall be connected to the site ground system. 11.8.2 All connections to the equipment cabinets and the raised floor metallic grid shall be made with two-hole crimped copper lugs.

11.8.3 Each cabinet shall be connected to an AC supply system by means of an electrical cord equipped with an ACEG conductor (green wire).

11.8.4 AC outlets under raised floors used to provide permanent service to AC-fed equipment shall be NEMA-locking type.

11.8.5 Alternating current outlet boxes shall be NEMA-spec and metal to reduce noise.

11.8.6 In no case shall the ACEG be routed between the computer cabinets and the AC power service cabinet in other than cord and AC branch circuit raceway. 11.9 Radio Site Ground System

11.9.1 The primary interior ring ground conductor in a radio site (or any other site where an interior ring/halo is used) shall be supported to the interior walls at two foot intervals and shall be constructed at either the seven foot or nine foot level, depending on the height of equipment frames.

11.9.2 All frames, bays, cabinets, cable rack sections, auxiliary framing, conduits, vents, metal doors/frames, and other metallic objects within six feet of the radio equipment area shall be bonded to the ring ground system.

11.9.3 All microwave radio equipment frames, bays, and cabinets shall be bonded at or near the top of each side or upright to the supplementary ring conductor. Individual bonds should be formed flowing toward the wave-guide hatch plate(s) in opposite directions. It shall be permissible to use a single conductor bonded to each upright and connected in the middle to the supplementary conductor.



11-7

11.10 Standby Engines and Engine Room Equipment

11.10.1 Bonds shall be placed around flexible metallic conduits that are terminated with mechanical connectors. Flexible sections in exhaust and fuel pipe systems shall also be connected on both sides to the grounding system or have a bond strap around them.

11.10.2 A 6 AWG bond shall be placed across flexible non-metallic sections of raceway.


Chapter 12 Central Office Equipment Removals, Installs

and the Proper Handling of Hazardous Materials

TOC 12-i


12. Central Office Equipment Removals, Installs and the Proper Handling of Hazardous Materials .............................................................. 12-1

12.1 Introduction ......................................................................................... 12-1 12.2 The independent contractor is responsible for ............................... 12-1 12.3 Equipment Bays And Mercury- Containing Equipment ............. 12-1 12.4 Batteries- Flooded Lead Acid ............................................................ 12-2 12.5 PCB-containing Capacitors And Ballasts ....................................... 12-3 12.6 Radioactive Tubes ............................................................................... 12-3 12.7 Fluorescent Light Tubes .................................................................... 12-3 12.8 Asbestos Floor Tile ............................................................................. 12-4 12.9 Spills and Emergencies ...................................................................... 12-4 12.10 Radiography/X-Ray .......................................................................... 12.5

Tables

12-1 Quick Reference Guide for Hazardous Materials by Facility Type ......... 12-6

12-2 Environmental, Health & Safety Departmental Contact List ................... 12-7


Chapter 12 Central Office Equipment Removals, Installs

and the Proper Handling of Hazardous Materials

12-1

12. Central Office Equipment Wreckouts and Installs: Hazardous Materials

12.1 Introduction

Equipment that is removed from the CenturyLink network pending retirement and/or removal of service will be designated per par. 8.19.2. When handling hazardous materials, waste materials, and equipment, the contractor is expected to comply with all applicable local, state, and federal environmental and transportation laws, regulations and ordinances.

The intent of this chapter is to make clear what activities the contractor is responsible for performing, and to alert the contractor to potentially hazardous materials present in the central office and in the switch equipment.

12.2 The CenturyLink Supplier is responsible for:

12.2.1 Compliance with applicable local, state, and federal environmental and safety laws, regulations and ordinances.

12.2.2 Development and implementation of their own environmental and safety programs.

12.2.3 Coordinating and ensuring compatibility of their safety, health, and environmental programs with other employers, including CenturyLink, when other employers are present at the workplace.

12.2.4 Prompt correction of all violations of applicable environmental and safety regulations within the scope of the independent contractor’s work.

12.2.5 Indemnifying and holding CenturyLink harmless from any and all environmental, health and safety liabilities assessed against the independent contractor or CenturyLink as a result of the contractor’s conduct.

12.2.6 Being aware of and adhering to the CenturyLink Safety and Loss Prevention Program.

12.3 Equipment Bays and Mercury-Containing Equipment

During a Central Office equipment replacement/removal/reuse, the Material Review Form (MRF) will determine how the central office equipment will be handled and its final disposition. Questions regarding equipment disposition should be directed to the Design Engineer assigned to that central office location.

12.3.1 THERE IS TO BE NO PURGING (REMOVING) OF MERCURY COMPONENTS OR OTHER HAZARDOUS COMPONENTS AT THE CENTRAL OFFICE. The only exception to this is glass tubes containing krypton or radium; these should be removed and placed in appropriate containers for transport.

Chapter 12 Central Office Equipment Removals, Installs and the Proper Handling of Hazardous Materials


12-2

12.3.2 It is the contractor's responsibility to ensure that the equipment removed is properly loaded to ensure that no damage occurs during transport. In addition, the equipment bays and frames must be adequately protected from weather and sunlight before the shipment is sent.

• They must be loaded to ensure that no components of the bay or frame become separated from the bay/frame.

• There must be no damage to the switch equipment during transport. 12.4 Batteries - Flooded Lead Acid

12.4.1 The Service Supplier performing the installation and/or removal may be moving flooded lead acid batteries within the same building - from their operating location to a pallet or to a specific part of the building. Flooded lead-acid batteries that are ready to be shipped off-site (anywhere outside of the building) are moved and packaged only by certain contractors specifically approved by CenturyLink. If the batteries are going to the designated recycling facility or to another CenturyLink facility location, they are only to be moved by the contractor specifically hired for moving wet batteries.

12.4.2 Currently, there is one main flooded battery transporter that should be used. This contractor’s employees are specifically trained in moving, packaging, labeling, and transporting flooded batteries. Contact your Environmental Manager for information on this company or the Menlo Worldwide representative at 1-800-387-8048 or online ([email protected]). When arranging movement of batteries from one CenturyLink facility to another, the Service Supplier shall complete a Menlo Shipment Request Form and list the Project Number of the job installing the batteries and the location of the new site. The Supplier will forward the completed Menlo Shipment Request Form via email to Menlo Worldwide ([email protected]) or 800-387-8048 listed on the bottom of the form. This form can be obtained from Menlo. Make sure to note that batteries are for reuse and are considered Hazardous Material.

12.4.3 VRLA Battery Removals/Transportation

Removal and transportation requirements are different for Valve Regulated battery technologies. These batteries have an electrolyte that has been immobilized with some type of component or process, and do not present the same hazards as a flooded cell battery. These batteries can be transported for short distances to another site or shipping location. When transporting or arranging for transport of VRLA batteries, the following process applies:

1. If the batteries are reusable, they can be transported by any company or carrier if they are below the Dept. of Transportation (DOT) limit and comply

mailto:[email protected]




12-3

with DOT regulations. Appropriate safety procedures in handling and securing batteries for transport must be followed. The batteries must be transported using a standard Menlo Shipping Request Form. The proper shipping name for VRLA batteries is: Batteries, Wet, Non-Spillable, 8, UN2800, PGIII

2. If the batteries are no longer useful, the batteries may still be transported by any company or carrier to a consolidation point at another site if they are below the Dept. of Transportation (DOT) limit and comply with DOT regulations, or by making arrangements for pickup at the facility by contacting the Shipment Management Center (SMC). The batteries must be transported using a Menlo Shipment Request Form. The proper shipping name for VRLA batteries is: Batteries, Wet, Non- Spillable, 8, UN2800, PGIII.

12.4.3.1 VRLA Battery Removals/Transportation

If other types of batteries requiring recycling/disposal, please contact the Local State Environmental Health & Safety (EHS) for procedural requirements.

12.5 PCB-containing Capacitors And Ballasts

Small capacitors and light ballasts manufactured through 1978 may contain PCBs (polychlorinated biphenyls). Capacitors and ballasts should not be removed from the equipment bay. 12.6 Radioactive Tubes

These tubes are glass, usually painted black or purple, and range in size from 1 to 3 inches. See Table 12-1.

These are normally removed from the equipment bay to avoid any breakage during transport. (These tubes are the only hazardous component that is allowed to be removed at the central office before transport.) When removed, they should be properly packaged so that no damage occurs during transport. 12.7 Fluorescent Light Tubes

If the Service Supplier removes any fluorescent light tubes, these should be properly packaged and sent to a recycler that meets all environmental health and safety requirement and identified in the scope of work of the independent contractor. The contractor is responsible for proper packaging to ensure that the tubes do not break during transport. Alternately, these light tubes may be stored at the Central Office in a cardboard box of the proper size, and picked up directly by the CenturyLink transporter for shipment to one of our approved lamp recyclers. Check with the state Environmental Manager if you have any questions.



12-4

12.8 Asbestos Floor Tile

During central office equipment installs, the contractor may be drilling or handling floor tiles. The floor tiles in many buildings may contain asbestos. Since the regulations governing the removal of asbestos containing materials vary by state, contact should be made with the state Environmental Manager before disturbing any potential asbestos containing materials. The independent contractor must follow all applicable safety, health and environmental regulations governing asbestos- containing materials.

The contractor is expected to properly bag and label asbestos-containing floor tile that he/she generates, and to contact the state Environmental Manager to arrange for disposal at the proper facility.

During an equipment removal, no asbestos-containing materials should be removed from equipment bays.

Other asbestos-containing building materials that the contractor may encounter include: • Spray-on fireproofing

• Transit walls, siding, ceilings

• Insulating material on boilers, chillers, pipes, air plenums, ducts, piping, steam tunnels, mechanical rooms

• Roofing materials

• Telephone conduit

Information regarding friable asbestos-containing building materials can be found in the asbestos management plan posted at each facility. 12.9 Spills and Emergencies

In the event of spills or leaks of hazardous materials, the spill will be immediately contained and cleaned up in order to minimize impact. The contractor will follow all applicable laws, rules, and regulations regarding management of the spill. They will also follow their own company’s existing safety and environmental procedures and practices to ensure the safety of their own personnel and others that may be present.

In the event of a spill, it should be reported to UNICALL at 1-800-654-2525. The state Environmental Managers can also be contacted through the UNICALL number. Refer to Table 12-2.



12-5

12.10 Radiography/x-ray

12.10.1 Prior to starting work, the service supplier must visually survey the building and the proposed work area for personnel exposure, floor by floor, and notify all persons about the potential for exposure to radiation and to assure that the exposure area is clear of personnel for the duration of the work.

12.10.2 Prior to starting work, the service supplier must post warning signage on exterior doors or at safe perimeter distances from the exposure area to warn personnel.

12.10.3 During each radiographic operation the service supplier shall maintain continuous direct visual surveillance of the operation to protect against unauthorized entry into a high radiation area.

12.10.4 The service supplier shall make the above a part of the MOP and include the methodology to be employed.

12.10.5 The service supplier shall be aware of and adhere to the Code of Federal Regulations (CFR) covering the work operations and refer to them in the MOP.



12-6

Table 12-1: Quick Reference Guide for Hazardous Materials by Facility

Analog ESS

Digital ESS

Power Trans Equip.

Radio Sites

CEVs, Huts, Etc.

Customer Premise

MERCURY Relays Mercury Vapor Tubes Ringing Machines Circuit Packs

X

X

X

X

X

X X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X PCBs Ballasts/ Transformer

X

X

X

X

X

X

X RADIO- ACTIVE TUBES

X

X

X

X

X

ASBESTOS Resistors Washers Floor Tiles Sheet Heat Shield Black Fuse Panels

X X

X

X

X X X

X

X

X X X

X X X

X

X

X

X

X

BATTERIES Lead Acid/ Gel Cells Other Types

X

X

X X

X

X X

X X

X X

LEAD Cable Sleeves Battery Straps

X X

X X

X

X X

X X

X

X X

X

X X

X

MISC. Solvents, Paints, CFCs, Etc.

X X X X X X X



12-7

Table 12-2: Environmental, Health & Safety Departmental Contact List

Name Title Phone Numbers Email Jennifer Scarpino Director,

EHS/Disaster Recovery

(407) 889-1531 Office (321) 289-2720 Mobile

[email protected]

Gerard Breen Regional Environmental Manager, (IL, MN, ND, NE, SD, WI)

(612) 798-2424 Office (612) 798-2451 Fax (612) 275-8352 Mobile

[email protected]

Matthew Brunkow Regional Environmental Manager, (AZ, NM)

(602) 630 4444 Office (602) 630-4437 Fax (602) 400 8932 Mobile

[email protected]

David Burk Regional Environmental Manager, (IA, IN, KS, MI, MO, OH)

(660) 235-1484 Office (602) 235-3311 Fax (602) 576-3668 Mobile (877) 867-9631 Pager

[email protected]

Bob Harding Regional Environmental/ Health/Safety Field Operations Manager/Field Supt.

(919) 562-2810 Office (919) 980-0474 Mobile

[email protected]

Stephanie Miller Regional Environmental/ Health/Safety Manager, CO, OK

(303) 441-6159 Office (501) 680-8141 Mobile

[email protected]

Kevin Robison Regional Environmental Manager CA, ID,MT, NV,


[email protected]








12-8

Table 12-2: Environmental, Health & Safety Departmental Contact List (con’t)

Joe Robertson Environmental/ Health/Safety Manager OR,WA

(253) 372-5184 Office (425) 495-6904 Mobile

[email protected]

Ed Clement Environmental/ Health/Safety Manager – Global Hosting and Data Center Operations

(913) 353-7290 Office (913) 707-8373 Mobile

[email protected]

Clarence Watson Environmental/ Health/Safety Manager AL, AR, LA, MS, TX

(501) 241-6351 Office (318) 282-7230 Mobile

[email protected]

Jennifer Scarpino Environmental/ Health/Safety Manager FL

(407) 889-1531 Office (321) 289-2720 Mobile

[email protected]

Harlan Pincus Regional Environmental/ Health/Safety Manager (CT, DC, DE, KY, MA, MD,


[email protected]


Chapter 13 Documentation

TOC-13i


13. Documentation ...............................................................................................13-1

13.1 General.................................................................................................13-1 13.2 Forms List ............................................................................................13-1 13.3 Electronic Job Packet..........................................................................13-2 13.4 Contents of Job Packet .......................................................................13-3 13.5 Job Log .................................................................................................13-4 13.6 Job Completion or Extension Reporting RG 47-0002 ....................13-4 13.7 Job Information Memorandum (JIM) RG 47-0004 .........................13-5 13.8 Service Interruption/Degradation Report RG 47-0013 ................13-6 13.9 Request For Disposition of CenturyLink Communications Material RG47-0010 ............................................................................13-6 13.10 Test Records ........................................................................................13-7

13-1

13. Documentation

Note: Only CenturyLink Forms shall be used. Forms requirements applicable to MOP’s, Change Management, and Acceptance testing for NNS facilities are not covered in this chapter as they are generated, completed, maintained and distributed solely by NNS Field Operations personnel.

13.1 General

The Service Supplier shall be responsible for the accurate completion and distribution of all current versions applicable forms and documents, including those specified in Chapter 12, “Central Office Equipment Removals, Installs and the Proper Handling of Hazardous Materials.” The CenturyLink forms listed in this section shall be complete, legible, accurate, in ink and used without any alteration (except where specifically noted in this and other sections).

Note: CenturyLink LPEC personnel are allowed to use equivalent electronic versions of all required forms that are currently available in CenturyLink’s internal Installation Order Tracking (IOT) system. The CenturyLink LPEC installation representative is responsible for ensuring that all information from the paper version of each form can be recorded on the IOT version as well.

13.2 Forms List

Form Number Description TP 77350 Ref. Par.

RG 33-0017 Straight Bill of Lading (BOL) 14.1 RG 33-0043 Document and Material Disposition 14.2 RG 41-0046 Job Log 14.3 RG 41-0170 Installation Alarm Assignment and Capacity Sheet 14.4 RG 41-0173 Alarm/OSS Testing Incompletion Tag 2.7.1.1; 8.26 RG 47-0001 Storage Battery Report 14.5 RG 47-0002 Installation Revised /Completion Notice 14.8 RG 47-0004 Job Information Memorandum 14.11 RG 47-0005 Method of Procedure Page 1 14.12 RG 47-0009 Report of Equipment Disconnected from Existing Plant 14.16 RG 47-0010 Request for Disposition of CenturyLink Communications 14.17 RG 47-0013 Service Interruption / Degradation Report 14.19 RG 47-0130* Frame Upright Equipment Designation Label 8.1, 8.22 RG 47-0131* Base Plate or Cover Equipment Designation Label 8.1, 8.22



13-2

Forms List (con’t)

RG 47-0132* Cable Hole Open Label 4.8 RG 47-0133* Fire Stopped Cable Hole Label 4.8 RG 47-0145 Competitive Local Exchange Carrier (CLEC) Report 14.14

RG 47-0157 Test Record (COE) 14.20 RG 47-0160 CLEC Provisioning Form 14.22 RG 47-0161 Quality Checklist 14.18 RG 47-0162 Detailed Method of Procedure (Switching and Switching-

related Power) 14.33

RG 47-0165 Central Office Common Systems Order Form 14.33 RG 47-0166 Job Site Material Inventory for Missing Items 14.34 RG 47-0168 Application for Letter of Deviation 14.35 RG 47-0169 Letter of Deviation 14.36 No form no. CenturyLink Policy on Digital Image Capture in Central

2.2.1.9, 14.36

Forms 820; 821A-C; 822; 823A,B; 824A,B; 825A,B; 826A- C; 827; 828A,B; 829A,B; 840; 841; and 844

Turn-Up, Test and Acceptance Checklist forms: Generic; Power Room Lighting; Alarm and/or Power Monitor/Controller (PSMC); BDFB, Power Board, or Fuse Panel; Batteries & Battery Stands; Rectifier; Power/Battery Plant; Converter Plant; Residual Ring Plant; Inverters; UPS; Standby Engine; Transfer Switch and AC Service Entrance; Fuel Tank, Fuel System, and Fuel Monitor; Outside Plant Site; CO Grounding; PD Bus Bar & Cabling; Power Area Floor Plan; Power Documentation; CO PWR Equipment Inventory; BDFB/P BD Fuse/Breaker Assignment Record; Critical CO Power and Environmental Alarm Verification

14.37

REGN 154- 004-001RG

Environmental Equipment Notification – Batteries 14.37



13-3

13.3 Electronic Job Packet (EJP)

The Service Supplier shall be required to submit an electronic Job Packet (EJB) for all installation or removal activities where documentation and job is to be turned over to a CenturyLink Business & Consumer Markets Group (B&C).

13.3.1 The Electronic Job Packet (EJP) is obtained by accessing the CenturyLink Technical Publication website: http://www.centurylink.com/techpub/and selecting the from the “Technical Publication Forms” dropdown menu an Excel file entitled, “TP 77350 Iss. O Forms.” The Service Supplier shall complete all forms and information required within the contents of the workbook as defined by the scope of work detailed within the Job Specification.

13.3.2 It is permissible for the Service Supplier to modify the Excel file name to identify the Service Supplier’s company with the associated Job Specification number.

13.3.3 The EJP shall be emailed to the proper representative within the CenturyLink Work Management Center (WMC).

13.3.4 The Electronic Job Packet retention date shall be solely determined by CenturyLink. 13.4 Contents of the Electronic Job Packet (EJP)

The Electronic Job Packet shall contain, but is not necessarily limited to: 13.4.1 The most current release of the Work Package (WP - CenturyLink Engineering)*

13.4.2 The most current release of the Detailed Engineering Specification(s) **

13.4.3 All Methods Of Procedure (MOPs) related to job RG 47-0005 and RG 47-0006*

13.4.4 Job Start/Completion Checklist (RG47-0158) and Completion Notice (RG47- 0002).*

13.4.5 Job Log* (RG41-0046).

13.4.6 Test Records*: e.g., RG 47-0157 Test Record (COE)

13.4.7 Bills of Lading RG 33-0017 and the Request For Disposition of CenturyLink Communications Material RG 47-0010.

13.4.8 Job Information Memorandums RG 47-0004

13.4.9 All drawings/records (and any electronically-generated “installer marked” drawing/records) shall be identified and retained*. Refer also to Par. 8.18 for color and retention requirements.

13.4.10 Battery Charge Record RG 47-0001 (to be left as specified in Chapter 10).

13.4.11 Letters of Deviation (if issued).

13.4.12 Service Interruption / Degradation Report if problem occurred (RG47-0013).

13.4.13 Installation Alarm Assignment and Capacity Sheet (RG41-0170) and (if applicable) the Alarm/OSS Testing Incompletion tag (RG 41-0173).

http://www.centurylink.com/techpub/



13-4

13.4.14 Service Interruption Reporting , RG47-0163 (if problem occurred).

13.4.15 Job Site Material Inventory for Missing Items (RG 47-0166).

* Required on every job where applicable. ** Required on jobs engineered by other than CenturyLink (e.g., “Line Extension Contracted

Vendors”). 13.5 Job Log RG 41-0046

A Job Log in the format of the Suppliers choice shall be provided and will typically include, but not be limited to the following:

13.5.1 Deviations from the Specification or Standards approved by the Design Engineer.

13.5.2 Material shortages and impact on job progress.

13.5.3 Engineering changes.

13.5.4 Communications with Design or Field Engineers, Quality, , and B&C representatives, etc.

13.5.5 NMA Confirmation Log Number.

Note: This information will only be required on the RG 41-0170 Installation Alarm Assignment and Capacity Sheet and the Installation/Revised Completion Notice (RG 47-0002). Refer also to Par. 14.5.12.

13.5.6 Security or Safety Problems.

A copy of the Job Log shall be included in the Electronic Job Packet. 13.6 Job Completion or Extension Reporting RG 47-0002

The Service Supplier shall report the completion of a job on or before the day the job completes to CenturyLink on Form RG 47-0002, “Installation Revised/Completion Notice.”

13.6.1 The Service Supplier will contact the CenturyLink Field Engineering representative prior to actual job completion to schedule a completion walk through. The CenturyLink Field Engineering Representative will complete the walk through with the Service Supplier. During the walk though, the supplier will complete the “Job Completion Checklist (RG47-0158)”. The job will not be considered complete for payment purposes, until after the walk through, and the checklist is complete and accepted by an authorized CenturyLink Field Engineering or B&C representative. A copy of the “Job Completion Checklist (RG47-0158)” shall be given to the Service Supplier so that it can be included in the Electronic Job Packet, and the original forwarded to the Central Office Manager or designated CenturyLink representative authorizing the Installation Completion Notice (RG47-0002).



13-5

No payments to the Service Supplier will be made prior to the completion of this process. Non-compliance to this requirement will have serious consequences, which may result in the termination of the Service Supplier’s contract with CenturyLink. Service Suppliers shall then obtain B&C acceptance on RG 47-0002 prior to sending a final Completion Notice to the WMC. Advance or partial completion of the job shall also be reported on this form. A copy of the Job Completion Checklist RG47-0158 must also be forwarded to the WMC.

E-Mail: [email protected]

13.6.2 Service Supplier shall obtain the B&C Representative” signature on RG47-0002 prior to distribution of copies. The B&C Representative shall review the job and ensure that they have an accepted and complete “Job Completion Checklist (RG47-0158)”. The B&C Representative shall then mark and sign RG47-0002 as “Accepted” or “Not Accepted”, with appropriate comments.

13.6.3 One copy of this form (RG47-0002) shall be forwarded to Work Management Center (WMC). The WMC will do all distribution required by CenturyLink.

Note: Engineer, Furnish, and Install (EF&I) Service Suppliers shall obtain the “Installation Revised / Completion Notice”, RG47-0002 and “Job Completion Checklist” (RG47-0158). After they have been reviewed and accepted by the B&C Representative, the Services Supplier shall send approved RG47-0002 and RG47- 0158 directly to the appropriate Design Engineer for processing.

13.7 Job Information Memorandum (JIM) RG 47-0004

A JIM, RG 47-0004 is a formal publication issued by the Service Supplier to explain differences between actual job conditions and the engineering information provided. It may be used to request authorization for additional effort, but is not authorization for that effort. Additional effort shall be authorized only through the issuance of an Amendment to the original Job Specification referencing the JIM.

13.7.1 A JIM must include a specific detailed description of each additional work effort associated with a central office installation job. The JIM must include the exact number of hours required to complete each specific work effort. The additional work effort (and any additional hours) must be authorized in writing by the CenturyLink Design Engineer. In an emergency situation, the Design Engineer may authorize the work to begin with verbal authorization to be followed up with written authorization within 24 hours. The same specific detailed description and number of hours must be agreed to verbally by both the Design Engineer and Service Supplier. The cost of the JIM will be determined by the number of hours times the contracted loaded hourly rate of the Service Supplier.

13.7.2 If an identified problem requires issuing an Engineering Complaint, the installer shall issue a JIM stating the specifics and forward a copy to the Field Engineer. The Field Engineer will forward any problematic issues to the appropriate CenturyLink Subject Matter Expert (SME) for investigation.




13-6

13.7.3 The original copy of a JIM shall be forwarded to the WMC Analytical Associate (AA) who will be responsible for all CenturyLink distribution, and a copy of the JIM shall be left in the Electronic Job Packet. Refer to Par. 14.8.

13.8 Service Interruption / Degradation Report RG 47-0013

When a Service Interruption/ Degradation Report is required the Service Supplier shall notify the B&C site manager and Design Engineer. Copies of the report shall be sent to the B&C manager, Design Engineer, and the Electronic Job Packet. In addition, the Network Strategic Sourcing Construction Team Lead, 7800 E. Orchard, Ste. 450, Englewood, Colorado 80111 (FAX 303-224-1023), and the Regulatory Analysis and Interface Group, 700 West Mineral Ave., Room NEE29.22, Littleton, Colorado 80120 (FAX 303- 707- 2229) within 24 hours of the occurrence. The Service Supplier include the Planned Network Activity Registration (PNAR) number obtained from the CenturyLink Business & Consumer Markets Group (B&C) representative and include it in the report (refer also to Chapter 2, paragraph 2.9.8, Chapter 14, paragraph 14.13 and Chapter 15, paragraph 15.9).

13.9 Request For Disposition of CenturyLink Communications Material RG47-0010

13.9.1 When the Services Supplier needs to return excess Common Systems material to the warehouse, they shall complete RG47-0010, “Request For Disposition,” form. Service Supplier shall note the return quantity on the appropriate line of the form (material must be a complete unit). To arrange for pick-up the Service Supplier shall call the NAVL Agency for their geographical area. The following information shall be provided to the NAVL Agency.

Fireworks Project Job # Address ID/CLLI

The Service Supplier shall attach a copy of the completed form RG 47-0010 to each box before releasing excess material to the NAVL Agency at the point of pick-up.

NAVL Agencies shall warehouse all excess materials separate from inbound BVAPP materials. Upon receipt of the excess material, the NAVL Agency shall forward a copy of all RG 47-0010 forms to the On-Site CenturyLink / NAVL representatives.

CenturyLink / NAVL On-site representatives will provide direction for disposition of excess material to the NAVL Pack-and Hold Agency.

13.9.2 Warehouse or Transportation Claims Procedures

13.9.2.1 All claims will be processed by the pack-and-hold service center (303) 707-3108 or 3111.



13-7

13.9.2.2 Claims documentation Clearly write any damage or shortage on the delivery receipt. This includes damage such as “boxes crushed, punctured, wet, or damaged”.

Contact the pack-and-hold service center as soon as possible.

13.9.2.3 Documentation required:

• Copy of the delivery receipt

• Copy of the packing slip

• Statement concerning the circumstances

• Other documentation may be required

13.9.2.4 Damages, overages, and shortage may require material return process. You will be directed by the pack-and-hold service center.

13.9.3 To file a claim for common system material, complete the “Report of Unsatisfactory Shipment” on the back of the packing slip. Call the NPC expediter to reorder material and arrange for material return.

13.9.4 To release material from a warehouse or get a job status, call the NPC expediter.

13.9.5 To order common systems material, Service Supplier shall coordinate with the Design Engineer. Services Suppliers shall complete RG47-0010, and send a copy to the Design Engineer, and the NPC.

13.9.6 CenturyLink Design Engineering (Switch, IOF, and OSP) personnel will utilize NAVL pack-and-hold sites for non-Engineer, Furnish and Installed in each of the fourteen (14) states. The purpose of this is to aggregate and warehouse CenturyLink installation materials prior to final shipping to the CenturyLink installation sites. NAVL pack-and-hold sites will have a contractual 24-hour material receipt and / or release requirement.

13.10 Test Records

13.10.1 Test records shall include:

• Type of test performed

• Test equipment used

• Errors found, corrective action taken

• Person performing test

• Date(s) of test


Chapter 14 Documentation Forms

TOC 14-i

CONTENTS


14. Forms ................................................................................................................. 14-i 14.1 RG33-0017- Straight Bill of Lading (BOL) ......................................14-1 14.2 RG33-0043 - Document and Material Disposition .........................14-2 14.3 RG41-0046 - Installation Job Log ......................................................14-3 14.4 RG41-0170 - Installation Alarm Assignment and Capacity Sheet ................................................................................................... 14-4 14.5 RG47-0001 - Storage Battery Report ................................................14-5 14.6 RG47-0002 - Installation Revised/Completion Notice .................14-8 14.7 RG47-0004 - Job Information Memorandum (JIM) ......................14-11 14.8 RG47-0005 - General Method of Procedure (MOP) and CLEC MOP ........................................................................................14-12 14.9 RG47-0009 - Report of Equipment Disconnected from Existing Plant ....................................................................................14-16 14.10 RG47-0010 - Request for Disposition of CenturyLink Communication Material ................................................................14-17 14.11 RG47-0013 - Service Interruption/Degradation Report .............14-19 14.12 RG47-0157 - Cable Test Record ......................................................14-20 14.13 RG47-0160 - CLEC Provisioning Form ..........................................14-22 14.14 RG47-0161 – Quality Checklist ..................................................... 14.29 14.15 RG47-0162 - Detailed Method of Procedure (Switching and Switching-related Power) ...............................................................14-30 14.16 RG47-0165 - Central Office Common Systems Order Form ......14-33 14.17 RG47-01660 - Job Site Material Inventory for Missing Items .....14-34 14.18 RG47-0168 - Application for Letter of Deviation .........................14-35 14.19 RG47-0169 - Letter of Deviation .................................................... 14-36 14.20 CenturyLink Policy on Photography in Central Offices .............14-36 14.21 820/840 Series Forms for Power Equipment Turn-Up .............. 14-37 14.22 REGN-154-004-001RG Environmental Equipment Notification – Batteries ....................................................................14-37



14-1

14. CenturyLink Forms Introduction When completing ISP paperwork, the Service Supplier will use CenturyLink-approved forms. If used electronically, CenturyLink forms will not be altered by the Service Supplier. The intent of this chapter is to provide instruction for the Service Supplier on the proper completion and disposition of CenturyLink forms used when conducting installation services.

14.1 RG 33-0017 – Straight Bill Of Lading (BOL) 14.1.1 This form is used anytime material is shipped to or from a CenturyLink location. It identifies where the material is shipped from, where it is being shipped to, contains relevant accounting information, material identification and weight, the shipping originator, description of material and the carrier’s name.

14.1.2 Shipped From – List the complete Company name, the representative and city of origin. This form must include the street address, city, state and zip code.

14.1.3 Shipped To – Enter the Company name and the person in charge where the shipment is to be delivered. Please include street address, city, state and zip code.

14.1.4 Bill Information – Add the Cost Center (if known). If the shipment is being charged to a job, include the Engineer’s RC code (RC-O), job estimate number (RC-C) (Job ID, BAN, Estimate or Authorization), Fireworks Project Number, office and the percent of the cost charged to the job (%).The blocks identified in parentheses are recommended locations for the billing information to be placed.

14.1.5 Hazardous Material – The hazardous material section is only completed when required by the Department of Transportation. For specific requirements refer to CenturyLink Publication REGN 154-004-001RG. Refer to the section pertaining to the hazardous material being shipped.

14.1.6 No. of Packages– Number of cartons, bundles, pieces, cages, coils, reels, etc., being shipped.

14.1.7 Material Non-Hazardous – (a) Show type of container or package. Show actual National Motor Freight Classification description or item numbers. If not available, use descriptive language such as cable closures, hand tools, power tools, copper cable, wooden ladders, multiplexors, etc. (b) Include the Transportation log number.

14.1.8 Weight – It is important to show actual weight. Estimated weights should be used only when scales are not available.



14-2

14.1.9 Order Numbers – List all additional order numbers or invoices for material being shipped to consignee. Note: 14.2.6 through 14.2.9 are to be completed by the originator transporting the material.

14.1.10 Signature – Signature of the originator shipping the material.

14.1.11 Shipper Name – To be completed by the shipper. Include the shipper’s Company name, legible person’s name completing the BOL. Include telephone number and date.

14.1.12 Carrier Name – To be completed by the transporter. Include the transportation Company’s name, legible driver’s name and date.

14.1.13 Transferred To – To be completed by transporter. Include the carrier’s name, and legible name of person receiving material and date.

14.1.14 Received By – Legible name of person receiving the material and date.

Note: The installer keeps the golden rod-colored sheet. It is marked ‘Shipper’ at the bottom. Include in the job packet at the end of the job. The numbered tabs on the back of the form should be placed on the containers being shipped. This will allow the containers to be traceable to the Bill of Lading.

14.2 RG 33-0043 - Document and Material Disposition

14.2.1 Used when material and documents (e.g., equipment manuals and job packet documentation) are turned over to a central office representative or other CenturyLink representative. List the items and quantities of each item turned over.

14.2.2 DMD - Leave this field blank.

14.2.3 Date - Date the items were turned over to the CenturyLink Representative.

14.2.4 City, State - City and State where central office is located.

14.2.5 Office - CLLI code of the central office.

14.2.6 Order Number - Fireworks Project Number of job providing the items.



14-3

14.2.7 Shipped To - Same if the items remain in the central office or far destination address if the material is shipped from the central office.

14.2.8 Shipped Via – How shipped to the far end destination or blank if not shipped. 14.2.9 Quantity – The number of each item shipped.

14.2.10 Description - Item name or number.

14.2.11 Item Number – the cross-referencing item number in the spec or Bill of Material.

14.2.12 Spec Number - Which specification (WP or detailed) where the item can be found.

14.2.13 Form Completed By – The Service Supplier’s name printed clearly.

14.2.14 Material/Document Received By - Name of CenturyLink Representative who accepted the material and/or documentation.

14.3 RG 41-0046 – Installation Job Log

14.3.1 Used to communicate daily job issues of relevance. Briefly explain daily progress, telephone conversations with engineers, Work Management Center or others relating to the progress of the job. Explain problems that have been identified and where the problem was referred. Describe any changes to the job and where they originated. Writing must be legible. Enter as much information as required to explain the problem or situation. Use as many Sheets as necessary.

14.3.2 Fireworks Project # - Reference number of the job.

14.3.3 Date – Date information is entered and name of person entering the information.

14.3.4 Details – Provide daily information regarding the job. Included, but not limited to the following: any deviation from the WP or CenturyLink PEG technical documentation approved by an engineer or other authority (this may require a Letter of Deviation per par. 2.11) their name and contact number. Describe any material shortages identified. List the name and contact number to whom the shortage was reported and what the expected action will be. Note the results of any action taken by the individual to whom the shortage was referred. Document any engineering-related or assignment changes, any communications with Engineering, Installation Quality Assurance, Central Office Operations or others relating to the job.



14-4

14.4 RG 41-0170 – Installation Alarm Assignment and Capacity Sheet 14.4.1 This form is used to communicate to the Network Monitoring and Analysis (NMA) group any equipment serial and discrete alarm assignments. It is also used to record testing confirmation information provided by the NMA group. Where the alarm leads from a network element are terminated on a Dantel® or similar alarm equipment, this form is used to document those assignments. This sheet will be faxed to NMA group when completed. The date and number of Sheets being faxed must be filled in at the top of the Sheet.

Note: This form is not used for assignments to a Digi-Pac, AI or COLAN AI switch. Contact the X.25 Provisioning organization for those assignments and record the NMA log number on the RG 47-0002 ICN and the assignment information on the Job Log (RG 41-0046). Refer also to Par. 2.7.2.1.

Fact Sheet 14.4.2 NMA Database - NMA Database Group and Design Engineer contact information. Individuals who will be receiving the fax and inputting the information.

14.4.3 Installer – Includes Service Supplier’s name, contact numbers, the Company who the installer represents, central office CLLI code, Job Number, and Estimate number.

14.4.4 Addition or Removal– Check which type of job is represented by this effort.

Sheet 2 14.4.5 Installer information – Includes installers name, contact numbers, Service Supplier’s name, central office CLLI code, and Job ID number.

14.4.6 Capacity notes - Identify any potential shortages for future growth.

14.4.7 Alarm bay – Which relay rack / bay the Dantel® or similar alarm unit is located.

14.4.8 Shelf – Leave blank.

14.4.9 ETEL – Usually found on assignment sheets left near the alarm unit. If unknown, contact the E-Telemetry Database individual for guidance. Check job package for contact numbers.

14.4.10 Address/Remote – Same as ETEL.



14-5

14.4.11 Additional comments – Used to provide additional information related to the alarming equipment.

14.4.12 Log # - Provided by NMA after the Discrete alarms have been tested. Note: CenturyLink personnel will also be required to enter this information into the Installation Order Tracking (IOT) system.

14.4.13 Table under Discrete alarms heading - Minimum required information to be filled in – MAP, Port, Display #, SDR #and Equipment type/ Relay Rack/ Shelf, Equipment X-Conn and Assignment X-Conn. ‘TB’ is the cross-connect panel where the alarm lead is terminated, i.e., 1U (upper) or 1L (lower). The alarm is the pin position on the panel that the alarm lead is terminated on, i.e., 1A. Return is the pin position on the panel that the alarm return lead is terminated on, i.e., 2A.

14.5 RG 47-0001 – Storage Battery Charge Record and End of Charge Report 14.5.1 This form is used when flooded cell storage batteries are received in a central office. Measurements and sight inspections are performed and recorded before, during and after battery charging. The values of the measurements and sight inspections are recorded on this form. This is a requirement. Refer to Chapter 10 for additional information when using this form. Be sure to read all of the footnotes on both Sheets before starting the process.

Note: For Valve-Regulated, Lead-Acid (VRLA) battery applications, the Service Supplier will enter, on this form, any relevant information pertinent to the life cycle maintenance of these cells. Not all fields on this form are applicable to VRLA batteries. When completed, this form will reside with the installed equipment (Refer also to Par. 10.2.10.2).

Sheet 1 of 2 Job Information: 14.5.2 String & Plant Identification – This identifies the battery string within a power plant. An alpha letter is normally used. Plant identification is the CLLI code of the plant.

14.5.3 Central Office – Name the office is commonly known by. Provide City, State and physical street address.

14.5.4 Supplier – Name of the company providing installation services.

14.5.5 Supp. Order # - Order or job number of the installation provider.



14-6

14.5.6 Job # / Job ID # - This is the Fireworks Project Number of the job. The Job ID can be called Estimate, Job ID, BAN or Authorization Number. The terms are all synonymous.

14.5.7 ADDRID – Address identification is the six-digit code for the office. Also called the Geographic Location code.

14.5.8 CLLI Code – CLLI code for the office.

14.5.9 Installer’s Name – Name of the lead person installing the batteries and taking the cell measurements. Name must be legible.

14.5.10 Battery Mfg./Model and Catalog # – Name of the battery manufacturer. The manufacturer’s model number or designation and the cross-referencing catalog number used by the manufacturer.

14.5.11 Date Received – Month, day and year the batteries were delivered to the office where they will be placed into service.

14.5.12 Charge By Date – Date stamped by the manufacturer on the side of the battery packaging.

14.5.13 Torque Value – This value is listed in the manufacture’s literature sent with the battery.

14.5.14 Plant / Nominal Float Voltage – Record the Plant Voltage reading taken at the main termination buss of the first battery string in the plant. For Nominal Voltage, record the results as determined by Sheet 1, Footnote 1.

14.5.15 Temp. Ref. Cell # – Temperature Reference Cell (TR) is the cell on the upper tier with the lowest voltage reading at the end of the initial charge. Write in the number of the cell designated as the Temperature Reference Cell. Refer to Publication 77350 Issue L Section 10.2.11 for additional information. Refer to Sage 1, Footnote 4.

14.5.16 Turnover Date – Month, day and year battery or batteries are turned over to and accepted by a Power Technician, Central Office Technician or Supervisor. Refer to Sheet 1, Footnote 3.

14.5.17 Turnover Average Voltage – Refer to Sheet 1, Footnote 2 to determine this voltage.



14-7

14.5.18 Accepted By – This is the CenturyLink power representatives’ name. The name must be legible.

14.5.19 Batteries as Received Open Cell Data - Cell number is the number of each cell as determined by the installer in the placement of the batteries. Note: Refer to Sheet 1, Footnote 7 for required voltage measurement accuracy.

14.5.20 Serial # - Serial number of each cell as provided by the manufacturer.

14.5.21 Mfg. Date, etc. – Manufacture date of the cell as stamped on the battery or packaging.

14.5.22 Voltage - is the voltage measurement of the open cell before being placed on a charger.

14.5.23 Corr. Specific Gravity - is the specific gravity measurement of the acid in the open cell before being placed on a charger. Specific gravity and voltage readings for each cell are required during the initial charge. A visual inspection of the cells will determine if crystals are present or not. If no crystals are present, mark “N.” If crystals are present mark “Y.” Refer to Section 10.5 for additional information regarding inspecting for crystals. Acid level is determined by visually inspecting the acid level in each cell. The fluid level must be between the minimum and maximum level marks. Refer to Sheet 1, Footnote 6.

14.5.24 Batteries At Turnover (On Float) - Refer to Sheet 1, Footnote 5. This section is completed after the batteries have been on float for at least 48 hours.

14.5.25 Voltage, etc. – Refer to Sections 10.2 and 10.5 for information. Record each cell value as measured. After 24 hours on “float”, all cells should be between –2.14V and –2.27V.

Sheet 2 of 2 Cell Voltage readings for first 100 hours of charge: 14.5.26 Date and Time – Record month and day. Day 1, 2, etc., are the days of charge during the charging process. Each day is a 24-hour period. Refer to Sheet 2, Footnote 2 to determine when the initial minimum 100 hours of charging can begin. Cell numbers 1 through 24 are the same as Sheet 1. Up to eleven days can be recorded to provide for the 250 hours maximum charge time.



14-8

End of Charge Readings: 14.5.27 Volts, etc. – Do not record these measurements until the minimum charge hours and Sheet 2, Note 3 can be satisfied. Record the measurements of each cell.

14.5.28 Charger Amps - is the daily reading of the amperage output of the charging device.

14.6 RG 47-0002 – Installation / Revised Completion Notice 14.6.1 Used to communicate to the Central Office organization, Design Engineer, Work Management Center and other organizations that the job is complete, partially complete or a portion of a job is being turned over for service in advance of the completion date. “Complete” means all work has been completed and the equipment has been installed, tested and is ready for service. “Partial” means that not all of the work is complete. The installer has installed all of the equipment that can be installed and is waiting for a non-service affecting component. This form is also applicable for customer premise installation work (Refer also to Par. 14.20).

“Advance” means that a critical component required for immediate service has been installed, tested and is ready for service, but the entire job is not ready for service.

14.6.2 Confirmation of Installation Completion or Request for Revised Completion – Mark only one box with an X to indicate which type of notice this will be. It will be either a completion notice or a request for a revised start or completion date.

14.6.3 Mark only one box with an “X” to indicate if the completion is an Advance, Partial or Final.

14.6.4 Marked drawing sent – This is the date or dates when the Service Supplier sent the corrected drawing(s) to the design engineer for updating of the office drawings.

14.6.5 Reschedule – Mark this box if this is a request for a new start or completion date.

14.6.6 Network Monitoring and Analysis NMA Confirmation Number – Enter the required information from the NMA group per Par. 2.7.

14.6.7 City, State, and Zip – City, State and Zip code where the central office is located.

14.6.8 Office/Office location – Name office is known by or the CLLI code for the office.



14-9

14.6.9 Design Engineer’s Name – Name of the CenturyLink Engineer responsible for the job.

14.6.10 Fireworks - This number will be the Fireworks Project Number that funds the job.

14.6.11 Job # - Job number of the job.

14.6.12 Scheduled Dates – Enter the actual start and complete dates listed on the face of the Design Work Package.

14.6.13 Start – This is the Material Available date as indicated on the front of the Job Specification.

14.6.14 Complete – This is the Installation Complete date as indicated on the front of the Design Work Package.

14.6.15 Actual or Rescheduled dates – If this is a request for new dates, place the requested dates in these fields. If this is a completion notice, place the actual dates that the job started and completed.

14.6.16 Start – Date the job actually started or what date is being requested as a new start date.

14.6.17 Complete: – Date the job actually completed or what date is being requested as a new completion date.

14.6.18 Equipment Involved; Exception Items: – Include the major items of equipment that were installed and location, (e.g., multiplexors, DSX panels, fiber panels and rack- and-stack bays) and, if applicable, any exception items (e.g., AC not connected, alarms not tested due to missing circuit boards, missing framework details, etc.).

Note: If the Service Supplier lists any exception items, those items will be cleared within a negotiated timeframe with the Design Engineering.

14.6.19 Reason for Reschedule – Brief explanation why a start or complete date needs to be extended.



14-10

14.6.20 Service Supplier Company Name and Signature – This is the name of the Service Supplier providing the installation effort and the individual requesting a date extension or completing the job and doing the final walk through with the central office representative.

14.6.16 Date – Date the form is being signed. Blocks below lines 19 and 20 are for CenturyLink use only.

14.6.22 Accepted, Not Accepted – Authorized CenturyLink Representative signing the completion notice and participating in the final walk through will place an X in the box that applies. The job will either be accepted or not. For customer premise applications, the CenturyLink Field Engineering representative is authorized to sign.

14.6.23 If Not Accepted, Reasons – If the job or date change request is not accepted, briefly state the reason for rejecting the job or the requested date change.

14.6.24 B&C Representative Printed Name – Name of the Representative accepting or rejecting the completed job.

14.6.25 Date – Date job is accepted by the CenturyLink representative.

14.6.26 B&C Representative Signature – Signature of the Representative accepting or rejecting the completed job.

14.6.27 Telephone # - Telephone number of the B&C representative that is accepting or rejecting the job.

14.6.28 Design Engineer Printed Name – Printed name of the Design Engineer accepting or rejecting the completion of the job or the requested date change.

14.6.29 Date – Date the job completion or date change is accepted or rejected.

14.6.30 Design Engineer Signature – Signature of the Design Engineer accepting or rejecting the completed job or requested date changes.

14.6.30 Telephone # - Telephone number of the Design Engineer accepting or rejecting the completed job or requested date changes.



14-11

14.7 RG47- 0004 Job Information Memorandum (JIM)

14.7.1 This is a formal publication issued by the Service Supplier to explain the differences between the actual job conditions and the engineering information provided. It may be used to request authorization for additional effort. It is not an authorization for any additional effort. Additional effort shall be authorized only through the issuance of an Amendment to the original Design Work Package (DWP) referencing the JIM. The CenturyLink Engineer must issue an amendment to their DWP to authorize the payment of a JIM. The JIM must contain a specific detailed description of each additional work effort and the exact number of hours to complete each specific work effort. No additional work effort should be started without specific written authorization from the Design Engineer or the Work Management Center (WMC) Contract Manager.

14.7.2 City and State – City and State where the office is located.

14.7.3 Office – Office Common Language Location Identifier (CLLI) code or the common name of the office. 14.7.4 Fireworks Project # – Job number of the job.

14.7.5 JIM No. – What number JIM is this issue. Start with number 1.

14.7.6 Service Supplier Company Name – Name of the Company that is providing the installation service.

14.7.7 Subject - Brief description of what is being addressed with this JIM.

14.7.8 Spec. Item Number – Refers to an item within the Work Package (WP). Leave blank if the JIM is not in reference to something contained within the DWP.

14.7.9 Confirming Telephone Call – name of the originator of the call, recipient, the nature of the subject matter, and date. This can also be a face-to-face contact.

14.7.10 Drawing Change Required, Job Cost Affected, Additional Material Required and Spec Appendix Required – Mark the appropriate Yes or No box for each question.



14-12

14.7.11 Problem Description – Briefly describe the problem that has been identified. This can include material or work effort not identified on the WP. Provide enough detailed information to be clear.

14.7.12 Suggested Remedy – Briefly describe the discussions to correct the missed material or work effort. Provide enough detailed information to be clear.. This can include specific cost for material and labor.

14.7.13 Effect on Job Completion Date – Describe how the completion date will be affected (if at all).

14.7.14 Submitted by – The individual (e.g., Service Supplier) who originated the JIM.

14.7.15 Telephone No. – Contact number of JIM originator.

14.7.16 Address – Street address of the Originators’ Company location.

14.7.17 City – Name of the city the Originators’ street address is located in.

14.7.18 State – Name of the state the Originators’ street address is located in.

14.7.19 Zip Code – Postal zip code of the Originators’ street address.

14.8 RG 47-0005 – Method of Procedure (MOP) and CLEC MOP. COE Installation / Removal/ Modification

14.8.1 Used for all work operations performed on equipment being added, removed or modified in any manner in a CenturyLink facility (with the exception of Stored Program Control, e.g., Switching equipment which uses RG 47-0162). This is a written contract between CenturyLink and the Installation Service Supplier performing the work. It provides the procedures in which equipment will be added, removed or modified. It is used for both the general installation and the detailed installation work. The CenturyLink representative and the Service Supplier representative use this form to agree on what will be installed, where it will be installed and the hours that the work will be performed. This form gives authorization to work in all locations listed in the steps and description area of the MOP.



14-13

14.8.2 If the completion date must be moved out from the original date, this form must indicate the new date and be initialed by both the CenturyLink representative and the Service Supplier representative.

14.8.3 Sheet - Sheet 1 of all total Sheets. Sheet 2 and higher should be written on Form RG 47-0006.

14.8.4 General or Detail – Select the proper version of RG 47-0005 to reflect the level of detailed work being described.

14.8.5 General - The general installation or removal process of work in a CenturyLink facility. This is an outline of what is being installed or removed, where the work will be performed and what the hours of operation will be. All near end and far end work locations are required to be identified.

14.8.6 Detail – The detail installation, modification or removal process of work commencement in a CenturyLink facility. This is a detail step-by-step process that will be followed when equipment is installed, modified or removed. These steps include, but are not limited to, what is being installed, modified or removed, where the work will be performed and what the hours of operation will be. The PNAR number should also be included here. Refer also to Par. 15.9.

14.8.7 City, State – City and State where the office is located.

14.8.8 Office – Office CLLI or the common name used for the office.

14.8.9 Office Location – Street address of the office.

14.8.10 Phone – Phone number of a contact within the office.

14.8.11 Start Date – Date when the job is expected or due to start.

14.8.12 Start Time – What time the work is expected to start each day. This time needs to be negotiated at the time this document is signed by the CenturyLink representative.



14-14

14.8.13 Completion Date – When the work is expected to be complete and the equipment is turned over to the office for test and turn-up. If this date changes, the new date is required to be written in and initialed by both the CenturyLink and Service Supplier’s representative.

14.8.14 Completion Time – When the work is expected to complete each day. It is suggested that the completion time listed be one to two hours later than the normal scheduled shift. This will allow the work to continue if there is a need to work late. This time needs to be negotiated at the time this document is signed by the CenturyLink representative.

Note: Paragraph Items 14.8.12 through 14.8.14 are the only authorized times an installer can be working in the office. Work outside these agreed dates and times, unless authorized by a separate MOP, is not authorized.

14.8.15 FW # – This is the Fireworks Project Number of the job. On the CLEC version, the BAN is used.

14.8.16 Job ID – The Estimate, BAN, Authorization or Job ID number for the job.

14.8.17 Name – Company name of the installation Service Supplier.

14.8.18 Job # - Number internal to the installation company. This is the Installation company’s tracking number.

14.8.19 System Type – Check the appropriate box. If this is for a switch, refer to Par. 14.19 and RG 47-0162.

14.8.20 Step – List the steps of the procedure. Start at 1 and continue upward. Letters can be used to expand items within a step.

14.8.21 Description – A General MOP defines the activity to be performed as well as the quantity, locations and equipment involved (all far end and near end locations). A Detailed MOP includes any work on equipment which is in an area where potential hazards to equipment or personnel exist. The Detailed MOP defines each step of the process and, in effect, is the step-by-step procedure under which the activity shall be performed.

14.8.22 CenturyLink B&C Operations – Place a check mark or X to indicate that this step is a CenturyLink responsibility or expected participation.



14-15

14.8.23 Supplier - Place a check mark or X to indicate that this step is the Installation Suppliers responsibility or expected participation.

14.8.24 Person Performing Work (Required) – Print the name of the person who is performing the work. This person also signs their name. The printing needs to be legible.

14.8.25 Title – Title of the person responsible for the outcome of the job.

14.8.26 24-Hour Emergency Contact Number – Contact number of the person responsible for performing the work.

14.8.27 Date – Date the MOP is signed by this Service Supplier representative.

14.8.28 Real Estate or B&C Operations Representative (Required) – Generally this is the Supervisor of the person(s) performing the work. Print the name of the person responsible for the person doing the work. This person also signs their name. The printing needs to be legible. If this is a job for CenturyLink Real Estate, a CenturyLink Real Estate Representative must be listed in this location.

14.8.29 Title – Title of the person responsible for the person(s) performing the work.

14.8.30 Phone – How this person can be contacted anytime inside or outside normal business hours. This contact should be the B&C Manager or (designated representative) (Required) Manager, or their representative, of the office in which the work is to be performed.

14.8.31 Title – Title of the Manager of the office or their representative.

14.8.32 Phone – Contact number of the Manager of the office or their representative.

14.8.33 Date - Date the MOP is signed by this person. 14.8.34 B&C Support Technician (Not Required) – The Person inside the office that can be kept informed about the job. This person to whom the installer can go to if there is a question about the office or a procedure. The printing needs to be legible.



14-16

14.8.35 Title – Title of the employee referred to in Par. 14.8.34.

14.8.36 Phone – Contact number of the Central Office Operations Support Technician during normal business hours.

14.8.37 Date – Date the MOP is signed.

14.9 RG 47- 0009 – Report of Equipment Disconnected from Existing Plant 14.9.1 Used to report the disconnection of retired equipment from existing plant. Information recorded on this form aids the Design Engineering in recording removed equipment from the network.

14.9.2 Date – This the date the form is completed.

14.9.3 Sheet of - The total number of sheets required to record disconnected equipment; beginning with Sheet 1.

14.9.4 Design Engineer’s Name – Record the name of the CenturyLink Design Engineer from the Design Work Package face sheet (this name is located in the field entitled “Telephone Company Engineer”).

14.9.5 Address – Populate the CenturyLink Design Engineer’s work [street] address here.

14.9.6 Mark only one box with an “X” to indicate if the completion is a Partial or Final.

14.9.7 City, State, Zip – Information also related to the CenturyLink Design Engineer’s work address.

14.9.8 Office - The office Common Language Location Identifier (CLLI) of the central office location where the equipment is being removed.

14.9.9 Spec. – This field is not required.

14.9.10 Order - Record the Billing Job Number. This information is listed on the face sheet of the Work Package.

14.9.11 Quantity - The total number of equipment types removed from service.



14-17

14.9.12 Code and Description – Any applicable or pertinent equipment identifiers that describe the equipment removed (e.g., “D4 Channel Bank” or “Subscriber Loop Carrier 96”).

14.9.13 Name Of Circuit And Location From Which Disconnected – Include the circuit name (e.g., “T-86402, Fig. 4a” or PEG nomenclature from WP face sheet) of the equipment removed and its associated relay rack location.

14.9.14 Date Disconnected - The actual date that the equipment was deactivated and removed from the CenturyLink network.

14.9.15 Service Supplier Representative – The name of the person performing the work on behalf of the Service Supplier.

14.10 RG 47- 0010 – Request For Disposition of CenturyLink Communications Material 14.10.1 Used to return excess material to the Excess / Reuse warehouse or to return material to a supplier. Contact NAVL to have excess material picked up. Contact the Detail Engineer or the Network Procurement Center (NPC) to arrange for a Return Material Authorization (RMA) number from a material supplier. For material being returned to a supplier, follow their shipping instructions.

14.10.2 Ship to Location – Where is the material being shipped. This is either a vendor location or a NAVL warehouse.

14.10.3 Street Address, City, State and Zip – The physical address of the warehouse the material is to be delivered to.

14.10.4 Design Engineer’s Name – Name of the Design Engineer on the Work Package (WP).

14.10.5 Job Site – The physical address of the office the material is shipping from.

14.10.6 Tel. No. Engineer – Contact number of the Design Engineer.

14.10.7 Office Name – Office CLLI or the common name the office is known by.



14-18

14.10.8 Returned By – Name of the individual returning the material.

14.10.9 Phone # - Contact number of the individual returning the material.

14.10.10 Address ID – The six-digit number that identifies the office. Generally found on the face sheet of the Work Package (WP).

14.10.11 FRC – Field Reporting Code. This is the account code the material was charged to. This can be a two or three-digit number followed by a letter, i.e. 357C, 45C. It is generally found on the face sheet of the WP.

14.10.12 Job ID – Estimate, BAN, Authorization or Job Id number. Generally found on the face sheet of the WP.

14.10.13 Fireworks Project Number – The project number associated with the job that purchased the material.

14.9.14 RMA# (Provided By NPC For Vendor Claim) – Return Material Authorization number provided by a material supplier when they authorize material to be returned to them.

14.10.15 Name NPC Expediter – Name of the person in the Network Procurement Center (NPC) who arranged for the return of the material and obtained the RMA number.

14.10.16 Date Notified NPC – Date that the NPC was notified of the need to return material to a supplier.

14.10.17 Phone # of Expediter - Contact number of the person in the NPC who is making arrangements to have material returned to a supplier.

14.10.18 Quantity – How many of each item is being returned to the Excess warehouse or the material supplier.

14.10.19 Part No. –The manufacturer’s common ordering number for the item being returned.

14.10.20 Material Description (include all information) – Which name the item is commonly referred to. A brief description of what the item is, i.e., DSX-1 panel, FLM600ADM shelf, 4/0 cable.

14.10.21 Vendor – Manufacturer of the material.



14-19

14.10.22 Reason for Return – In the box below this part of the form is a list of reasons. Select the one that best reflects the reason the material is being returned and enter the letter in this block.

14.10.23 # of Cartons – How many cartons are being shipped.

14.10.24 Keep – Yes or NO. If the material is in serviceable condition and can be reused, the material should be kept. If not sure of the decision, contact the Design Engineer for directions.

14.10.25 Junk – Yes or No. If the material is not in serviceable condition it should be junked. If not sure of the decision, contact the CenturyLink Design Engineer for directions.

14.10.26 Material Returned To Vendor Name – Name of the Company that the material is being delivered to. If known, include the receiving person’s name.

14.10.27 Address - The physical location of the warehouse the returned material is being delivered to.

14.10.28 Ship Date – Date when the material is picked up by the Transportation Company.

14.10.29 BOL # (Ship to Vendor) – Bill Of Lading number of the shipping document used to ship the material to a warehouse.

14.10.30 To Be Completed By Warehouse – The warehouse receiving personnel fills in this portion.

14.11 RG 47- 0013 – Service Interruption / Service Degradation Report 14.11.1 Used to report a service interruption or degradation. Information requested is a description of the interruption or degradation and what type of corrective action was taken to restore service to the affected equipment. Refer to paragraph 13.8 for additional information on who is required to be notified with this form.

14.11.2 To – B&C Manager and CenturyLink Design Engineer.

14.11.3 Location – Physical address of the affected office.

14.11.4 Office - Office CLLI or the name the office is commonly known by.

14.11.5 City & State – City and State where the office is located.



14-20

14.10.6 Fireworks Project No. – The Job number associated with the effort that caused the interruption /degradation of service.

14.11.7 Time and Date Reported – Time and Date when the B&C Manager or their designated representative was notified.

14.11.8 Time & Date Cleared – Time and Date when the interruption or degradation was cleared and service restored.

14.11.9 Type of Equipment – Type of equipment affected by the interruption or degradation, i.e., Switch, FLM600.

14.11.10 MOP Completed/Approved? – Check the yes or no box. Determined by whether or not a properly filled out and signed MOP existed prior to the work operation.

14.11.11 Description of Service Interruption – Brief description of which equipment was affected, where it was located and how the outage happened.

14.11.12 Corrective Action Taken – What action was taken by the individuals involved to correct the interruption / degradation and restore service. 14.11.13 Signature and Date – Signature of the individual filling out the form and the date the form was signed.

14.11.14 Service Supplier Company Name – Name of the Company involved with the interruption / degradation.

14.11.15 Telephone – Contact number of the person completing the form.

14.12 RG 47-0157 – Cable Test Record (COE) 14.12.1 This form is to be used when testing the DS-0, DS-1, DS-3, alarm, power, timing, switching, and fiber optic cables from end to end on new installations. All rates can be entered on one Sheet if a line is drawn across the Sheet and the different rates are indicated in the margin. If no trouble is found in any of the leads tested or streaked, indicate this with a No Trouble Found (NTF) notation. If trouble is found, indicate which lead was defective, the exact nature of the defect and whether or not it was repaired.

14.12.2 Note: Use one line for each cable type (e.g., DS1, DS3, etc.) tested.



14-21

14.12.3 Date – Month, day and year the test was completed.

14.12.4 Fireworks Project No. – The Job number associated with the job.

14.12.5 Job ID – Fireworks Project Number, BAN, Authorization number and Job ID are all the same number and can be located on the face sheet of the Work Package.

14.12.6 CLLI – the Common Language Location Identifier of the office.

14.12.7 Office Name – The name the office is commonly known by.

14.12.8 City & State – City and State the office is located in.

14.12.9 Test Equipment Used – Record the type test equipment that was used to test the leads. Buzzer, Streaker card, VOM, T-BERD, Optical Time-Domain Reflectometer (OTDR), etc.

14.12.10 Type Circuit – Place a check mark or X to the right of the rate tested. If the circuit rate is not listed, but tested, fill in the type of circuit in the blank area of this block.

14.12.11 From – Indicate where one end of the cable is located. This can be a shelf of equipment or a frame.

14.12.12 To – This is the far end of the shelf or frame indicated in column “From.”

14.12.13 Lead ID / Defect Type / Corrected – Record either No Trouble Found (NTF) if none was found or, if there was a defect, indicate which lead, what the defect was and whether it was corrected and re-tested. There is no requirement to record all of the good leads on this form.

14.12.14 Installation Supplier – Name of the Company providing the installation service.

14.12.15 Installer’s Name & Contact Number – Provide the names and contact telephone numbers of the installers testing and correcting the leads. The names must be legible.



14-22

14.13 RG 47-0160 – CLEC Provisioning Forms (Sheets 1 to 6) 14.13.1 These forms are used to communicate to the CLEC and their installation vendor the near and far-end information of the network facilities provided for their use. The near-end information is the identification that the CenturyLink installer has placed on the individual cables. The far-end information contains the locations where the cables terminate on CenturyLink facilities. The Power section includes information regarding the location of BDFB or PBD fusing source information that has been provided but not yet installed. The Synchronization section includes contact information for having the Synchronization /office clock/ timing leads terminated.

Note: Only the forms that apply to the individual CLEC installation should be left on the job site. Place the sheets in a fire-retardant envelope to a cable bundle or a side of the cage. Mark the outside of the envelope with the CLEC name.

Sheet 1 of 6 CLEC POWER ASSIGNMENTS 14.13.2 Office - Name office is commonly known by and the CLLI code of the office.

14.13.3 Fireworks Project No. - Generally found on the face sheet of the Work Package (WP).

14.13.4 CLEC Company & Contact – The name of the collocation customer who will be using the space and cables.

14.13.5 CLEC Location ID – CLLI code of the collocation customer. Generally found on the face sheet or in the note section of the Design Work Package (DWP). The first eight letters identify the CenturyLink central office and the last three identify the collocation customer.

14.13.6 BAN# – Estimate, Authorization number and/or Job ID are all the same number and can be located on the face sheet of the Work Package.

14.13.7 Decommission – Check this box if the customer has decided to cancel, deactivate or remove its network interconnection. Refer also to Par. 8.25 and 16.6.2.

CLEC Company’s Load A

14.13.8 From - CenturyLink.

14.13.9 BDFB/PBD Location – Identifies the bay the far end of the power cables are terminated.



14-23

14.13.10 Shelf – Identifies the charge bus panel of the power bay where the cables are terminated.

14.13.11 Fuse/Breaker Position - Identifies which fuse or circuit breaker position within the bay the power cable is terminated on.

14.13.12 Fuse/Breaker Amps – Identifies the amperage rating of the fuse or breaker for this position.

14.13.13 Cable Length (top to top) – Enter the actual distance (in feet) from the top of the BDFB/PBD location to the top of the CLEC entry point.

14.13.14 Quantity of Runs – Enter the total number of cables run.

14.13.15 Cable Size – The actual wire size (e.g., No. 750KCM AWG) terminated. Be sure to identify each cable if it is –48V or –48V RTN.

14.13.16 CLEC Companies Load B - Provide the same information for Load B as done in Load A.

14.13.17 Contacts: Company and/or name (24 hours).

14.13.18 Installation Supplier and Telephone number – The name of the Service Supplier who performed the work for CenturyLink.

14.13.19 CenturyLink B&C Supervisor – The name of the central office supervisor.

14.13.20 Fuses turned over to – Identifies the CenturyLink representative who has knowledge of where the fuses are stored pending the completion of the collocation installation. The fuses should be turned over to a Central Office Technician or a Central Office Supervisor. The fuses are to be installed after the collocation installation vendor has terminated their end of the power cables. A CenturyLink representative is required to install the fuses or turn the circuit breaker on.

Sheet 2 of 6 CLEC SYNC ASSIGNMENTS 14.13.21 Office – The name that the office is commonly referred to and the CLLI code of the office.



14-24

14.13.22 Fireworks Project No. - Generally found on the face sheet of the Work Package (WP).

14.13.23 CLEC Company & Contact – Name of the collocation customer who will be using the space and cables.

14.13.24 CLEC location ID – CLLI code of the collocation vendor. Generally found on the face sheet or in the note section of the DWP. The first eight letters identify the CenturyLink central office and the last three identify the collocation vendor.

14.13.25 BAN# – The Job ID that identifies the CLEC authority.

14.13.26 Decommission – Check this box if the customer has decided to cancel, deactivate, or remove its network interconnection. Refer also to Par. 8.25 and 16.6.2.

CLEC Companies Primary From – CenturyLink 14.13.27 Relay Rack Location – Relay rack origin of the primary synchronization/ timing signal.

14.13.28 Shelf – Name of the synchronization shelf that is providing the primary signal, i.e.,“Exp. SH-01.”

14.13.29 Slot Position – The slot location within the shelf providing the primary signal.

14.13.30 Port – The port (termination) within the card providing the primary signal.

CLEC Companies Secondary From – CenturyLink 14.13.31 Relay Rack Location – Relay rack origin of the secondary synchronization/timing signal.

14.13.32 Shelf – Name of the synchronization shelf that is providing the signal, i.e., “Exp. SH-01.”

14.13.33 Slot Position – The slot location within the shelf providing the secondary signal.



14-25

14.13.34 Port – The port (termination) within the card providing the secondary signal.

14.13.35 Contacts: Company and/or Name (24 Hour) – The contact name and telephone number of the Service Supplier who installed the cables and equipment for CenturyLink.

14.13.36 CenturyLink B&C Supervisor – Name of the central office supervisor and their contact phone number.

For Sync Leads Termination / Unplugged – Contact information for the individual who terminates the sync leads at the shelf or who unplugs the port(s) when the collocation installation vendor is ready. Please include the contact telephone number.

Sheet 3 of 6 CLEC DS0 Circuits 14.13.37 Office – The name the central office is commonly known by and the CLLI code of the office.

14.13.38 Fireworks Project No. - The Job number associated with the job.


14.13.40 CLEC location ID – CLLI code of the collocation customer. Generally found on the face sheet or in the note section of the DWP. The first eight letters identify the CenturyLink central office and the last three identify the collocation vendor.



14.13.43 Cable Designation - The identifier that is used on the cable so the collocation installation vendor can properly identify the cable, i.e., PST0H.

14.13.44 DS0 Vertical Location MDF /ICDF – Frame location where the cable terminates, i.e., F10 – G23.



14-26

14.13.45 Pair Count – The number of cable pairs that are contained within the cable, i.e., 001-100, 101-200, etc.

14.13.46 Comments/Cable Slack (for decommission only) – Any additional information that will assist the collocation company or their installation vendor.

14.13.47 Cable Mined? Y/N (for decommission only) – Indicate whether or not cable mining occurred as a result of decommissioning activity.

DS0 Line Sharing Only (Data Only)


14.13.49 DS0 Vertical Location MDF /ICDF – Frame location where the cable terminates, i.e., F10 – G23.

14.13.50 Pair Count – The number of cable pairs that are contained within the cable, i.e., 001-100, 101-200, etc.

14.13.51 Splitter Location (RR/Shelf or MDF/Block Location – Enter pertinent equipment location information relevant to DS0 line sharing (if applicable).

14.13.52 Comments/Cable Slack (for decommission only) – Any additional information that will assist the collocation company or their installation vendor.


Sheets 4 & 5 of 6 CLEC DS1/DS3 Circuits 14.13.54 Office – The name the central office is commonly known by and the CLLI code of the office.





14-27

14.13.57 CLEC location ID – CLLI code of the collocation customer. Generally found on the face sheet or in the note section of the DWP. The first eight letters identify the CenturyLink central office and the last three identify the collocation customer.




14.13.61 Circuits Cable Count – Enter the cable counts (e.g., 1-100, 101-200, 201-300, etc.) as indicated in the Design Work Package.

14.13.62 RR – Which bay within the CenturyLink area is the DSX-1 panel installed in that the cable terminates on.

14.13.63 Shelf/Panel – The shelf or panel location of the DSX-1 bay where the cable is terminated.

14.13.64 Jacks – The jack location(s) of the DSX-1 shelf/panel where the cable is terminated.

14.13.65 Cable Slack Length (for decommissioning only) – Enter the estimated length of slack in the decommissioned cables. This information will aid Design Engineering if existing cabling can be reused on subsequent jobs.


14.13.67 CLEC Relay Rack Location - Location where the CLEC equipment will be installed. If it is a caged location, provide the collocation CLLI code.

Sheet 6 of 6 Cables From CenturyLink Fiber Bay To CLEC Equipment 14.13.68 Office – The name the central office is commonly known by and the CLLI code of the office.



14-28



14.13.71 CLEC location ID – CLLI code of the collocation customer. Generally found on the face sheet or in the note section of the DWP. The first eight letters identify the CenturyLink central office and the last three identify the collocation customer.



14.13.74 Cable Designation - What identifier is used on the cable so the collocation installation vendor can properly identify the cable, i.e., PDW0H. 14.13.75 Circuits Cable Count – Which type(s) of circuit(s) do the fiber leads represent, i.e., 01-08.

14.13.76 FDF RR – The CenturyLink fiber distribution bay and shelf where the cables terminate.

14.13.77 Shelf – The termination point in the CenturyLink fiber distribution bay.

14.13.78 Ports – The port locations within the CenturyLink fiber shelf where the cables are terminated.

14.13.79 Cable Slack Length (for decommissioning only) – Enter the estimated length of slack in the decommissioned cables. This information will aid Design Engineering if existing cabling can be reused on subsequent jobs.




14-29

14.13.81 CLEC Relay Rack Location - Location where the CLEC equipment will be installed. If it is a caged location, provide the collocation CLLI code.

14.14 RG 47-0161 – Quality Checklist (Sheets 1 to 6) 14.14.1 This form is used at the end of a job to check the overall quality of the job. The best way to use this form is to actually walk to the different locations listed and review the quality of the work. Any deficiencies noted need to be corrected.

14.14.2 Fireworks Project No. – The job number associated with the job.

14.14.3 CLLI Code – CLLI code of the office.

14.14.4 Engineer – Name of the CenturyLink Design Engineer of the job. Generally found on the face sheet of the Work Package (WP).

14.14.5 RC Code – Responsibility code of the Design Engineer.

14.14.6 Item to Check – This is a list of the various locations that work may or may not have been performed. If an item is not applicable to the job, then mark the correct column NA.

Note: The top-of-sheet header items are repeated on each Sheet.

14.14.7 Checked By (Initial) – Initial of individual checking the work performed for each item inspected.

14.14.8 Correct? Y/N – Was the item correctly installed, Yes or No.

14.14.9 Remarks – Any comments that will reflect any information the installer may want to convey.

Note: The lower portion of Sheet 4 applies to a Collocation job only. The lower portion of Sheet 5 is to be filled out by the State Interconnect Manager (SICM) during the handoff to the CLEC. Refer also to Par. 16.6.3 and 14.13.



14-30

14.15 RG 47-0162 – Detailed Method of Procedure (Switching and Switching-related Power) 14.15.1 This form is used when the Service Supplier is performing installation work relating to Stored Program Control System (SPCS) and SPCS-related power. Typically when the work detailed in this MOP is performed it is done during established “Maintenance Window” hours at the discretion of CenturyLink Central Office Operations personnel. Refer also to Network Change Management System (NCMS) Par. 15.9.

Page 1 of 5 Sheets 14.15.2 General; Detailed - Mark an X in the appropriate box to indicate the nature and scope of the work being performed (Refer to Chapter 15 for specific General and Detailed MOP requirements).

14.15.3 Start Date: - Enter the actual date that the work will be performed.

14.15.4 Start Time: - Enter the actual start time that the work will be performed; especially if done during maintenance window hours.

14.15.5 Completion Date: - Enter the date that the work actually completes.

14.15.6 Completion Time: - Enter the time that the work actually completes.

14.15.7 CenturyLink Job #: - Enter Billing number listed on the face sheet of the Work Package authorizing the proposed work.

14.15.8 Supplier Order Number: - Enter the Supplier’s order number if known.

14.15.9 System Type: - List the type of switching system environment that the work will be performed in (e.g., 5ESS, DMS-100, etc.).

14.15.10 Central Office Name: - Enter the name of the central office (e.g., “Columbine”). 14.15.11 Central Office CLLI: - Enter the Common Language Location Identifier of the central office from the DWP face sheet.

14.15.12 Date: - Enter the date the MOP was written.



14-31

14.15.13 Design Engineer: - Enter the name of the CenturyLink Design Engineer responsible for creating the WP. This name is listed on the face sheet of the WP.

14.15.14 Installation Service Supplier Company: – Enter the name of the approved Service Supplier.

14.15.15 Service Supplier Representative: - Enter the name of the installer performing the work function and/or the name of the Service Supplier’s primary representative responsible for the completion of the proposed work.

14.15.16 Service Supplier Representative Contact #: - Enter the Service Supplier’s phone number.

14.15.17 CenturyLink Representative (Approver): - Enter the name of the local CenturyLink Central Office Operations representative who approves the MOP.

14.15.18 Job Description: - This entry is a brief narrative explaining the overall scope of the work performed.

14.15.19 Job Type: - Place an “X” in the appropriate box to indicate the nature and scope of the work being performed as either Switch or Switch Power.

14.15.20 Summary of Installed / Removed Equipment: - A brief description of the type of equipment that was installed / removed (e.g., added SM—05 in RR Lineup 0116).

14.15.21 Responsibility: - In these fields, the Service Supplier identifies each step of the Detailed MOP and places a √ in applicable column to identify which entity (or both) may be required to complete the required step(s) in the process.

Note: The Service Supplier will make a notation with an (*) at the completion of any step considered a Safe Stop Point (SSP) before the next step is commenced to minimize the possibility of a service disruption.

14.15.22 Description of Work Operation: - List as many detailed steps as needed (and in the proper sequence) to ensure a smooth completion of the work effort.



14-32

14.15.23 Steps Completed; Date & Time; SUPL / CenturyLink: - As the sequence of work is completed, both the Service Supplier and CenturyLink representatives will concur by noting the time and initialing these columns.

Page 2 of 5 Sheets 14.15.24 Service Supplier Representative:, Title:, Phone:, Date: - The contact information of the lead supplier representative.

14.15.25 Service Supplier Personnel Performing work:, Title:, Phone:, Date: - The contact information of the Service Supplier’s representative actually performing the work operation(s).

14.15.26 CenturyLink Representative: - The name of the B&C representative approving the Service Supplier’s MOP.

14.15.27 CenturyLink B&C Technician:, Title:, Phone:, Date: - If required, the contact information for the on-site Local Network Operations Technician required to assist with the MOP.

14.15.28 Issue Date - Enter the publication date listed on the appropriate technical document used to perform the required detailed step in the MOP. Note: The most current version of all required technical documentation should be used.

14.15.29 Documentation to be used on Job: - List the name(s) of all pertinent technical documentation used throughout the MOP process.

Page 3 of 5 Sheets 14.15.30 Detailed Method of Procedure – Check List of Pertinent Items: - As each item is discussed, the Service Supplier shall place an “X” by each applicable item required to complete the MOP.

Page 4 of 5 Sheets 14.15.31 Detailed Method of Procedure – Check List of Pertinent Items - Con’t:

14.15.32 Supplemental Checklist – The Service Supplier’s lead representative will review this checklist prior to the start of each shift and date/initial each item as required.



14-33

Page 5 of 5 Sheets 14.15.33 Ask Yourself Questions – This information is self-explanatory.

14.15.34 Contact List for CenturyLink: - The Service Supplier’s representative should ensure that all contact information recorded in this section is current and accurate.

14.15.35 Contact List for Vendor: - The same applies to this section as in 14.15.34.

14.16 RG 47-0165 – Central Office Common Systems Order Form 14.16.1 This form is used specifically by the CenturyLink Local Planning, Engineering & Construction (LPEC) installer to order common systems material that is omitted from the Design Work Package. This form is not to be used by anyone except a LPEC installer. This form is not to be used on an Engineer, Furnish and Install (EF&I) job. The completed form must be faxed to the Work Management Center (WMC) at (303) 792-6909. The WMC reviews and prices the items, then faxes the form to the CenturyLink Design Engineer. If the request is approved, the Engineer will then forward the form to Procurement for purchasing.

Note: The material will normally ship to the regional Pack & Hold warehouse unless a different location is specified in the shipping instructions.

14.16.2 Date – The date that the request form is completed.

14.16.3 City – City where the office is located.

14.16.4 State – State where the office is located.

14.16.5 Fireworks Project No. – The project number associated with the job.

14.16.6 Job ID – Job Identification, Estimate, BAN or Authorization number of the job.

14.16.7 CLLI Code – CLLI code of the office.

14.16.8 Engineer’s Name – Name of the Design Engineer.

14.16.9 Engineering RC Code – Responsibility Code (RC) of the Design Engineer.

14.16.10 Installation Manager – The Service Supplier Manager that the installer reports to.



14-34

14.16.11 Ordered By – The name of the person requesting the material.

14.16.12 Installation Company – This should be the name of the Service Supplier.

14.16.13 Installer Pager / Phone – Contact numbers for the installer.

14.16.14 Shipping Instructions – List the name of the Pack & Hold warehouse the installer wants the material shipped to. If the installer wants the material shipped to the job site, list that address.

14.16.15 Special Shipping or Material Staging Instructions – Read the instructions. Any location other than the Regional Pack & Hold requires approval. The same applies for any shipping method other than ground.

14.16.16 Quantity (Mandatory) – This field is required. List the total number needed of the listed item.

14.16.17 Part Number (Mandatory) – Required. This is the AMMS part number of the desired item.

14.16.18 Manufacturer (Optional) – If known, list the manufacturer.

14.16.19 Catalog Description (Mandatory) – Required. Description of the item in the approved material catalog.

14.17 RG 47-0166 – Job Site Material Inventory for Missing Items 14.17.1 This form is used at the start of a job. It is an itemized list of which material was identified as “not received” when the material was delivered and inventoried. After completing this form, the installer will fax it to the Design Engineer listed on the WP face sheet and the Work Management Center (WMC) for resolution.

14.17.2Date – The date the form is prepared. 14.17.3 Fireworks Project No. - The project number associated with the job.

14.17.4 Job # - Job ID., BAN, Estimate or Authorization number. Generally found on the face sheet of the DWP.



14-35

14.17.5 Office / CLLI – Name office is commonly known by. This is the CLLI code of the office.

14.17.6 Installation Vendor – Name of the Company installing the equipment (typically referred to as the Service Supplier).

14.17.7 Contact Name & Number – Name of the person filling out the form or the Lead installer on the job. Provide a number where this person can be contacted for updates or questions.

14.17.8 Bill of Material Item # - Item-Sequence (Itm-Seq) number of the missing item(s) as listed in the Bill of Materials in the DWP or Detailed Specification.

14.17.9 Part # - Part number of the missing item(s) as listed in the Bill of Materials (BOM).

14.17.10 Description – Description of the missing item(s) as listed in the Bill of Materials in the DWP or Detailed Specification.

14.17.11 Quantity – List the quantity of each omitted item.

14.17.12 Comments – Any information that will be helpful to the individual working on a resolution.

14.18 RG 47-0168 – Application for Letter of Deviation 14.18.1 This form is used to obtain approval from Design Engineering to continue the installation effort when acceptable methods and standards contained in CenturyLink Technical Publications or technical documentation cannot be met due to unforeseeable conditions existing within a specific central office environment.

Note: To obtain a Letter of Deviation, the Service Supplier will first discern the rationale for the deviation and then complete and submit an Application for Letter of Deviation (RG 47-0168) to the Design Engineer to initiate the approval process. If approved, the Design Engineer will issue the Letter of Deviation (RG 47-0169) and the Service Supplier will retain a copy in the job packet envelope upon completion of the job. (Refer also to Par. 2.11).

14.18.2 Installation Service Provider: – Per the forms instructions, completely describe the existing condition that prevents the installation effort from proceeding without modification.



14-36

14.18.3 Date of Application – Date of application for the Letter of Deviation.

14.18.4 State– The name of the state where the central office resides.

14.18.5 Central Office - The name that the office is commonly known by. Generally found on the face sheet of the WP.

14.18.6 Job Number – The associated Fireworks Project number for the job in question; also found on the WP face sheet.

14.18.7 Location within Central Office – List in as much detail as required to indicate the exact proximity of the condition within the central office.

14.18.8 Deviation submitted to Design Engineering Representative – Enter the name of the Design Engineer listed on the DWP face sheet who will obtain the approval.

14.18.9 Name of Application Originator - This is the name of the individual seeking a Letter of Deviation; typically this is the Service Supplier’s representative performing the installation effort.

14.19 RG 47-0169 –Letter of Deviation 14.19.1 This form is used to grant approval to the installation Service Supplier to continue the installation effort when acceptable methods and standards contained in Technical Publications or technical documentation cannot be met due to unforeseeable conditions existing within a specific central office environment.

14.20 CenturyLink Policy on Photography in CenturyLink Central Offices Locations (Refer also to Par. 2.2.1.9) 14.20.1 This form is used to grant approval to any “authorized “entity that may be requested authorization to take any type of (digital or video) photography within CenturyLink central offices. To obtain the request form for photography authorization, the requestor must contact CenturyLink Access Control at: [email protected]. The requestor shall be prepared to provide the following information:

• Requestor’s name and their company’s name.

• Requestor’s contact information (cell/office telephone, fax number, email address).

• Specific business reason initiating the request.




14-37

Note: Only authorized CenturyLink Installation, Design/Field Engineering, Quality Assurance, NROC, and B&C managers are exempt from this requirement.

14.21 820/840 Series Forms for Power Equipment 14.21.1 These forms are comprised of checklists to ensure that the Service Supplier complies with the test, turn-up, and acceptance requirements of power equipment as listed in TP 77385.

14.23 REGN-154-004-001RG Environmental Equipment Notification - Batteries 14.23.1 This form is to be completed for each battery string installation, removal and replacement. The Planning Engineer will complete this form initially and then forward to the appropriate Environmental Health & Safety representative to ensure their awareness of the impending project. Refer also to Par. 12.4 and Table 12-2. NOTE: Access to this form (and the accompanying completion instructions) is available online and is completed by CenturyLink personnel directly. http://home.corp.intranet/portal/server.pt?open=512&objID=394&PageID=123764&cached=true&mode=2&userID=2

http://home.corp.intranet/portal/server.pt?open=512&objID=394&PageID=123764&cached=true&mode=2&userID=2

http://home.corp.intranet/portal/server.pt?open=512&objID=394&PageID=123764&cached=true&mode=2&userID=2


Chapter 15 Methods Of Procedure (MOPs)

TOC-15i

CONTENTS Chapter Page

15. Methods Of Procedure (MOPs) ...............................................................................15-1

15.1 General Information.......................................................................................15-3 15.2 General Method of Procedures and CLEC MOP .......................................15-4 15.3 Detail Method of Procedures .......................................................................15-5 15.4 Method of Procedure Preparation ...............................................................15-5 15.5 Work Description Details ..............................................................................15-5 15.6 Method Of Procedure Write-Up Review ....................................................15-8 15.7 Approval/Signing Authorities ....................................................................15-8 15.8 Service Interruptions .....................................................................................15-9 15.9 Network Change Management System (NCMS) ....................................15-10 15.10 Planned Impairment of Fire Protection Systems .....................................15-10

15-2

15. Methods Of Procedure (MOPs)

Note: If for any reason, a Service Supplier or Line Extension Contract Agent is found to

be working at a CenturyLink location without an accurate approved, signed (original) and posted MOP, the job may be stopped immediately by any CenturyLink representative.

Line Extension Contract Agents that have been authorized by CenturyLink real estate to do general facility maintenance on existing systems do not require an MOP, unless that maintenance poses a risk to the existing plant . When work operations share common equipment such as a power distribution panel or is located near or over existing plant, the contract agent should consult with the B&C representative before proceeding. Exempt work operations would normally include (janitorial services, light bulb / ballast replacements, and servicing of existing environmental or safety systems).

Any expenses incurred by the Service Supplier, due to this stoppage, are the responsibility of that Service Supplier.

Service Supplier shall use the General MOP as a replacement for the discontinued “Installation Start Notification.”

MOPs issued for the installation, modification, or removal of power equipment, batteries, power cabling, main grounding systems, and SPG systems shall be reviewed by the personnel responsible for the power at that location. Contact the CenturyLink Network Reliability Operations Center at (800) 713-3666 or (800) 341-8188 for the name of the power representative for that location. The CenturyLink power representative will issue a ticket to be used for tracking purposes in the event of a network service interruption (refer also to Chapter 13 paragraph 13.8 and Par. 15.9). Contacts for other Switch and Common systems can be found at (800-830-0722).

The RG47-0162 (2/03) shall be used for all SPC system type work. All other type work shall use the RG47-0005 for both the General and the Detail MOP.



15-3

15.1 General Information

15.1.1 This section details the minimum requirements for the preparation of a Method Of Procedure (MOP) required for all work operations performed on equipment being added, removed or modified in any manner, in CenturyLink equipment facilities. All Service Suppliers performing any work in CenturyLink equipment facilities shall use the MOP form (RG47-0005) identified in this document. The MOP is a written agreement between a Service Supplier and CenturyLink which outlines either General or Detailed procedures and operations which shall be followed in their entirety.

15.1.2 The Service Supplier shall be responsible for the writing of the MOP PRIOR TO THE START OF ANY INSTALLATION ACTIVITY. The CenturyLink Representative, a designated member of the Business & Consumer Markets Group (B&C), is required to review and concur in its content. That individual may or may not have specific work related activities detailed on the MOP. Responsibility for work functions and operations are indicated on the MOP through a check off system.

15.1.3 The Service Supplier Representative responsible for the preparation of the MOP shall be knowledgeable in the proper use and completion of the MOP form and in the case of DETAIL MOPs, shall be experienced in the specific work operations involved and familiar with CenturyLink Standards.

15.1.4 A properly written MOP is intended to prevent the occurrence of costly service interruptions and to assure that work is performed in a safe and secure manner. It is the responsibility of the supplier preparing the MOP to clearly and accurately represent all work to be performed and to detail all required steps, procedures and locations where work is to be performed. Every effort shall be made by the Service Supplier and CenturyLink Representative to work in a cooperative manner to assure that no degradation of equipment or service will occur.

15.1.5 All completed MOP forms shall be retained by the Service Supplier at the site where the work operation will take place. During installation process, a copy of the MOP shall be posted in a convenient location, preferably near the actual equipment being installed, modified, or removed. Completed MOP forms shall be included with job documentation which is required to be turned over to the B&C representative upon completion of any order number.

15.1.6 It shall be understood by all parties that the content of individual MOPs shall be used to help affix responsibility for work operations, procedural errors, service outages and accidents which occur during the exercise of the detailed procedures. It is in the interest of all involved parties to assure that each and every MOP is complete and accurate.



15-4

15.1.7 Entries on MOP form RG 47-0005 appear in their proper respective fields and be legible and understandable. The form is designed to be utilized in computer/word processor type systems. Where these systems are not employed, a Service Supplier may make entries in permanent ink. One exception is in the Work Description Details Section where hand written entries may be too small to provide clarity. In those instances, entries several lines high may be used for the hand written characters as long as they remain associated with their respective numbered steps.

15.1.8 Any overtime, night shift or change of shift bonus associated with MOP work activity must be approved by the Installation Supervisor responsible for the order number under which the work activity is being performed. This requirement is not applicable to CenturyLink’s contracted installation suppliers/vendors.

15.1.9 The MOP form may be used to combine both the General and Detail process where the job complexity is such that separate forms are not justified. However, this does not allow for the short cutting of any of the required information as detailed in this section. When the MOP is intended to serve as a combined MOP, both the General and Detail boxes shall be checked.

15.2 General Method of Procedures

15.2.1 A General MOP, written to install, remove or modify equipment, shall be prepared for each Fireworks number and location. This also includes such activities as software loads, Product Change Notices (PCNs) and AC or DC power activities. MOP form RG 47-0005 provides a check off box to indicate that this form is being used as a General MOP.

15.2.2 The Work Description section of a General MOP defines the activity to be performed as well as the quantity, locations and equipment involved (i.e., all far end locations involved). Administrative or storage areas approved by the B&C representative shall be documented showing type and amount of materials allowed and the duration of area use. Extended breaks (greater than 30 days) in use of these areas for any reason will require cleanup and abandonment of the area and a new authorized General MOP upon restart of the activity.

15.3 Detail Method of Procedures

15.3.1 A separate Detail MOP shall be required for all work to be performed on live equipment, whether presently in service or not. This includes any work on equipment which is in an area where potential hazards to equipment or personnel exist. A job order number may have a number of Detail MOPs, one or more for each major work task (i.e., power, switch, transmission, Change Notices, Product Change Notices etc.). MOP form RG 47-0005 is provided with a check off box to indicate that this form is being used as a Detail MOP.



15-5

15.3.2 The work description section of a Detail MOP defines each step of the process and, in effect, is the step-by-step procedure under which the activity shall be performed. This includes all precautionary steps before, during and after each work effort. The MOP shall not be deviated from under any circumstances, unless approved and signed off by the B&C Representative responsible for the activity being performed. Success of the particular activity depends highly on the accuracy and completeness of this form.

15.3.3 Any document, referenced in the step-by-step procedure, shall be on site and readily available for use.

15.4 Method of Procedure Preparation

15.4.1 The MOP header portion shall be filled out in its entirety.

15.4.2 The header information provides a location to indicate individual page numbers as well as the total pages in the entire MOP. A statement below the header information includes the authorization to duplicate this blank form when additional entry space is required. An expansion sheet is also available if desired. In either case, multiple sheets of either type shall be consecutively numbered as appropriate, (i.e., 1 of 3, 2 of 3, 3 of 3).

15.5 Work Description Details

15.5.1 The purpose of this section is to define, in specific terms, either the generic equipment types and work activity covered under a General MOP, or to provide specific step-by-step procedures to be followed for a Detail MOP. The header information on the form indicates the intended application of the MOP.

15.5.2 To assist the Service Supplier in completing the Work Description Details, the left side of MOP form RG 47-0005 provides a subject matter checklist which may be helpful in the planning phase. The list is not intended to be all inclusive and simply asks, “Have You Considered” the following items.

15.5.3 The Service Supplier shall collect all essential information available for the job and confer with the CenturyLink Representative regarding the proposed sequence of work operations. An initial MOP walk-through, if needed or requested, shall be conducted at the work site, attended by appropriate B&C/CenturyLink representative, for the purpose of identifying potential hazards and special conditions which may affect work operations. Those items shall include such considerations as building and equipment conditions, customer service, safety issues, corrective measures and security procedures.



15-6

15.5.4 The work description portion of a Detail MOP shall be completed by the representative who will be responsible for the work operation. The Service Supplier representative shall be familiar with MOP procedures, CenturyLink Installation Standards as defined in various applicable publications and be qualified to perform the work operations detailed within the MOP, regardless of whether they will actually perform each step of the procedure themselves. An exception would be a manufacturer's Product Change Notice (PCN) where the process has been predetermined and has common application to a number of like order numbers. In those instances, the supplier shall be responsible for reviewing the unique building, safety and service considerations at each site.

15.5.5 An installer’s qualifications for involvement in the MOP writing process and work procedures shall be the responsibility of the Service Supplier. Each Supplier shall accept the responsibility for the work performed by their employees and their subcontractors.

15.5.6 The work description portion of a General MOP may be prepared by a representative of the Service Supplier provided that person is familiar with the generic equipment type and activity represented in the job detail specification.

15.5.7 All work detailed in the MOP shall conform to standards specified in CenturyLink Tech Pub 77350, “Telecommunications Equipment Engineering, Installation, and Removal Guidelines,” and other publications referenced in that document.

15.5.8 The work description in the MOP shall include all steps necessary to perform the work. Each step shall be numbered in the space provided and appear in the order in which they will occur in the work operation.

15.5.9 The Work Description Details portion of the MOP shall contain narrative references to all applicable steps. The check list entitled “Have You Considered” is intended purely to enhance the completeness of the narrative write-up and may not be use to indicate the subjects application to this MOP. Some examples would be if tools need to be insulated, the narrative should say “All required tools have been properly insulated.” If fuses are involved, the fuse position, amperage, and location of spare fuses shall be listed on the MOP.

15.5.10 Examples of entries in the “Have you considered?” portion of the MOP are:



15-7

NOTE: This List is not All Inclusive!

• Equipment Added including all frames, bays, units and apparatus.

• Equipment Removed including all frames, bays, units and apparatus tagged or identified.

• Equipment Compatibility with existing units and circuits.

• Affected Working Circuits not listed as added or removed on this work specification.

• Restricted Work Hours to be listed in the MOP header information.

• Work Area Protection to adjacent equipment and building.

• Special Tools/Materials such as circuit pack pullers, hoists, ungrounded drills, HEPA vacuum, etc.

• Tool Insulation including taping and inspection of all insulated tools.

• Safety Considerations including goggles, floor clutter, rubber gloves and aprons, insulated power blankets, etc.

• Emergency Equipment and Procedures Available including first aid, hazardous material, fire, etc.

• Procedures Available which are manufacturer or product specific.

• Fuse Alarm Operation checked for added and affected circuits.

• Location of Spare Fuses have been checked for availability.

• Records Correction where existing information has been altered. • Hazardous Material Handling and Storage policies, labeling, storage supplies and

required paperwork available.

• Personnel Experience considered for both work effort and MOP responsibility.

• Before and After Tests to be performed on applicable circuits.

• Backout Procedures covered in the eventuality that hardware, software errors or time restrictions preclude service restoration by the designated COMPLETION TIME.

• Referenced Documents shall be on site and readily available for use.

• Technical References are available and understood.

• Required CenturyLink Support has been discussed and is available.

• Emergency Restoration Plans have been discussed and are in place for any eventuality.



15-8

• Fuses and Leads Tagged for identification purposes including any AC circuits under LOCKOUT condition.

• Office Records/Drawings Available on site when necessary.

• Supplier Drawings Available on site when necessary as well as installation instructions and manuals.

• MOP Referenced Documents on site and available for use.

15.5.11 For each numbered procedure or step listed, a check off box has been included to indicate whether the step is the responsibility of the Central Office Operations Technician providing coverage or the responsibility of the Service Supplier.

15.6 Method Of Procedure Write-Up Review

15.6.1 Following the preliminary MOP write-up, the Service Supplier Personnel who will be performing the work operations and the B&C Personnel who will be responsible for coverage, along with appropriate CenturyLink representatives, shall conduct a dry run of the detailed procedures. At this time, any shortcomings or omissions in the write-up shall be addressed.

15.6.2 Any necessary changes shall be incorporated into the MOP write-up and a final copy shall be prepared for approval and COO representative signature.

15.7 Approval/Signing Authorities

15.7.1 No work shall be performed on any equipment, whether involving additions, removals, modification or any other activity, without proper approval and authorization.

15.7.2 The signing authority for each MOP appears at the bottom of the RG 47-0005 form. This authorization extends to all sheets in each MOP regardless of the number of sheets employed. If the MOP extension form RG 47-0006 is utilized, that form has no signing authority and has the notation “THIS FORM MAY NOT BE SUBMITTED WITHOUT RG 47-0005 CONTAINING THE SIGNING AUTHORITY.” The total number of sheets is indicated in the header information of the form. The Service Supplier and all signing parties are responsible for verification that their particular copy of the MOP is complete in all its pages. The MOP shall have a minimum of two signatures to be considered valid. First the Service Supplier employee or contract agent performing the work, and has been given that authority by the service supplier. Second the CenturyLink representative signature shall be the B&C manager responsible for that facility. He/she may delegate that authority to a CenturyLink Central Office Technician or other authorized and qualified CenturyLink Employee.



15-9

15.7.3 On a General MOP, the Service Supplier Representative may be the person performing the actual work activity. This person may be a Service Supplier’s supervisor or any duly appointed personnel in the supplier’s analysis center. The CenturyLink Representative field shall be signed by the B&C Supervisor and/or any duly appointed B&C Technician. All signing parties shall fill in their proper title, daytime / 24 Hour emergency phone number and date of signature in the appropriate field.

Note: Upon completion of the CLEC MOP, the B&C representative will fax that form to the Work Management Center at 303-707-9151.

15.7.4 On a Detail MOP, the Service Supplier Representatives [field] may be signed by the Service Supplier Supervisor and shall be signed by the Supplier Personnel performing the work. The CenturyLink Representative [field] may be signed by the B&C Supervisor or, with the B&C Supervisor’s consent, a B&C Technician. It is recommended that the B&C Technician who will cover the office during the work activity be one of the signatures. All signing parties shall fill in their proper title, daytime phone number and date of signature in the appropriate [field].

15.7.5 After the MOP has been adapted and approved by the B&C representative, no deviations from the procedures shall occur without approval from the B&C representative.

15.8 Service Interruptions

15.8.1 All service interruptions which occur during the exercise of work operations shall be processed per the procedure outlined in Chapter 13, paragraph 8, “Service Interruption and Degradation Report.”

15.8.2 Service must be restored as quickly as possible. The B&C personnel and the Service Supplier personnel shall work cooperatively to ensure that actual outage time is kept to a minimum.

15.8.3 The appropriate Network Reliability and Operations Center (NROC) monitoring organization shall be called immediately and informed of the outage. Refer also to Par. 14.20 (RG 47-0163) and 15.9.

15.8.4 All particulars which lead to the service outage shall be documented on CenturyLink Service Interruption Form RG 47-0013 and presented to the CenturyLink Representative within 24 hours of the outage. Refer to Par. 13.8 and 14.20 for reporting service interruption/degradation.



15-10

15.9 Network Change Management System (NCMS)

15.9.1 The purpose of the NCMS process is to formally register work activities by the Service Supplier with a CenturyLink B&C representative that have the potential to impact or cause an outage or network service disruption. The supplier shall review the Change Management Document 0013, Revision 1.0, for the specific purpose/function of the CenturyLink Change Management Policy.

15.10 Planned Impairment of Fire Protection Systems

15.10.1 For those central office locations equipped with a Very Early Warning Fire Detection (VEWFD) alarm system (Refer also to Par. 2.6 and Par. 8.32) the Service Supplier should be cognizant of the fact that when certain installation activities are performed (i.e., soldering, applying heat shrinkable tubing, HEPA vacuum filter changes, floor anchor drilling, etc), that these operations may have the ability to trigger these (very sensitive) fire detection systems.

15.10.2 Upon entering a central office location equipped with a VEWFD alarm system, the Service Supplier is instructed to locate that alarm unit and verify the presence of the alarm reset switch. Central Office Operations personnel will work with the Service Supplier to locate and, if applicable), disable the VEWFD.

15.10.3 Prior to conducting any work activity that has the potential to prematurely activate the VEWFD system, the Service Supplier is also instructed to conduct a planned impairment of the fire protection with the CenturyLink Real Estate Work Environment Center (WEC) as follows:

15.10.3.1 Contact the WEC at 1-800-201-7033 (opt. # 4) and inform the dispatcher that this is a “planned impairment of the fire protection system.”

15.10.3.2 The Service Supplier must be able to provide the dispatcher with the following information:

• Service Supplier’s name and company’s name. • Name of CenturyLink representative authorizing the impairment. • Service Supplier’s telephone and pager numbers. • Location (CLLI) and street address of the CenturyLink facility where

the impairment will occur. • Which system or equipment will be impaired. • Estimated length of time of the impairment. • Precautions established during the duration of the impairment.

15.10.4 The WEC dispatcher will provide the Service Supplier with a 4-digit Fire Protection Impairment Notification (FPIN) number that will be recorded on the RG 47- 0005 General MOP.



15-11

15.10.5 If, during the impairment period, the VEWFD alarm system does activate, the Service Supplier will contact the NROC at 1-800-713-3666 for additional guidance in clearing the alarm.


Chapter 16 Competitive Local Exchange Carrier

TOC-16i


16. Competitive Local Exchange Carrier .........................................................................16-1

16.1 General Requirements ...................................................................................16-1 16.2 Cable Holes, Penetrations, and Fire/Smoke Protection ...........................16-3 16.3 Equipment Designations ..............................................................................16-3 16.4 Local Exchange Carrier (CLEC) Grounding ..............................................16-4 16.5 Competitive Local Exchange Carrier (CLEC) Cancel, Expire, Decommission or Change of Responsibility...............................................16-5 16.6 Collocation Job Documentation ...................................................................16-7

Table

16-1 Grounding Conductor Size Requirements ..............................................................16-4



16-1

16. Competitive Local Exchange Carrier


Notes:

It shall be the responsibility of the Competitive Local Exchange Carrier (CLEC) or contracted agents to understand that it is required that all installation activities are done in such a manner not to jeopardize safety to persons or the service of the network. In addition all CLEC installations shall comply with Network Equipment Building System (NEBS) Level 1 safety standards. CenturyLink complies with all standards and requirements according to NEBS Level 1 and CenturyLink Technical Publications. CenturyLink shall not impose safety and engineering requirements on CLECs that are more stringent than the safety or engineering requirements CenturyLink imposes on its own equipment located on the premises. No work that could potentially affect the CenturyLink network shall be performed in any CenturyLink facility without a properly signed Method Of Procedure (MOP). This includes but is not limited to power changes to CLEC equipment. The MOP shall be posted in the area the work is being performed. Competitive Local Exchange Carrier or Contract agents doing work within a CenturyLink facility, shall comply with all environmental, security, safety and health standards outlined in this and other CenturyLink standards. The CLEC shall comply with all national, state and local codes and requirements. The CLEC is responsible for training its employees or agents on these standards and will be accountable for any violations.

16.1.1 Work done to CLEC Cageless collocation enclosures shall comply with all safety and network affecting standards outlined in this and other CenturyLink Technical Publications and Standard Configuration documents. CLEC equipment within the physical collocation enclosure shall comply with the workmanship requirements defined in this chapter.

16.1.2 The CLEC physical collocation enclosure(s) shall be provided by CenturyLink in accordance with the CenturyLink Standard Configuration. Cabling will be properly secured in the cable rack and at the breakoff point by CenturyLink and dropped into the enclosure from a height of 10 to 11 feet. The CLEC shall ensure that no cable drops over 3 feet without a support. The CLEC owner should identify all cabling that has connection points external to their enclosure.



16-2

16.1.3 CenturyLink reserves the right to review any installation in total or part for adherence to CenturyLink standards. CenturyLink may refuse to provide network and power connections and revoke the CLEC ‘s access and halt jobs in progress if CenturyLink requirements are not followed. Questions relating to CenturyLink requirements shall be directed through the State Interconnect Manager.

16.1.4 Fence chain link matting used for enclosure shall be the knuckle (smooth edge) type. Personnel safety requires that exposed cut ends not be used.

16.1.5 In accordance with NEC Article 240-8, CLEC fuse panels which are A and B fed from the nearest usable CenturyLink Power source (BDFB or PBD), shall only have one load panel per feeding fuse or breaker. CLEC feeders protected at 100 AMPs or greater shall be equipped with a means to monitor the load. Parallel fusing is prohibited.

16.1.6 CenturyLink requires emergency access to all cages for safety purposes. Combination locks (or combination lock-boxes, with a key inside to unlock a keyed padlock) must be provided by the CLEC and attached to each cage. This will provide the CenturyLink representative with emergency access into the cage when needed. CenturyLink also requires that the CLEC forward the combination code to its cage lock to the appropriate CenturyLink personnel e.g., State Interconnect Collocation Manager (SICM). The CLEC’s representative (emergency contact phone number located on the CLEC cage placard) must also retain the combination.

Note: CLEC cage lock combinations are considered CLEC proprietary information and will be treated accordingly. CenturyLink reserves the right to access the CLEC enclosure when work is required in the CenturyLink-owned space above the cage (this includes access to the overhead ironwork, cable racking, electrical conduit etc.). CLEC enclosure space will not be entered by anyone, for any reason, without first contacting the CLEC representative and the CenturyLink State Interconnect Collocation Manager and obtaining the required approval(s). CLEC collocation keys shall not be shared with other CenturyLink employees.

16.1.7 All combustible materials used or generated by the CLEC shall be removed from the CenturyLink Central Office areas at job completion or stored in metal cabinets provided by the CLEC and kept within the CLEC physical collocation space. During work activities, combustible materials shall be kept to the minimum required to perform the work. Combustible materials no longer needed shall be removed from CenturyLink Central Office areas daily.



16-3

16.1.8 The CLEC shall top support all equipment and anchor it to the floor. Equipment contained in cages, rooms or other structural enclosures may be anchored either to CLEC or CenturyLink standards. Equipment located within the CenturyLink equipment area must be top supported and anchored to CenturyLink standards contained in this and other publications. In no case may an anchor penetrate the floor more than 2 1/2 inches.

16.1.9 CLEC equipment located within a cage, room or other structural enclosure exclusive to that CLEC, such as equipment in a virtual or cageless common collocation, shall be tested to meet a minimum of Network Equipment Building Standards (NEBS) level 1 requirements as specified in Ericsson (formerly Telcordia Technologies) documents SR-3580, GR-63-CORE and GR-1089-CORE. The equipment in these areas may be top-supported in accordance with the CLEC standards.

16.1.10 CLEC equipment not located within a cage, room or other structural enclosure exclusive to that CLEC shall be tested to meet all of NEBS level 1 requirements as well as the structural requirements of NEBS level 3 that relate to earthquake resistance as specified in Ericsson (formerly Telcordia Technologies) documents SR-3580, GR-63-CORE and GR-1089-CORE. Welded ferrous frameworks shall be used in all cases. The CLEC shall anchor and top-support all equipment in these areas in accordance with CenturyLink standards. CLEC equipment not meeting CenturyLink standards will be removed by the CLEC within 90 days of notification by CenturyLink. If the CLEC does not remove this equipment with the 90 day time period, it may be removed by CenturyLink at the expense of the CLEC.

16.1.11 The CLEC shall be responsible for placing convenience outlets in its frameworks for its own use, such as test sets. If permanent AC power is required for any CLEC equipment, the outlets and all associated cordage shall be completely located within the footprint of the bay. All required AC will be provided by CenturyLink to the vicinity of the CLEC equipment. The CLEC shall not access CenturyLink AC panels or run AC except to this access point. The use of outlets located in CenturyLink or other CLEC frameworks shall be prohibited without the express written permission of the other CLEC or CenturyLink.

16.2 Cable Holes, Penetrations, and Fire/Smoke Protection

16.2.1 The CLEC shall not open or close cable holes unless the CLEC can prove that their COEIT installation representative is competent to perform such function per the fire-stopping material manufacturer’s certification requirements. If it is deemed that the CLEC is required to open and close a CenturyLink fire-stopped cable hole/penetration prior to the commencement of installation work within the central office, the CLEC is required to submit proof of cable hole/penetration fire stopping certification when completing the general MOP per Chapter 15.



16-4

16.3 Equipment Designations

16.3.1 The Caged collocation equipment enclosure or area shall be designated with a placard showing: Company Name, Floor, enclosure designation, 24-hour emergency contact. Typical designation would be “ABC, 01A – John Doe 303-707-XXXX”. No signs shall be permitted on or within the enclosure area that advertise the CLEC or any company’s products or services. The CLEC shall keep its emergency phone number current. All placards shall meet CenturyLink combustible policy. See Par. 2.10.

16.3.2 Equipment frames in a common cageless physical collocation shall be designated with a label or stencil. The label shall show the CLEC name, and 24-hour emergency contact number. The CLEC shall keep its emergency phone number current.

16.3.3 Cables that are passed off to a CLEC owner shall be labeled to show their far end location. CLEC owners shall transfer these designations to their equipment using tags or labels. Designation tags or labels shall be required on power feeders prior to being powered up. CLEC owner shall designate cables to show far end termination Frame/Bay/Cabinet, Shelf/Plate/unit, and fuse. An example of this could be (BDFB 101.01 Panel/Load A, Fuse A15).

16.3.4 The Cageless collocation equipment area (relay racks) shall be labeled as defined in chapter 8 of this publication.

16.3.5 AC Feeders shall be designated at the distribution panel with CLEC Company Name and the floor the cage is located on. At the CLEC cage the AC circuits shall be designated with far end location.

16.4 Competitive Local Exchange Carrier (CLEC) Grounding

16.4.1 The CLEC shall ground all equipment frames, bays and cabinets with a minimum #6 AWG grounding cable to the CO ground provided by CenturyLink. See CenturyLink Technical Publication 77355 for additional information and requirements.



16-5

Table 16-1: Grounding Conductor Size Requirements

Serving Single CLEC Enclosures Collocation Enclosure

Size Distance from COGB Conductor Size

100 Sq Ft or less Within 75’ 1/0 AWG 100 Sq Ft to 499 Sq Ft More than 75’ 4/0 AWG

500 Sq Ft or more any 750 kcmil

Serving Multiple CLEC Enclosures with a single feed

Feeder size (from COGB) Route Remarks

750 kcmil Perimeter .01 ohm or less (COGB to CLGB)

Taps to enclosures must follow rules for Single CLEC Enclosures

16.4.2 Enclosures using chain link fabric shall be bonded to the CLGB from two opposite corners. Each shall use a minimum 6 AWG stranded “green-wire” copper conductor and connected with a properly sized two-hole crimp-type copper lug which is properly sized for the connection point. All bonding connections shall be treated with an anti-corrosion compound. All conductors shall be permanently designated with the far end termination location.

16.4.2.1 Bonding continuity shall be maintained through all fence sections. Deliberate bonding is not required; however, fence hardware used for this purpose shall be tested for compliance. It shall be designated as the grounding path bonding point. Metallic doors or gates shall be bonded to the adjacent metallic wall or fence with a flexible- bonding conductor.

16.4.2.2 Deliberate bond points made through surface contact shall be designated “GRD” in 3/16 inch or 18-point font.

16.4.3 CLEC equipment requiring “Isolated Ground Plane” grounding must be physically separated from equipment using “Integrated Ground Plane” grounding. CenturyLink will not allow direct connection of CLEC “Isolated Ground Plane” feeders to its ground windows.



16-6

16.4.4 CLEC design of an “Isolated Ground Plane” for its equipment may be aided by information contained in TEC PUB 77355 Chapters 5 and 8. While CenturyLink does not make any recommendations regarding the design, this publication may assist the CLEC. The CLEC may set up a separate ground window following the general principles of Figures 8-6 through 8-9 in TEC PUB 77355, or use the return bar of its BDFB. Where the CLEC chooses to install its own ground window, the bar becomes a Collocator’s Main Grounding Bus (CMGB).

16.4.5 CLEC equipment using the integrated ground plane within six feet of an isolated ground plane should be foreign-object grounded back to the integrated side of the CLEC ground window. In addition, the CLEC should insure the isolated ground plane equipment is spaced at least six feet from any enclosure metal to prevent accidental human contact with both ground planes at the same time.

16.5 Competitive Local Exchange Carrier (CLEC) Hold, Decommission, or Abandonment of Facilities

16.5.1 In a CLEC Hold situation, the CLEC turns down their service (essentially deactivates it), but leave the equipment installed for potential future reuse. Power fuses will be removed (or breakers turned off) at power board or BDFB. The positions will be labeled/tagged as reserved for their future use.

16.5.2 In a “full” and “partial” Decommissioning, the CLEC equipment is physically removed. Power fuses will be removed (or breakers turned off). The -48V & RTN leads shall be disconnected but will remain in place on the cable rack and properly stored at the CLEC far-end. The -48V “drop” lead extending from the cable rack into the PBD or BDFB will be removed (up to and including the H-tap on the cable rack). The Service Supplier shall tag both ends of the conductor(s) left on the cable rack along with all other CLEC-related cabling with the required “Decommission” tags (Refer also to Par. 8.19.6, 8.24 and 14.17).

Note: It is preferred that the Service Supplier place heat shrinkable rubber end caps on all exposed ends of the disconnected power leads, and store all cabling in a manner that will not cause cable rack congestion and/or constitute a safety hazard. In the absence of heat shrinkable end caps, a double layer of approved electrical tape will suffice.

16.5.3 When cabling is secured to the sides of CLEC caged enclosures for provisioning and/or decommissioning, the Service Supplier is advised to protect that cabling with a double-wrapped layer of sheet fiber paper. The bundled cables can be secured with 9 ply cord or nylon tie wraps.

16.5.4 When a CLEC abandons their space/equipment without informing CenturyLink, nothing can be removed until permission is received from the CenturyLink Legal Department and the SICM (State Interconnect Collocation Manager).



16-7

16.6 Collocation Job Documentation

16.6.1 For CLEC provisioning and augmentation activities, the Service Supplier will complete all documentation per RG 47-0160 (Sheets 1 to 6) relevant to the nature of the work outlined in the Job Specification. Refer also to Par. 14.17.

16.6.2 In performing decommissioning work, the Service Supplier will also complete the pertinent sheets of RG 47-0160 and indicate the correct location(s) of equipment removed or deactivated from service and forward to the designated Design Engineer. Refer also to Par. 8.19.6 and 8.24.

16.6.3 Upon completion of installation work relating to the CLEC’s equipment space, RG 47-0145 will be completed to assess the environment’s fitness for use by the designated CLEC. This documentation will be completed jointly by CenturyLink and CLEC representatives. Any issues of non-conformance will be corrected prior to CLEC occupancy. Refer also to Par. 14.14.


Chapter 17 Definitions

TOC 17-i


17. Definitions ................................................................................................................... 17-1

17.1 Acronyms ........................................................................................................17-1


17-1


17. Definitions

17.1 Acronyms AA Analytical Associate

AC Alternating Current

ACEG AC Equipment Ground

AMP Ampere

APCL Approved Product Classification List

APS Area Plant Supervisor

AWG American Wire Gauge

B&C Business & Consumer Markets Group

BAN Billing Authority Number

BDCBB Battery Distribution Control Breaker Board

BDFB Battery Distribution Fuse Bay

BOL Bill of Lading

CACC CenturyLink Access Control Center

CAR Corrective Action Report

CDF Combined Distributing Frame

CDO Central Dial Office

CEC Controlled Environment Chamber

CEF Cable Entrance Facility

CEO Central Office Equipment



17-2

CEV Controlled Environment Vault

CFC Chlorofloro Hydrocarbon

CFR Code of Federal Regulations

CL Competency Level (CL-1, CL-2, CL-3, or CL-4)

CLEC Competitive Local Exchange Carrier

CLGB Collocated Local Ground Bar

CLLI Common Language Location Identifier

CM Contract Manager

CMGB Collocator’s Main Ground Bus

CN Change Notice

CO Central Office

CO GRD Central Office Ground

COE Central Office Equipment

COEIT Central Office Equipment Installation Technician

COGB Central Office Grounding Bus bar

CP Capacity Provisioning

CP CenturyLink Procurement

CPA Construction Program Administrator

CPR Cardiopulmonary Resuscitation

CQM Corporate Quality Manager

CRAC Computer Room Air Conditioning

CSA Canadian Standards Association

CSPEC Common Systems Power & Space, Environment, Central Office



17-3

DC Direct Current

DCS Digital Cross-Connection System

DF Distributing Frame

DNA Do Not Assign

DOT Department Of Transportation

DSX Digital System Cross Connect

DWP Design Work Package

EF&I Engineer, Furnish, and Install

EHS Environmental Health & Safety

EJP Electronic Job Packet

EMT Electrical Metallic Tubing

EPA Environmental Protection Agency

ESD Electrostatic Discharge

ESOT Engineering Services and Order Tracking

ESS Electronic Switching System (See SPCS) FB

ETEL Electronic Telemetry

FB Fuse Bay

FDP Fiber Distribution Panel

FDX Fiber Distribution Cross Connect

FMT Flexible Metallic Tubing

FMT Fiber Management Tray

FOG Foreign Object Ground(ing)

FPIN Fire Protection Impairment Notification



17-4

FRC Field Reporting Code

FSF Fiber Switch Frame

FB Fuse Bay

FW Fireworks

GFCI Ground Fault Circuit Interrupter

GFI Ground Fault Interrupter

GPS Global Positioning System

GRD Ground

HEPA High Efficiency Particulate Arrester

HVAC Heating, Ventilation and Air Conditioning

HVSD High Voltage Shut Down

ICA Interconnection Agreements

IMP Inter-bay Management Panels

INAP Intelligent Network Application Part

IOT Installation Order Tracking

ISP Inside Plant

JIM Job Information Memorandum

kcmil Thousand Circular Mills

LBO Line Build Out

LE Line Extension

LNO Local Network Operations

LPEC Local Planning Engineering Construction

LVD Low Voltage Disconnect



17-5

MC Management Center

MDF Main Distributing Frame

MGB Main Grounding Bus (Bar)

MOP Method Of Procedure

MRC Material Reclamation Center

MRF Material Review Form

MT Miscellaneous Trunk

NAVL North American Van Line (Trademark)

NDS Network Design Systems

NE Network Element

NEBS Network Equipment Building Standards

NEC National Electrical Code

NEMA National Electrical Manufacturers' Association

NEP Network Electronic Purchasing

NFPA National Fire Protection Association

Ni_CAD Nickel Cadmium

NiMH Nickel Metal Hydride

NMA Network Monitoring and Analysis

NNS National Network Services

NPC Network Procurement Center

NROC Network Reliability Operations Center

NTC Network Traffic Center

NTF No Trouble Found



17-6

OFNP Optical Fiber Nonconductive Plenum

OFNR Optical Fiber Nonconductive Riser

OPGP Office Principle Ground Point

OSHA Occupational Safety and Health Administration

OSP Outside Plant

PANI Producers, Absorbers, Neutrals & Isolated

PB Power Board/Bay

PBD Power Board/Bay Distribution

PCB Polychlorinated Biphenyls

PCN Product Change Notice

PDF Power Distribution Frame

PEG Planning & Engineering Guidelines

PICS Protocol Implementation Conformance Statement

PID Product Identification

PPE Personal Protective Equipment

PPM Parts Per Million

PRBS Pseudo Random Binary Sequence

PVC Polyvinyl Chloride

RBOC Regional Bell Operating Company

RCRA Resource Conservation Recovery Act

RMA Returned Materials Authorization

ROW Right Of Way

RR Relay Rack



17-7

RTN Return

RUS Rural Utility Service

SAE Society of Automotive Engineers

SAR Supplier Assessment Report

SICM State Interconnection Manager

SME Subject Matter Expert

SNA Space Not Available

SPCS Stored Program Control System

SPG Single Point Ground

SPGB Signal Point Ground Bus Bay

TEIG Telecommunications Equipment Installation Guidelines

TIRKS Trunks Integrated Record Keeping System

TPI Threads Per Inch

TR Temperature Reference

UE Universal Enclosure

UL Underwriters Laboratory

UPS Uninterrupted Power Supply

V Volt

VDC Volts, Direct Current

VEWFD Very Early Warning Fire Detection

VOM Volt/Ohm Meter

VRLA Valve Regulated Lead Acid Battery

WEC Work Environment Center



17-8

WMC Work Management Center


Chapter 18 References

TOC 18-i


18. References .................................................................................................................... 18-1

18.1 CenturyLink Technical Publications ...........................................................18-1 18.2 Ericsson (formerly Telcordia Technologies) Publication ...............................18-2 18.3 Ordering Information ....................................................................................18-2 18.4 Trademarks .....................................................................................................18-3



18-2

18. References

18.1 CenturyLink Technical Publications

77351 CenturyLink Central Office Telecommunications Equipment Engineering

Standards, Module 1, Issue F, June 2001 77353 CenturyLink Central Office Drawing Standards, Issue C, September 1990 77355 Grounding Central Office and Remote Equipment Environment, Issue E,

June 2002 77360 Specification Standards for Antenna and Waveguide Installation, Issue E,

September 2001 77369 Technical Publication, Installation Supplier Quality Workmanship

Assessment Guidelines, Issue G, March 2007 77385 Power Equipment and Engineering Standards, Issue J, July2013

18.2 Ericsson (formerly Telcordia Technologies) Publication CURRENT ISSUE

GR-1275-CORE Central Office/Network Environment, Equipment Installation/Removal Generic Requirements, Issue 12, December, 2010.

18.3 Ordering Information CenturyLink Technical Publications from: www.centurylink.com/techpub

http://www.centurylink.com/techpub



18-3

18.4 Trademarks

3M Trademark of Minnesota Mining and Manufacturing Co.

CenturyLink® Registered Trademark of CenturyLink Communications International

CMP Trademark of Hevi Duty/Nelson Co.

COMMON LANGUAGE Registered Trademark of Ericsson.

Flame Safe Trademark of International Protective Coatings Corp.

Hilti Trademark of Hilti Corporation.

PLW Trademark of Hevi Duty/Nelson Co.

Sikaflex Trademark of Sika Corp.

Sonneborn Trademark of Chemrex

Vulkem Trademark of Mameco

Telecommunications Equipment Installation Guidelines

Documents

Transcript of Telecommunications Equipment Installation Guidelines